Sib 8b keds" edie tacos ya sie AB) iar Sega he e yt Vw RA eee. ene Aas Retlocttha) Miduadbath ate. og ae ram 3 ae BN jen ee i wth ta Cabs Aka tate VETER Ooty Aye (ears le kA sey) Ae eS RS ok ep nse avis, ee Hc “y 3 b tee te hao Se Aas ie PROCEEDINGS Thona,: OF TRE BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. WITH THE ADDRESSES READ ON THE OCCASION OF” THE DARWIN MEMORIAL MEETING, May 12, 1882. PUBLISHED WITH THE CO-OPERATION OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, VoLuME I. NOVEMEER 19, 1880, TO May 26, 1882. WASHINGTON: PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY. 1882. sine cae a. iv é 1 ee PUBLICATION COMMITTEE. G. BROWN GOODE. RICHARD RATHBUN. LESTER F. WARD. INTRODUCTORY NOTE. Tuis volume of Proceedings is published in obedience to the vote of the Society, passed May 26, 1882. The BioLocicat Soci- ETY OF WASHINGTON was organized December 3, 1880, and at the time of its summer adjournment, in 1882, carries upon its roll the names of one hundred and thirty-nine active members, one hon- orary member, and twenty corresponding members. It has held thirty-one regular meetings, three special meetings, and one field meeting. At its regular meetings fifty-four communications have been presented, nearly all of which, except informal verbal com- munications, have already been published, as is indicated in the bibliographical foot notes. It has inaugurated and, in conjunction . with the Anthropological Society, carried on a course of eight popular scientific lectures, four of which were delivered in its special behalf, and all of which were delivered by its members. The meetings of the Society have always been held in rooms provided by the courtesy of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution ; the first fifteen in the Regents’ Room of the Smith- sonian Institution; the sixteenth to the twenty-fourth in the Archive Room of the National Museum; the subsequent meetings in the Lecture Room of the Museum. In preparing the proceedings of the Society for publication, the Secretaries have omitted the record of the election of members from the minutes of the several meetings, the information there contained being presented in a much more convenient form in the “¢ List of Members.’’ hun ate LIST OF THE CoUNCIL AND OFFICERS OF THE BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. 1882. COURCHTI. THEODORE GILL, President. TARLETON H. BEAN. RICHARD RATHBUN. JOHN W. CHICKERING, Jr. ROBERT RIDGWAY. G. BROWN GOODE. CHARLES V. RILEY. JEROME H. KIDDER. HENRY ULKE. OTIS T. MASON. GEORGE VASEY. D. WEBSTER PRENTISS. LESTER F. WARD. OFFICERS. PRESIDENT. THEODORE GILL. VICE PRESIDENTS. CHARLES V. RILEY. LESTER F. WARD. JOHN W. CHICKERING, Jr. HENRY ULKE. SECRETARIES, G. BROWN GOODE. RICHARD RATHBUN. TREASURER. ROBERT RIDGWAY. aes LIST OF MEMBERS OF THE BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Date of Election. 1$81, Jan. 14. 1882, Mar. 31. 1881, April 8. 1882, April 28. 1881, Feb. 25. 1881, Feb. 25. 1882, Jan. 6. 1882, April 14. 1882, Jan. 6. JULY 1, 1882. HONORARY MEMBERS. BAIRD, SPENCER FULLERTON, M.D., LL. D., M. N. A. S. Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution and Director of the U. S. National Museum. U. S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries. Swztthsonian Institution, and 1445 Massachusetts Avenue N. W. CORRESPONDING MEMBERS. AGassiz, ALEXANDER, A.B.,S.B., M.N.A.S. Curator of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge. Cam- bridge, Massachusetts. ALLEN, Jor: AsAPH, M.N.A.S. Assistant in Ornithology in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge. Cam- bridge, Massachusetts. BREWER, WILLIAM HENRY, Ph. D., M. N. A. S. Professor of Agriculture in the Sheffield Scientific School, Yale College, New Haven. New Haven, Connecticut. BREWSTER, WILLIAM, Cambridge, Massachusetts. Brooks, WILLIAM KEITH, Ph. D. Associate Professor of Biology and Director of the Marine Laboratory of Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore. altimore, Maryland. CoLLETT, RoBerRT, Docent and Assistant in the Zoological Museum of the University of Christiania. C*réstia.tta, Norway. DERBY, ORVILLE ADELBERT, M. S., Chief of the Geological Survey of Brazil. Rio de Faneiro, Brasil. FARLow, WILLIAM GiLson, A. M., M. D., M. N. A. S. Professor of Cryptogamic Botany in Harvard University. Cambridge, Massachusetts. 9 10 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Date of Election. 1881, Mar. II, 1882, Jan. 6. 1882, Mar. 31. 1882, Jan. 6. 1881,*April 8. 1882, Mar. 31. 1882, Mar. 31. 1882, Mar. 3. 1881, Feb. 25. 1882, Mar. 31. 1882, April 28. 1882, Mar. 3. CORRESPONDING MEMBERS—Continued. GIGLIOLI, ENr1co HILtyer, Director of the Royal Zoologi- cal Museum of Vertebrates, and Professor of Vertebrate Zoology in the Royal Institute, Florence. 2. Justituto de Studi Superiori, Florence, Ltaly. Gray, Asa, M. D., LL. D., M. N. A. S. Fisher Professor of Natural History in Harvard University. Botanic Gar- den, Cambridge, Massachusetts. GRIMM, Oscar VON, Ph. D., Professor of Natural History in the Forest Academy, St. Petersburg. St. Petersburg, Russia. Hyatt, AtpHeus, S. B., M. N. A. S. Professor of Zoology and Paleontology in the Massachusetts Institute of Tech- ‘nology. Custodian of the Boston Society of Natural History. Cambridge, Massachusetts. LAWRENCE, GEORGE N., 45 Last 2rst St., New York City. MorsE, Epwarp S., M. N. A. S. Director of the Peabody Academy of Science, Salem. Salem, Massachusetts. PACKARD, ALPHEUS SPRING, Jr., M. D., M. N. A. S. Pro- fessor of Zoology and Geology in Brown University, Provi- dence. Providence, Rhode Island, . SMITH, SIDNEY IRVING, Ph. B. Professor of Comparative Anatomy in Yale College, New Haven. Mew Haven, Con- necticut. VELIE, JoHN W., M.D. Secretary and Curator of the Chicago . Academy of Sciences. 267 Wabash Avenue, Chicago, llli- nots. VERRILL, ADDISON Ewory, A. M., S. B., M. N. A. S. Pro- fessor of Zoology and Curator of the Zoological Collections in Yale College, New Haven. Mew Haven, Connecticut. WATSON, SERENO, Ph. D., M. N. A. S. Curatorof the Her- barium of Harvard University. Botanic Garden, Cambridge, Massachusetts. WILSON, EDMUND BEECHER, Ph. D. Assistant in the Bio- logical Laboratory of Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore. Baltimore, Maryland. IP" 2s Date of Election. Orig. Member. 1881, Jan. 1882, Mar. 3. 1881, Nov. Il. Orig. Member. 1881, Mar. 25. 1881, Nov. 11. 1882, Mar. 17. 1881, Jan. 14. 1882, Jan. 20. 1882, Feb. 17. 1881, Nov. 11. Orig. Member. LIST OF MEMBERS. 11 ACTIVE MEMBERS.* ASHFORD, FRANcIs AspurY, M. D. Dean of Faculty and Professor of Surgery in the Medical Department of the University of Georgetown. 127370 Mew York Avenue N. W. Baker, FRANK, M. D. Assistant Demonstrator of Anatomy and Prosector to the chair of Anatomy in the Medical De- partment of Columbian University. Office of Light House Board, and 326 C Street N. W. BARKER, JOHN SHEPARD, 775 H Street NV. W. BARNARD, WILLIAM STEBBINS, S. B., Ph. D. Assistant in the Entomological Division, U. S. Department of Apical ture. 723707 Q Street NV. W. BEAN, TARLETON HOFFMAN, M.D. Curator, Dep’t of Fishes, U. S. National Museum. Jational Museum, and #404 S Street V. W. BESSELS, EMIL, M. D., Ph. D. sggr Massachusetts Avenue NV. W. BEYER, Henry G., M. D. Passed Assistant Surgeon, U. S. Navy. Naval Hospital. BILLINGS, JOHN SHAW, A. M., M.D. Surgeon and Brevet Lieutenant Colonel, U.S. Army. Librarian of the Surgeon General’s Office. Surgeon General's Office, and 3027 N Street N. W. BIRNEY, HERMAN HOFFMAN, sgor Harewvod Avenue, Le Droit Park. BIRNEY, GEN, WILLIAM, zgor Harewood Avenue, Le Droit Park. BLIsH, JOHN BELL, Midshipman U. S. Navy, on duty in the National Museum. Swe2zthsontan Institution. BRANSFORD, Joun FRANCIS, M.D. Passed Assistant Surgeon, U.S.N., on duty at the Smithsonian Institution. Ssthsonian Institution. Brown, JAMES TEMPLEMAN, Aid, U. S. National Museum. National Museum, and 1425 S Street N. W. * When not otherwise expressly stated, all addresses are in Washington. By the word * Founder” are designated those who signed the call for the meeting for organization, November 26, 1880; oxi “Orig. Member” those who attended this and the succeeding meeting. 12 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Date of Election. Orig. Member. Orig. Member. 1882, Mar. 17. Orig. Member. 1881, June 3. 1881, June 3. 1882, Feb. 17. Founder. 1881, May 20. 1882, Mar. 17. 1881, Jan. 28. itl Feb. 25. Orig. Member. 1881, Dec. 23. 1881, Dec. 23. ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. BROWN, STEPHEN CARVOSSO, Registrar, U. S. National Mu- seum. JVational Museum, and 928 B Street S. W. BurRDICK, EDSON ALMERON, Pension Office,and 406 Spruce Street VN. W. BURNETT, SWAN Moses, M. D. Lecturer on Ophthalmology and Otology in the Medical Department of the University of Georgetown. sa2z5 1 Street N. W. BusEY, SAMUEL CLAGETT, M. D. Professor of the Theory and Practice of Medicine in the Medical Department of the University of Georgetown. sz525 L Street NV. W. CANBY, WILLIAM JACKSON, 4737 Zenth Street N. W. CARMAN, MyRON ALBERT, D.D.S., zozs Fourteenth St. N. W. CHASE, HENRY SANDERS, Midshipman, U. S. Navy, on duty in the National Museum. Swithsonian Institution. CHICKERING, REv. JOHN WHITE, Jr., A. M. Professor of Natural Science in the Columbia Institution for the Deaf and Dumb. Kendall Green, N. E. CHICKERING, JOHN JAMESON, A. M. Teacher in the Public Schools. Kendall Green, N. £. CHRISTIE, ALEXANDER SMYTH, Astronomical Computer in the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. Coast Survey Office, and 207 New Fersey Avenue N. W. -CLARK, ALONZO Howarp, Special Agent in the Fishery Division of the Tenth Census. ational Museum, and 933 G Street NV. W. CoL1Ins, JOSEPH WILLIAM, Special Agent in the Fishery Division of the Tenth Census. National Museum, and Gloucester, Massachusetts. Comstock, JOHN Henry, S. B. Assistant Professor of _Eth- nology and Lecturer on the Zoology of Invertebrates in Cornell University, Ithaca. Jthaca, New York. Conant, Woopsury Pack, Assistant Botanist, Department of Agriculture. Agricultural Department. Coves, ELLioTT, M. D., Ph. D., M. N. A. S. Professor of Anatomy in the Medical Department of Columbian Univer- sity. Smithsonian Institution, and 1321 N Street N. W. Date of Election. 1881, Nov. II. 1881, Feb. 1881, Jan. 1882, Feb. 1881, Feb. 1881, Nov. 1881. Nov. 1882, Jan. 1831, Jan. 1881, Feb. 1881, Nov. 1881, Jan. 1881, Mar. 1881, Feb. 1881, Dec. 25. 28. 25. Il. 20. 28. 25. 25. 28. 25. LIST OF MEMBERS. 13 ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. Cox, WILLIAM VAN Zant, A. B. Fish Commission Office, and zorr Twelfth Street N. W. DALE, FRANK C., M. D. Passed Assistant Surgeon, U. S. N., on U. S. Steamer “ Palos’’ on China Station. DAL, WILLIAM HEALEY, Assistant, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. Honorary Curator, Dept. of Mollusks, U. S. National Museum. Coast Survey Office,and 1119 Twelfth Street N.W. Davis, Harry C., A. B. Adjunct Professor of Greek in Columbian University. 677 Maryland Avenue S. W. DrHAas, WILLS, M. D. Care of Bureau of Ethnology, Smithsonian Institution. DEWEY, FREDERICK PERKINS, Ph. B. Assistant, Dept. of Metallurgy, U.S. National Museum. Wational ALuseum, and Whitney Avenue N. W. DopcE, CHARLES RICHARDS, Special Agent, Tenth Census, Division of Fruit and Orchard Statistics. 237376 Vermont Avenue N. W. DosH, FRANK BOWMAN. m107re. Fohns Hopkins University, Bailti- EARLL, ROBERT EDWARD, S. B. Special Agent in the Fishery Division of the Tenth Census. (Vational Museum, and bor, M Street N. W. ELLIOTT, Henry Woop. Smithsonian Institution, and Cleve- land, Okio. ELuizrey, Mason GRAHAM, A. M., M. D. Lecturer on Hy- giene and Medical Jurisprudence in the Medical Department of the University of Georgetown. sor2 J Street NV. W. FERGUSON, THomAs B., Assistant Commissioner of Fisheries. 1435 Massachusetts Avenue N. W. FLETCHER, ROBERT, M. D,, Acting Assistant Surgeon, U. S. Army. Surgeon General’s Office, and 1326 L Street N. W. Fuint, JAMEs MitTon, M. D. Surgson, U. S.. Navy. Hon- orary Curator, Section of Materia Medica, U. S. National Museum. ational Museum, and Riggs House. FOREMAN, EDWARD, M. D. Assistant, U. S. National Mu- seum. National Museum, and 200 Eleventh Street S. W. 14. BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Date of Election. 1882, Feb. 17. 1881, Mar. 25. Orig. Member. 1881, Mar. II. 1882, April 28. Founder. Founder. Orig. Member. 1881, Nov. 11. Orig. Member. 1881, Feb. 25. 1882, Feb. 3. 1882, Feb. 17. ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. GARRETT, LERoy Mason, Midshipman, U. S. Navy, on duty at the National Museum. Swzzthsonian Institution. GANNETT, Henry, S. B., A.Met.B. Geographer of the Tenth Census and of the U. S. Geological Survey. Office of Geological Survey, and 1881 Harewood Ave., Le Droit Park. GEDNEY, CHARLES DEFoREST, Coast Survey Office, and 115 F Street N. E. GIHON, ALBERT LEARY, A. M., M. D. Member of Naval Board of Inspection. Medical Director, U.S. Navy. 7736 I Street N. W. GILBERT, GROVE KARL, Geologist, U. S. Geological Survey. In charge of the Division of the Great Basin. Office of Geological Survey, and 1881 Harewood Ave., Le Droit Park. GILL, THEODORE NICHOLAS, M. D., Ph. D., M. N. A. S. Lecturer on Natural History in Columbian University. Cos- mos Club, and 321 and 323 Four-and-a-half Street. GoopE, GEORGE Brown, A. M. Assistant Director of the U.S. National Museum. Chief of Division of Fisheries, U. S. Fish Commission, and Special Agent in charge of Fishery Division, Tenth Census. Swtthsoniaz Institution, and 1620 Massachusetts Avenue N. W. Gore, JAMes Howarp, S. B. Adjunct Professor of Mathe- matics in Columbian University. Honorary Curator of the Food Collection, U. S. National Museum. Columbian Uni- ' versity, and 1305 Q Street N. W. : GRIFFITH, SAMUEL HENDERSON, M. D. Passed Assistant Surgeon, U.S. Navy. Bureau of Medicine, U. S. Navy. HASSLER, FERDINAND AuGusTus, M. D. 12374 Thirteenth Street N. W.,and Tustin City, Los Angeles Co., California. Hawes, GEORGE WEssoN, Ph. D. Curator, Dept. of Min- eralogy, U. S. National Museum. Special Agent in charge of the Building Stone Division, Tenth Census. Died at Colorado Springs, Colorado, June 23, 1882. HAWKES, WILLIAM Himes, A. B., M. D. Acting Assistant Surgeon, U. S. Army. U. S. Army Dispensary, and 1105 F Street N. W. HAYDEN, EDWARD EVERETT, Midshipman, U. S. Navy, on duty at the National Museum. Smithsonian Institution. Date of Election. 1882, Mar. 31. 1881, Jan. 14. Orig. Member, 1882, April 14. 1882, May 26. 1882, April 27. Orig. Member. 1881, Feb. 25. _—~L., Founder. é 1882, Mar. 3. 1882, Jan. 20. 1882, Feb. 3. Orig. Member. Orig. Member. Orig. Member. LIST OF MEMBERS. 15 ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. HENSHAW, HENRY WETHERBEE, Special Agent in the Indian Division of the Tenth Census. Bureau of Lthnology, Smithsonian Institution, and go; M Street N. W. HEssEL, RuDOLPH, Ph. D., Superintendent of Government Carp Ponds. sr4 Tenth Street N. W. HOFFMAN, WALTER JAMES, M.D. Bureau of Ethnology, Smithsonian Institution, and 222 E Street N. W. HORNADAY, WILLIAM TELL, Chief Taxidermist U. S. National Museum. ational Museum, and Llarewood Avenue, Le Droit Park. HouGH, FRANKLIN BENJAMIN, Ph. D. Chief of Division of Forestry, U. S. Department of Agriculture. Agricultural Department. Houcu, Myron BEACH WARNER. U. S. Treasurer’s Office, and 312 Indiana Avenue N. W. Howarb, LELAND O., 5. B. Assistant in the Entomological Division, U. S. Department of Agriculture. Agricultural Department, and 1407 Fifteenth Street N. W. HOWLAND, EpwIn Perry, M.D. 272 Four-and-a-half Street NV. W. INGERSOLL, ERNEST. Vew York City. JOHNSON, ARNOLD Burcess, A. M., Chief Clerk, U. S. Light House Board. Le Droit Park. JOHNSON, BLANCHARD FREEMAN. Le Droit Park. JOHNSON, JosEPH TABER, A.M., M.D. Professor of Obstet- ‘rics and Diseases of Women and Infants, in the Medical Department of the University of Georgetown. Gynecologist to Providence Hospital. 9377 Mew York Avenue N.W. Jouy, Pirrre Louis, Assistant Naturalist of U. S. Steamer « Palos’? on China Station. KIDDER, JEROME Henry, A.M.,M.D. Surgeon, U. S. Navy. Bureau of Medicine, VU. S. Navy, and 1601 O Street N. W. Kinc, ALBERT FREEMAN AFRICANUS, M. D. Professor of Obstetrics and Diseases of Women and Children, in the Medical Department of Columbian University. 726 Thir- teenth Street N. W. ae 16 Date of Election. 1881, Nov. Orig. Member. 1882, Mar. 1882, Jan. 1831, Jan. ! 1881, May 1881, Nov. 1882, Feb. 1882, Jan. 25. 17. 20. 28. 20. It. 20. Orig. Member. Orig. Member. 1881, Jan. 1881, June 3. 1882, Feb. 1881, Dec. Orig. Member. 28. 17. 9. BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. KoEBELE, ALBERT, Aid, U. S. National Museum. 700 Thirteenth Sireet N. W. LrE, WILLIAM, M. D. Professor of Physiology in the Med- ical Department of Columbian University. 2zrz Pennsyl- vania Avenue NV. W. LeEEcH, DANIEL, Swithsonian Institution, and 1507 Vermont Avenue N. W. LEHNERT, REV. E., Pastor, German Lutheran Church. McDONALD, MARSHALL, Chief of Division of Propagation and Transportation, U. S. Fish Commission. Commissioner of Fisheries for the State of Virginia. Special Agent Fishery Division of Tenth Census. Fish Commission Office, and 909 Twenty-third Street N.W. McMurtTrik, WILLIAM, E. M., M. S., Ph. D. Examiner of Wool in the U. S. Department of Agriculture. Ag7icultural Depariment, and 1728 I Street N. W. MANN, BENJAMIN PICKMAN, A.M. Assistant in the Entomo- logical Division, U. S. Department of Agriculture. <Aygri- cultural Depurtment, and 1203 Q Street N. W. MARSH, CHARLES CARROLTON, Midshipman, U. S. Navy, on duty at National Museum. Smithsonian Institution. MARTIN, FRANK, Aid, U. S. National Museum. WJadéional Museum, and 1835 G Strect N. W. _Marx, GrorcE, Zoological Draughtsman, U. S. Department of Agriculture. Agricultural Department, and 1626 Four- teenth Street N. W. Mason, Otis Turron, Ph. D. Principal of the Preparatory Department of Columbian University. z3705 QO St. VW. W. MERRILL, GEORGE Perkins, M.S. Aid, U. S. National Museum. ational Museum, and 3033 N Street N. W. MILLER, BENJAMIN, Jr. 1576 Thirty-first Street N. W. MINER, RANDOLPH IIUNTINGTON, Midshipman, U. S. Navy, on duty at National Museum. Swthsonian Institaution. NELSON, EpwarpD W., U.S. Signal Service observer at St. Michael’s, Alaska. Swetthsonian Institution. Norris, Bastt, M. D. Surgeon and Brevet Colonel, U. S. Army. 7829 G Street NV. W. Date of Election. Founder. ‘Orig. Member. Orig. Member. 1881, Feb, U1. Orig. Member. Founder. 1881, May 20. 1881. Dec. 9. Founder. F ounder, 1882, Mar. 17. 1882, April 28. 1882, Mar. 31. Orig. Member. 1882, Jan. 20. 1881, Mar. 11. 2 LIST OF MEMBERS. 17 ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. PATTON, WILLIAM HAMPTON, A. B. Mew York City. PERGANDE, THEODORE, Assistant in Entomological Division, U. S. Department of Agriculture. 327 D Street N. W. PCRTER, JOHN HAMPDEN, M.D. 2720 M Street N. W. POWELL, JOHN WESLEY, Ph. D., LL. D., M.N.A.S. Direc- tor, U. S. Geological Survey, and Director, Bureau of Eth- nology, Smithsonian Institution. Mational Museum, and 910 M Street N. W. PRENTISS, DANIEL WEBSTER, A.M.,M.D. Professor of Ma- teria Medica and Therapeutics, in the Medical Department Columbian University. Commissioner of Pharmacy, District of Columbia. s224 Ninth Street N. W. RATHBUN, RICHARD, Curator, Dep’t of Marine Invertebrates, U.S. National Museum. Siithsonian Institution, and 1622 Massachusetts Avenue N. W. RAv, CHARLES, Ph. D. Curator, Dept. of Antiquities, U. S. National Museum. Svxzzthsonian Institution. Reypurn, Ronert, A. M.,M.D. Professor of Physiology — and Hygiene, Medical Department, Howard University. 2129 F Street N. W. RIDGWAY, ROBERT, Curato>, Dep’t of Birds, U. S. National Mu- seum. S.nithsonian Institution, and 218 Eleventh Street S. W. RILEY, CHARLES VALENTINE, Ph. D. President, U. S. Ento- mological Commission. Entomologist U. S. Department of Agriculture. Honorary Curator, of Insects in the U. S. National Museum. Agricultural Department, and 1700 Thirteenth Street N. W. RICHEY, STEPHEN OLIN, M. D. 2226 New York Avenue. RussEL, IsRAEL Cook, Assistant Geologist U. S. Geological Survey. Salt Lake City, Utah. RYDER, JOHN ADAM, Embryologist, U. S. Fish Commission. Smithsonian Institution, and Chambersburg, Pa. SCHAFFER, EDWARD MARTIN, M.D. St. Cloud Building, and 1114 Nineteenth Street N. W. SCHONBORN, HENRY. 21737 Seventh Street N. W. 'SCHUERMANN, CARL WILHELM, U. S. National Museum and 916 D Street S. W. 18 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Date of Election Orig. Member. 1881, Jan. 14. Orig. Member. 1882, May 26. Orig. Member. Orig. Member. 1881, Nov. 1882, Feb. 1881, Nov. i 17. If. Orig. Member. 1881, Nov. 1881, Mar. 1882, Mar. 1881, Feb. 1882, Feb. If. 2%. 17. 25. ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. SCHWARZ, EUGENE AMANDUS, Assistant in the Entomological Division, U. S. Department of Agriculture. 606 H Street N. W. ScUDDER, CHARLES WILLIS, Clerk, U. S. Fish Commission. 127 F Street N. E. ScupDER, NewTon Pratt, A.M. Aid, U. S. Fish Commis- sion. 727 F Street N. £. SEATON, CHARLES W., Superintendent of the Tenth Census. Census Office, and 303 M Street N. W. SEAMAN, WILLIAM Henry, A. M. Professor of Chemistry in the Medical Department of Howard University. sg2g Eleventh Street N. W. SHELDON, CHARLES STILES, Census Office. SHUFELDT, RoBeRT Witson, M.D. Assistant Surgeon and Captain U.S. Army. Hon. Curator, Section of Bird Skele- tons U. S. National Museum. ational Museum, and 819 Seventeenth Street N. W. SHUTE, DANIEL Kerroot, A. B. Children’s Hospital. Co- _ lumbian College Hill. SMITH, WILLIAM ROBERT, Superintendent of U. S. Botanical Garden. Botanical Garden. SMILEY, CHARLES WesLrey, A. M. Chief of Division of Records, U. S. Fish Commission. Special Agent, Fishery Division, Tenth Census. Fish Commission Office, and 1207 Lleventh Street N. W. ; STEJNEGER, LEONHARD, (of Bergen, Norway.) Aid U. S. National Museum. Absent in Siberia. STERNBERG, GEORGE MILLER, M.D. Surgeon, U. S. Army. ; Secretary of the National Board of Health. Fort Point San Fosé, San Francisco, Cal. STEVENSON, JAMES, Executive Officer of the U.S. Geological Survey. ational Aluseum. STIMPSON, WILLIAM GORDON. ational Museum, and 214 Twelfth Street S. W. STREETS, THOMAS Hate, M. D. Passed Assistant Surgeon, U.S. Navy. Bureau of Medicine, U. S. Navy. Date of Election. 1882, Mar. 17. Orig. Member. 1881, Dec. 9. 1881, Jan. 28. Orig. Member. Founder. 1881, Dec. 23 Orig. Member. 1881, Mar. 25. Founder. Founder. Orig. Member. 1881, May 20. 18831, Jan. 28. LIST OF MEMBERS. 19 ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. TAYLOR, FREDERICK WILLIAM, Chemist, U. S. National Mu- seum. WJVational Museum, and r120 Vermont Avenue N. W. Taytor, THomas, M. D. Microscopist, U. S. Department of Agriculture. Agricultural Department, and 238 Massa- chusetts Avenue N. £. THOMPSON, JOHN ForD, M. D. Professor of Surgery, Med- ical Department, Columbian University. sooo Ninth Street NV. W. Topp, JAMES Epwarp, Ph. D. _ Professor of Natural History in Tabor College and Lecturer in Beloit College. Zador, Lowa. TONER, JOSEPH MEREDITH, M. D. N. W. 615 Louisiana Avenue TRUE, FREDERICK WILLIAM, M.S. Librarian, and Curator Dep’t of Mammals, U. S. National Museum. Mational Museum, and 3033 N Street N. W. TURNER, LuciEN M., Observer, U. S. Signal Service, Ungava, Labrador. ULKE, HENRY, srrz Pennsylvania Avenue N. W. UprHaAM, EpwWIN Porvrer, Aid, U. S. National Museum. Smithsonian Institution, and 1317 Eleventh Street N.W. VasEY, GeorGE, M. D. Botanist, U. S. Department of Ag- riculture. Agricultural Department,and 1437 S Street N.W. WARD, LrEsTER FRANK, A. M., LL. B. Paleo-botanist, U. S. Geological Survey. Honorary Curator, Dep’t of Fossil Plants, U. S. National Museum. National Museum, and 1464 Rhode Island Avenue N. W. WHITE, CHARLES ABIATHAR, A.M.,M.D. Curator, Dep’t of Fossil Invertebrates, U. S. National Museum. Paleeontolo- gist U. S. Geological Survey. Vational Museum, and gog Maple Avenue, Le Droit Park. Wuite, MAurRIcE PutNAM, Teacher, Public Schools. Sixth Street VN. W. J5°7 WILLIAMS, ALFRED, Department of State, and 134 C Street N. EZ. 20 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Date of Election. Orig. Member. 1881, Dec. 9. 1881, Jan. 28. 1882, Feb. 17. Orig. Member. 1881, Feb. 25. 1882, Jan. 6. ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. WILsoN, JOSEPH MCMuNN. UW. S. Pension Office, and 1108 Maryland Avenue S. W. WINSLow, FRANcIs, Lieutenant, U. S. Navy, on duty with U. S. Fish Commission. Brightwood, D. C. WOLFLEY, WILLIAM IRVIN, A. M., M.D. zgo C Street N. Z. YARNALL, JOHN IlEppuRN, M. D. 3028 P Street N. W. YARROW, Henry Crécy, M.D. Acting Assistant Surgeon U.S. Army. Hon. Curator, Dept. of Reptiles U. S. National Museum. Surgeon General’s Office, and 814 Seventeenth Street V. W. YEATES, WILLIAM SMITH, A. M. Aid, U. S. National Mu- seum. JVational Museum, 2522 L Street N. W. ZUMBROCK, ANTON, M. D., Electrotyper and Photographer, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. Coast Survey a and 306 © Street N. W. THE BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON CONSTITUTION. Adopted December 3, 1880. ARTICLE I. NAME. The name of this Society shall be ‘‘ THE BioLocicaL SOcIETY OF WASHINGTON.”’ ARTICLE II. OBJECTS. ‘Its objects shall be to encourage the study of the Biological Sci- ences, and to hold meetings at which papers shall be read and dis- cussed. | ARTICLE III. MEMBERS. The Society shall consist of active, corresponding and honorary members. Candidates for membership shall be proposed to the Council, in writing, by at least three members, and, upon recom- mendation of the majority of the Council present at its regular meeting, shall be balloted for at the earliest ensuing meeting. A majority vote of the members present when the ballot is taken shall be necessary to election. ARTICLE IV. OFFICERS. The officers shall be a President, four Vice Presidents, two Sec- retaries, and a Treasurer. There shall be a Council, consisting of the officers of the Society and five members, to be elected by the Society. A quorum of the council shall consist of seven members. 21 79 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Its duties shall be to act on nominations for membership, have the direction of the finances, audit the accounts of the Treasurer, and provide a programme for each meeting of the Society. The officers shall be elected by ballot at each annual meeting, and shall serve one year, or until their successors are elected. ARTICLE V. PRESIDENT AND VICE PRESIDENTS. The President, or, in his absence, one of the Vice Presidents, shall preside at meetings of the Society and Council. The presid- ing officer shail appoint all committees in the Council and in the Society, unless otherwise ordered. It shall be the duty of the re- tiring president to deliver an address at the second meeting in January. ARTICLE VI. SECRETARIES. The Secretaries shall take and preserve correct minutes of the proceedings of the Society and Council and a record of the mem- bers, shall conduct its correspondence, give due notice of all meet- ings, and inspect and count all ballots. ARTICLE VII. TREASURER. The Treasurer shall have charge of all money and other property of the Society, and shall make disbursements under the direction of the Council. He shall collect all fees and assessments, and notify members who may be in arrears. 3 ARTICLE VIII. SECTIONS. Sections for special work in any department of Biology may be formed upon the recommendation of the Council. ARTICLE IX. MEETINGS. Stated meetings shall, unless otherwise ordered, be held on Friday of each alternate week, at eight o’clock P.M. ‘The annual meeting CONSTITUTION. 23 for the election of officers shall be the first meeting in January. Special and field meetings may be called by the Council. ARTICLE X. FEES. The initiation fee shall be one dollar; the annual fee one dollar. Members in arrears for one year shall, after due notification by the Treasurer, be dropped from the rolls. No member in arrears shall be entitled to vote at the annual meeting for the election of officers. ARTICLE XI. AMENDMENTS TO THE CONSTITUTION. The constitution of the Society may be amended by a two-thirds vote of the members present at any regular meeting, after at least four weeks’ notice. ARTICLE XII. ORDER OF BUSINESS. The order of business at each regular meeting, unless otherwise provided by the Council, shall be as follows: _ I. Reading of minutes. II. Reports of Committees. III. Balloting for members. IV. Nominations for membership. V. Miscellaneous business. VI. Reading of papers, discussions and exhibition of specimens. Article XII may be suspended at any time by a two-thirds vote of the members present. PROCEEDINGS. PRELIMINARY MEETING, November 19, 1880. In response to a letter of invitation signed by C. V. Riley and G. Brown Goode, ten gentlemen met at the house of the former, No. 1700 Thirteenth Street N. W., to take into consideration a project for the organization of a natural history society in the city of Washington. Capt. C. E. Dutton, U. S. A. was chosen chair- man. After an informal interchange of views and a discussion of various propositions advanced by those present, it was decided to send out a call for a general meeting to be held on the following Friday evening, to which all known to be interested in the objects of the proposed society should be invited. The following persons were in attendance at this preliminary meeting: Captain Clarence E. Dutton, Prof. Theodore Gill, Messrs. G. Brown Goode, Ernest Ingersoll, W. H. Patton, Richard Rathbun, C. V. Riley, Fred- erick W. True, Lester F. Ward, and Dr. George Vasey. MEETING FOR ORGANIZATION, November 26, 1880. In response to a call signed by C. E. Dutton, J. W. Chickering, Jr., Theodore Gill, G. Brown Goode, Ernest Ingersoll, W. H. Pat- ton, Richard Rathbun, Robert Ridgway, C. V. Riley, F. W. True, Lester F. Ward, and George Vasey, about thirty gentlemen assembled in the Regents’ Room, at the Smithsonian Institution. Prof. Riley was elected chairman, and Mr. Goode, Secretary. After much dis- cussion it was decided to organize a society to be called THE BioLocicaL SociETY OF WASHINGTON. A committee consisting of Messrs. Gill, Goode, Rathbun, Riley, and Ward was appointed to draw up a form of constitution for the proposed society, and to submit the same at a meeting to be held on the evening of Friday, December 3. ‘ 24 PROCEEDINGS. 25 First Mretinc, December 3, 1880. Thirty-five gentlemen assembled in the Regents’ Room of the Smithsonian Institution, to hear the report of the Committee ap- pointed to prepare a constitution for the projected society. Prof. Riley acted as chairman and Mr. Goode as secretary. The com- mittee presented its report, and the form of constitution proposed by them was read articie by article, and article by article modified and adopted. The constitution as a whole, in the form appended to these proceedings, was then adopted. The Society then adjourned to Friday evening, December 10, at which time a meeting was ap- pointed for the completion of the organization of the Society by the election of a board of officers. SECOND MEETING, December to, 1880. Twenty-two persons met in the usual place. Professor Gill was called to the chair, and, on the motion of Prof. Ward, the Society proceeded to ballot for officers for the ensuing year. The following board of officers was elected : Prestdent—THEODORE GILL. Vice-Presidents—C. V. Ritey, J. W. CHIcKERING, LESTER F. Warp, Henry ULKE. Secretaries—G. BRowN GOODE, RICHARD RATHBUN. Treasurer—ROBERT RIDGWAY. Members of Councit—J. H. Comstock, O. T. Mason, J. H. Kip- DER, A. F. A. Kinc, GEORGE VASEY. The Society then adjourned to meet on the 24th of December. THIRD MEETING, December 24, 1880. The President occupied the chair, and thirty-one members were present. Messrs. Riley, Goode and King were announced as having been appointed a committee on communications. Dr. Tarleton H. Bean presented a communication entitled NoTES ON A VOYAGE ALONG THE CoAsTS OF ALASKA AND SIBERIA IN THE SUMMER OF 1880.* * Published in part in the Mew York Times for September 17, November 21, and December 6, 1880, 26 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. FourtH MEETING, January 14, 1881. (First Annual Meeting.) The President occupied the chair and thirty members were present. In accordance with the recommendation of the Council one of the Secretaries of the Society was instructed to cast the vote of its members for the entire board of officers elected at the meeting of December 10, such having been the understanding at the time of that election. The officers elected at that time were then an- nounced as having been re-elected to serve during the coming year. : The President announced that the Secretary had been authorized to have printed 250 copies of the constitution, with list of officers and members, and requested all members to send in their full names, that the customs of similar societies might be conformed to. Prof. L. F. Ward read a paper entitled THE FLora COLUMBIANA OF 1830 AND 1880, which contained comparisons between the list of the plants of the District of Columbia printed in 1830 by Dr. Brereton and the lists perfected by the resident botanists of to-day. * Prof. D. S. Jordan, of the Indiana State University, read a paper entitled THE SALMON OF THE Paciric Coast.f FirTH MEETING, January 28, 1881. The President occupied the chair, and thirty-six members were present. | The President delivered his first annual address upon THE PRIN- CIPLES OF BIOLOGY WITH REFERENCE TO Taxonomy.{ In the discussion of the presidential address, Messrs. Comstock, Mason, Ward, Riley and White participated. * Included in the following paper : 1882. WARD, LEsTER F. Guide | to | the Flora | of | Washington and Vicinity | By | Lester F. Ward, A. M. | ——| Washington: Government Printing Office, | 1881. 8&vo., pp. 264 + 2, with map = Bulletin of the U. S. National Museum, No. 22. (U.S. National Museum, No. 26.) +1881. JORDAN, DAVID S., AND CHARLESH. GILBERT. Observations on the Salmon of the Pacific. <(American Naturalist. XV, 1881, (March,) pp. 177- 186. { The essentials of this address are embodied in the articles BroLocy (Vol. I, 1875,) and MorpHoLocy (Vol. III, 1877,) in Yoknson’s Cyclopedia. New York, 1875-8 PROCEEDINGS. 27 SixtH MEETING, February 11, 1881. The President occupied the chair, and thirty-seven members were present. An hour was devoted to the completion of the discussion of the presidential address, Messrs. White, Ward, King and Gill taking part. Dr. J. H. Kidder, U.S. N., exhibited a series of photo- micrographs of objects obtained floating in the air of Washington. He also exhibited photo-micrographs of the dry rot fungus from the U. S. Steamer ‘‘ Portsmouth,”’ after its infection by yellow fever, of spores of various organisms collected in the yellow fever hospitals of Cuba, and of blood corpuscles from patients affected by various febrile diseases.* SEVENTH MEETING, February 25, 1881. Prof C. V. Riley, V. P., occupied the chair and thirty-two mem- bers were present. Prof Riley read a paper entitled THE FERTILIZATION oF Yucca.f Dr. C. A. White gave an account of a collection of fossils, includ- ing 1500 species, duplicates of the celebrated collection of James Hall, State Geologist of New York, recently received by the National Museum from the American Museum of Natural History in New York. Mr. Frederick W. True read a paper entitled SUCTORIAL PREHENSION IN THE ANIMAL KinGDom.} EIGHTH MEETING, March 11, 1881. The President occupied the chair, and thirty-four members were present. In discussing Mr. True’s paper on ‘‘Suctorial Prehension’’ Prof. *1881. KIDDER, JEROME H. Report | on | an examination | of the | exter- nal air of Washington | by J. H. Kidder, M. D., | Surgeon, U. S. Navy. | | [Extracted from the Report of the Surgeon General | of the Navy for 1830.] | | Washington: | Government Printing Office. | 1882. | 8vo., pp. 22 + 1 (+ 1), 10 plates. +1881. Ritey, CuaRxLes V. Further notes on the Pollination of Yucca and on Pronuba and Prodoxus. < Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science. 1881, Vol. XXIX, Part II, pp. 617-639, figs. 1-16. t To be published in the proceedings of the U. S. National Museum. 28 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Seaman referred to the climbing organs of the Virginia creeper, Ampelopsis quingucfolia, and of the so called ‘‘suckers’’ of various sea-weeds, which though perhaps not suctorial in action seem to cling to objects in a manner which is similar to suctorialism. Prof. Riley spoke of a suctorial organ of prehension in the thoracic proleg and anal pseudopod of Szmzzlium larve and to the ventral branchie of the helgramite or dobson, Corydalis cornutus, larva, which are suctorial in function. Prof. Gill, speaking of the suctorial powers of young marsupiates stated that he believed them to exert an actual suctorial power, even though the teats be somewhat modified to aid them in clinging. ‘Their first attachment to the teat is purely suc- torial, though afterward probably the result of a spasm-like action of the sphincter-oris muscle. He also referred to the suctorial organs possessed by certain bats. Mr. Patton called attention to the peculiar structure of the larva of Blepharocera which inhabits tor- rents and has six segments, each provided with a separate suctoria] organ, probably prehensive. Dr. A. F. A. King read a paper entitled SEPTENARY PERIODICITY IN LiviING ORGANISMS; in the discussion of which Messrs. Prentiss, Riley, Scudder, Ward, and many others participated. NintH MEETING, March 25, 1881. The President occupied the chair, and thirty-five members were present. Col. Marshall McDonald read a communication ON THE Laws oF THE RELATION OF PERIODICITY IN DEVELOPMENT TO TEMPERATURE. This papér was discussed by Messrs. Prentiss, King, Busey, Gill and Chickering. Prof. J. W. Chickering, Jr., read a paper entitled Roan Moun- TAIN AND ITS FLora.* Prof. J. E. Todd read a paper entitled ON THE FLOWERING OF SOLANUM ROSTRATUM, AND CASSIA CHAMACRISTA.T * See 1882. CHICKERING, JOHN W., Jr. Notes on Roan Mountain, North Carolina. < Bulletin, Philosophical Society of Washington. IV. 18381. pp. 60-64. (Flora, p. 63). 71882. Topp, James E. On the Flowers of Solanum rostratum, and Cassia chamecrista. <(American Naturalist. XVI, 1882. (April). pp. 281- 287. PROCEEDINGS. 29 TentH MeEetTiNnG, April 8, 1881. The President occupied the chair, except when reading his paper, at which time he was replaced by Vice President Ward. Twenty- three members were present. Prof. Gill read a paper entitled A Critica, Review or Gun- THER’S STUDY OF FiIsHES,* and a short discussion upon the merits of this article ensued, participated in by Messrs. Goode, Gill and Ward. ELEVENTH MEETING, April 22, 1881. ; The President occupied the chair, and thirty-eight members were present. A committee of the Council submitted the following report upon the formation of sections, in accordance with one of the provisions of the Constitution : The committee recommends, (1.) That five sections be formed as follows: I, Vertebrates; II, Articulates; III, Mollusks; IV, Radiates; V, Plants. For | these sections the following members are suggested as chairmen: I, Mr. Goode; II, Prof. Riley; III, Mr. Dall; IV, Mr. Rathbun; V, Prof. Ward. (2.) The members of the Society shall be requested to inform the Secretary what section or sections they desire to co-operate with. (3.) New members on joining the Society shall be requested to signify to the Secretary what departments of Biology they are each respectively interested in. Signed by the Committee: C. V. Riley, O. T. Mason, George Vasey, G. Brown Goode, Robert Ridgway. The President announced that the temporary chairman would be authorized to call meetings of the sections, and that members were expected to hand in their decisions as to the sections which they desire to join. Dr. George M. Sternberg, U. S. A., Secretary of the National Board of Health, read a paper entitled A Fatat Form or SEptI- *1881. GILL, THEODORE. Reprinted from the “ Forest and Stream.” | | Giinther’s | Literature and Morphography of Fishes. | A review of | Dr. Giinther’s introduction to the | study of Fishes. | | By Theodore Gill, M. A., M. D., Ph. D., | Member of the National Academy of Sciences, etc., etc. | | New York : | Forest & Stream Publishing Co., | 1881. 12mo., pp. 106. See also Zhe Critic, 1, (May 21, 1881,) pp. 132-3; Zhe New York Times, May 29, 1881; Forest & Stream, XVI, p. 428, (June 30, 1881;) Sezence, VII, pp. 323-6, (July 9, 1881;) Zhe Nation, XXXII, pp. 120-2, (August 11, 1881.) 30 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. C/EMIA IN THE RABBIT, PRODUCED BY THE SUBCUTANEOUS INJEC- TION OF HumMAN Sativa.* This paper was discussed by Messrs. Thomas ‘Tayen, Fletcher, King, Comstock, Ward, and Gill. Mr. Ernest Ingersoll read a paper entitled ON THE Morrauity oF MARINE ANIMALS IN THE GULF OF MExIco.* At the close of the meeting the roll of members was called, and the following persons enrolled themselves as members of the several sections : Section I. en Baker, Birney, Clark, Earll, Gill, Goode, Hoffman, King, Mason, Prentiss, Ridgway, N. P. Scudder, C. W. Scudder, Smiley, Thomas Taylor, True, Ward, Wolfley, Fletcher, Flint, Schuermann, Sternberg. Section II. Messrs. Birney, Comstock, Merrill, Patton, Pergande, Riley, Schwarz, Marx, Howard, and Ulke. Section III. Messrs. Gill, Sheldon, and Ingersoll. Section IV. Messrs. Gill and Rathbun. Section V. Messrs. Comstock, Earll, Goode, Gore, Merrill, Pat- ton, Riley, Schwarz, Seaman, Sheldon, Smiley, Thomas Taylor, Vasey, Ward, Williams, Wolfley, Sternberg, Hawes, Flint, and Hoff- man. First Fretp MEETING, April 30, 1881. On Saturday, April 30, the Botanical Section held a field meeting at High Island, in the Potomac River, above the Chain Bridge. Seventeen members were present. TWELFTH MEETING, May 6, 188t. Vice-President Ward occupied the chair. Twenty-three members were present. * 1881. STERNBERG, GrorcE M. A fatal form of Septiczemia in the Rabbit, produced by the sub-cutaneous injection of Human Saliva. < Studies from the Biological Laboratory of Johns Hopkins University. II. 1882, pp. 183-200. Plate XIV. (March.) * 1881. INGERSOLL, ERNEST. Onthe Fish Mortality in the Gulf of Mexico. IV. <Proceedings, U. S. National Museum, IV, 1881, pp. 74-80. PROCEEDINGS. 31 Prof. Lester F. Ward read a paper entitled A STATISTICAL VIEW oF THE FLORA OF THE District or CoLuMBiIA.* Prof. J. H. Comstock read a paper entitled NoTEs on SCALE IN- sECts, illustrating his remarks by a collection of specimens.t THIRTEENTH MEETING, May 20, 1881. The President occupied the chair. Thirty-one members were present. Prof. Riley made some remarks upon Prof. Comstock’s paper on Scale Insects, and was responded to by Prof. Comstock. Dr. George M. Sternberg, U. S. A., read a paper entitled On M1- CROCOCCUS SEPTICUS] illustrating his remarks by photo-micrographs thrown upon a screen by the lantern. This paper was discussed by Messrs. Seaman, Ward, and Taylor. FOURTEENTH MEETING, June 3, 1881. The President occupied the chair. Thirty-five members were present. It was announced that after the next meeting the Society would be adjourned until the first Friday in October. Dr. D. W. Prentiss read a paper entitled THE PuysioLocicat Ac- TION OF JABIRANDI, (PILOCARPUS PINNATIFOLIUS.)$ __ * 1881. WARD, LESTER F. Field and Closet Notes on the Flora of Washington and Vicinity. <Bulletin, Philosophical Society of Washington. IV. 1881. pp. 64-120. (Statistical View pp. 88—104, 116-119.) See also in Bulletin 22 U. S. National Museum, cited above, p. 26. +1881. Comstock, JAMEs H. Report on Scale Insects. <Report of the Entomologist of the U. S. Department of Agriculture for the year 1880. pp. 235-373- (Scale Insects, pp. 276-349. Plates III~XXII.) { STERNBERG, GrorcE M. A Contribution to the Study of the Bacterial Or- ganisms commonly found upon exposed Mucous Surfaves, and in the Alimentary Canal of Healthy Individuals. <Studies from the Biological Laboratory of Johns Hopkins University. II. 1882. pp. 157-181. Plates XI-XIII: and in Pro- ceedings, American Assoc. Adv. Sci., XXX, 1881. $1881. PReENTIss, D. WEBSTER. Remarkable change of color of the hair from light blonde to nearly jet black in a patient, while under treatment by pilo- carpin. Report of pyelo-nephritis, with unusually prolonged anuria. <Phila- delphia Medical Times. XI. 1881. (No. 335, July 2, 1881.) pp. 609-12; also reprinted with following title: 1. | Remarkable change in the color of the | hair from light blonde to 382 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Mr. G. Brown Goode read a paper entitled THE MAcKEREL,* and was followed by Captain J. W. Collins who explained and illus- trated the uses of the various kinds of apparatus used in the mack- erel fishery.t FIFTEENTH MEETING, June 17, 1881. The President occupied the chair. Fifty-two members were present. Mr. Robert Ridgway exhibited a collection of wild and domesti- cated turkeys. Mr. Newton P. Scudder made a communication upon the breeding habits of the Painted Tortoise, Chrysemys picta. Dr. Thomas Taylor exhibited some specimens of a tapeworm from the common hog.{ Mr. Frederick W. True exhibited the first vol- ume of the new annual, Zoologischer Fahresbericht, published in Leip- zig, and compared its merits with those of the London Zoological Record Prof. C. V. Riley exhibited specimens of the seventeen- year locust, and the Rocky Mountain locust, explaining the differ- ence between them and describing their habits.§ The Society then adjourned to the basement of the Smithsonian Building, where Col. Marshall McDonald described some recent black in a | patient while under treatment by | pilocarpin.—Report of a | py- elo-nephiritis, with unusu- | ally prolonged anuria. | 2. | Care of membranous croup treated suc- | cessfully by pilocarpin. | By | D. W. Prentiss, A.M., M. D., | Professor Materia Medica and Therapeutics, National Medical College, Wash- ington, D. C. | — | Printed by | J. B. Lippincott & Co., Philadelphia. | 1881. 8vo., pp. 15-1. Also—Change in the color of the human hair under the use of pilocarpin. <(Cincinnati T.ancet and Clinic. XLVI. 1881. (Sept. 3.) pp. 202-205; colored plate and < Proceedings of American Association for the Advancement of Science, XXX, (Cincinnati Meeting,) 1881. *1882. Goopr, G. Brown. Natural History of the Mackerel. < Materials for a History of the Mackerel .Fishery in Report U. S. Fish Commission. Part © VII for 1881, pp. (1)-(48.) +1882. CoLLins, JosEPH W. (With G. Brown Goode.) The Mackerel Fishery of the United States. Ibid. pp. (49)-(140-+-.) * 1882. TAyLorR, THOMAS. Ona tape-worm from the common hog. <Re- port of the Commission of Agriculture for 1882, pp.——. (In press.) @1881. RILEY, CHARLES V. The Periodical Cicada a/ias “ Seventeen-year Locust.” <American Naturalist, XV, 1881, pp. 479-481, one figure. PROCEEDINGS. 33 experiments in fish culture, illustrating his remarks by apparatus in which the eggs of the shad, Clupea sapidissima, were in process of hatching. He announced that he had succeeded in keeping shad eggs for twenty-four hours in a half dry condition in moist cloth, and in thus transporting them from place to place, instead of the old cumbersome vessels filled with water.* Mr. John A. Ryder exhibited, under the microscope, eggs of the shad in various stages of development, and announced the discov- ery of teeth in shad four or five days old. + SIXTEENTH MEETING, October 28, 1881. The President occupied the chair. Thirty-two members were present. | This evening the Society met for the first time in the Archive Room of the National Museum. Prof. Lester F. Ward exhibited a supposed petrifaction, resembling the hand of a mammal, from near Granger’s Station, Wyoming. A discussion followed upon the phe- nomena of opalization, and the formation of pseudomorphs, in ~ which Messrs. Taylor, Gill, Schaeffer, Dall, and Ulke participated. Mr. Henry W. Elliott read a paper ON THE HaBiTs or THE SEA OTTER, (PUSA LUTRIS,) OF THE NORTHWEsT Coast, illustrating his remarks by specimens and sketches on the blackboard.{ Dr. Thomas Taylor exhibited a new form of freezing microtome, invented by himself, and demonstrated its manner of working.§ SEVENTEENTH MEETING, November 11, 188r. The President occupied the chair. Twenty-eight members were present. * See Report of the U. S. Commission of Fisheries for 1881, (Part VIII,) and Transactions of the American Fish Cultural Association for 1882. +1882. RyDER, JOHN A. The Protozoa and Protophytes considered as the primary or indirect source of the food of fishes. <Bull., U. S. Fish Comm., I, 1882, pp. 236-251. (Eggs and food of young shad, pp. 248-9.) {To be printed in the forthcoming Census report on the Fisheries of the United States. : #1882. TAYLOR, THomMAs. Onanew form of freezing microtome. <Proc. Amer. Assoc. Adv. Sci., XXX, (Cincinnati Meeting,) 1881, p. 119. ; 3 34 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Prof. C. V. Riley read a paper entitled ON THE PHILOSOPHY oF THE RETARDATION OF GROWTH AMONG LOWER ANIMALS.* A dis- cussion followed, participated in by Messrs. Ulke, White, Gill, Earll, King, and Ward. Dr. C. A. White read a paper entitled An- TIQUITY OF CERTAIN Types oF NortH AMERICAN NoN-MARINE MOLLUSCA, AND THE EXTINCTION OF OTHERS. This paper was dis- cussed by Messrs. Gill and Dall. EIGHTEENTH MEETING, November 25, 1881. The President occupied the chair. Thirty-four members were present. Mr. Richard Rathbun presented a communication ON THE RE- CENT EXPLORATIONS OF THE U. S. FisH Commission. After sketching the history of the Commission since its organization, in 1871, and describing the new exploring steamer ‘‘ Fish Hawk,’’ he spoke at some length of the wonderful wealth of life discovered in 1880 and 1881 on the inner edge of the Gulf Stream, about one hundred miles off Newport and Martha’s Vineyard. Mr. Rathbun’s remarks were illustrated by numerous specimens, and a large model of the steamer ‘‘ Fish Hawk.’’ Messrs. Gill, Dall, Goode, and Schaeffer took part in the discussion of this paper. NINETEENTH MEETING, December g, 1881. The President occupied the chair. Forty members were present. Col. Marshall McDonald described some recent observations upon young shad in confinement. Prof. L. F. Ward read a paper on THE CAUSES OF THE ABSENCE OF ‘TREES ON THE GREAT PLAINs.} *1882. RILEy, CHARLES V. Retarded Development in Insects. <Pro- ceedings, Amer. Assoc. Adv. Sci., XXX, Cincinnati Mecting, and in separate « Retarded Development, &c.,” pp. 4. (February, 1882.) +1882. WHITE, CHARLEs. A. On Certain Conditions attending the Geological Descent of some North American types of Fresh-water Gill-bearing Mollusks. <American Journal of Science and Arts. XXIII. 1882, (May.) pp. 382-6. Annual Report of the U. S. Geological Survey for 1882. +1882. Warp, Lester F. On the Cause of the Absence of Trees on the Great Plains. <( Kansas City Review of Science and Industry. V. 1882, pp. 697-702. (March.) PROCEEDINGS. 35 Prof. Gill read a paper entitled ON THE AFFINITIES OF THE ‘¢ GREAT SWALLOWER,’’ CHIASMODUS NIGER.* He stated the genus Chiasmodus to be the representative of a peculiar family, Chiasmo- dontide, and not at all allied to the Gadde. Its first dorsal has in- articulate spines and its ventrals are of the Acanthopterygian type. The group is indeed related to the Harpagiferide and Chenichthyide and should have been referred by Dr. Giinther to his heterogeneous ‘family Trachinide.”’ TWENTIETH MEETING, December 23, 1881. The President occupied the chair. ‘Thirty members were present. Dr. R. W. Shufeldt, U. S. A., read a paper entitled ON THE OsTEOLOGY OF THE GLASS SNAKE, (OPHEOSAURUS VENTRALIS.)f Prof. Otis T. Mason read a paper entitled THE INVASION OF THE DomMAIN OF BIOLOGY BY ANTHROPOLOGISTS. Mr. Frederick W. True read a paper entitled THe Lanp Tortoises or NortTH AMERICA.{ Twenty-First MEETING, January 6, se “Lae / (Second Annual Meeting.) The President occupied the chair. Thirty-five members were present. The following officers were elected for the year 1882: President—PYrof. THEODORE GILL. . : Vice Presidents—C. V. Ritry, Prof. J. W. CHICKERING, Jr., LEs- TER F. Warp, and HENRY ULKE. Secretaries—G. BROWN GOODE and RICHARD RATHBUN. Treasurer—ROBERT RIDGWay. Members of Councit—Dr. J. H. Kipper, U.S. N., Dr. GEORGE Vasey, Dr. T. H. Bean, Dr. D. WEBSTER PRENTIsS, Prof. O. T. Mason. *1879. GiLL, THEODORE. The Great Swallower. <(Forest & Stream. XIII. 1879, p. 906, (Dec. 18,) with figures. (A part only of the remarks made to the Society. ) . +1882. SHUFELDT, RoperT W. Remarks upon the Osteology of Opheo- saurus ventralis. <Proceedings U. S. National Museum. IV. 1882. pp. 392-400. Nine figures. +1882. TRUE, FREDERICK W. On the North American Land Tortoises ef the Genus Xerobates. <Proceedings U. S. National Museum. IV. 1882, Pp. 434-449. Three figures. ‘ 36 « BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASITINGTON. TWENTY-SECOND MEETING, January 20, 1882. The President occupied the chair. Forty-five members were present. | The President delivered the annual address on the topic THE HisTory OF CLASSIFICATION IN ZOOLOGY. In his introductory remarks he congratulated the Society upon its present flourishing condition, stating that during the year its mem- bership had nearly doubled. He also reviewed the history of other scientific societies of the city, mentioning the National Institute, the Botanical Society, the Potomac Side Naturalists’ Club, the Physi- cal Club, and the Geological and Geographical Society, all now ex- tinct, and the existing Philosophical, Anthropological, and Biologi- cal Societies. He also spoke of the eminent zoologists who had been, in the early days of its history, identified with the Potomac Side Naturalists’ Club, the predecessor of the Biological Society, mentioning the names of Prof. S. F. Baird, Count L. F. de Pour- tales, Dr. William Stimpson, Mr. Robert Kennicott, Prof. J. S. Newberry, Mr. H. Ulke, Dr. Harrison Allen, Dr. Elliott Coues, Dr. D. W. Prentiss, Dr. F. V.. Hayden, Mr. F. B. Meek, Baron R. von Osten Sacken, Dr. William A. Hammond, Prof. Burt G. Wilder, Dr. George Suckley, Mr. Titian R. Peale, and others. ® . TwentTy-THirRD MEETING, February 3, 1882. Prof. Lester F. Ward, V. P., occupied the chair. Thirty-three members were present. | Mr. Frederick W. True read a paper ON THE ARCTIC SEA Cow, (RuyTIna STELLERI.)* Mr. Henry W. Elliott exhibited draw- ings of the same extinct animal, and submitted a restoration by himself, the merits of which he advocated. Mr. Frederick ‘W. True exhibited an immense specimen of Szven lacertina, twenty-six inches in length, captured in the mud flats in front of the city of Washington. This species had not previously been recorded north of North Carolina. * To be published in the forthcoming Census Report on. the Fishery industries of the United States. PROCEEDINGS. i 37 TwENTy-FourTH MEETING, February 3, 1882. The President occupied the chair. ‘Thirty-three members were present. An animated discussion concerning the form of the tail, as well as the relationship and history of the Arctic Sea Cow, Rhytina Stelleri, took place. This was participated in by Messrs. Elliott, True, Coues, and Gill. TweENty-FirtH MEETING, March 3, 1882. The President occupied the chair. Ninety members were present. Mr. G. Brown Goode, chairman of the Committee on Lectures appointed by the Council, announced that, in co-operation with a similar committee, appointed by the Anthropological Society in response to an invitation from the Council of the Biological Society, a course of lectures had been arranged for; these lectures to be given on consecutive Saturdays, at 3: 30 P. M., in the lecture room of the National Museum. These lectures were to be free, and the public was to be invited. The discussion of the form of the tail and — affinities of the Arctic Sea Cow was resumed ; and by special vote, continued until 10:30 P. M. The speakers were Messrs. Elliott, Coues, True, and Gill. First SaturDAY LectTurE, March 11, 1882. An audience of about six hundred were present on the occasion of the first Saturday lecture. Prof. Theodore Gill delivered a lecture entitled SclENTIFIC AND PopuLar VIEWS OF NATURE CONTRASTED.* The introductory address was delivered by Major J. W. Powell.+ * 1882. GILL, THEODORE N. Scientific and Popular Views of Nature Con- trasted. <(The Saturday Lectures, | delivered in the | Lecture Room of the U. S. National Museum, | under the auspices of the | Anthropological and Bio- logical Societies | of Washington, | in March and April, 1882 | — | D. Lothrop & Co., | 30 and 32 Franklin Street, Boston, Mass. | Washington, D, C. :—Judd © & Detweiler, Printers and Publishers. | 1882. | 8vo., pp. (4) 185: (pp. 5-22). Also separately as Saturday Lecture No. 1, with title page, pp. 24. 7 1882. PoweELL, JoHN W. Introductory Address (to the Saturday Lec- tures.) <The Saturday Lectures, pp. 1-3. 38 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. TWENTY-SIXTH MEETING, March 17, 1882. The President occupied the chair. Forty-five members were present. Dr. Elliott Coues read a paper entitled ON RECENT ADVANCES IN ORNITHOLOGY, on the occasion of laying before the Society, in ad- vance of publication, a complete copy of the work below cited.* Remarks were made by Messrs. Gill, Ward, and Coues. Dr. Edward Foreman exhibited a map of the Cretaceous fossil beds of Maryland. SECOND SATURDAY LEcTURE, March 18, 1882. About six hundred persons listened to the lecture of Prof. Otis T. Mason on the topic: WuatT 1s ANTHROPOLOGY ? + THIRD SATURDAY LECTURE, March 25, 1882. An audience of about six hundred persons listened to the lecture by Prof. J. W. Chickering, Jr., on CONTRASTS OF THE APPALACHIAN Mountains. TWENTY-SEVENTH MEETING, March 31, 1882. Prof. Lester F. Ward, V. P., occupied the chair. Eighty mem- bers were present. ; Dr. D. Webster Prentiss read a paper entitled MESMERISM IN *1882. Cours, Ettiott. The] Coues Check List | of | North American Birds. | Second kdition, | Revised to Date, and entirely Rewritten, under Direc- tion of the Author, | with a Dictionary of the | Etymology, Orthography, and Orthoepy | of the | Scientific Names, | the Concordance of Previous Lists, and a Catalogue of his | Ornithological Publications. | [Monogram.] | Boston: | Estes and Lauriat. | 1882.—1 vol., imp. 8vo., pp. 1-165. +1882. Mason, Otis T. What is Anthropology? <The Saturday Lec- tures, &c., pp. 25-43; also separate as Saturday Lecture No. 2. with title page, 8vo., pp. 21. +1882. CHICKERING, JoHN W., Jr. Contrasts of the Appalachian Moun- tains. <The Saturday Lectures, &c., pp. 44-59; also separate with title page as Saturday Lecture No. 3, 8vo., 16 pp. PROCEEDINGS. . 89 ANIMALS, and at its close mesmerized a canary bird and a fowl. The paper was discussed by Messrs. Schaeffer, Billings, Ellzey, Coues, Wolfley, Riley, True, King, Gilbert and Gihon. FourRTH SATuRDAY LeEcTuRE, April 1, 1882. About eight hundred persons listened to the lecture of Major J. W. Powell on OuTLINEs oF SocioLocy.* FirtH SATuRDAY LeEcTurRE, April 8th 1882. About seven hundred and fifty persons listened to the lecture of Prof. C. V. Riley, on LITTLE Known Facts ABsout WELL KNown ANIMALS. f TWENTY-EIGHTH MEETING, April 14, 1882. The President occupied the chair. Sixty-five members were in attendance. Prof. William H. Brewer, of Yale College, was present as a guest. Dr. Frank Baker proposed amendments to the Constitution as follows : In ARTICLE III. Strike out the words, “ upon recommendation of the ma- jority of the members present at its regular meeting;” and substitute for the words ‘a majority vote of the members present when the ballot is taken shall be ne- cessary to an election,’”’ the words ‘ seven affirmative votes shall be necessary to an election.” In ARTICLE TV. Strike out the words, “its duty shall be to act on nomina- tions,’”’ &c., and substitute—* It shall conduct all the business of the Society ex- cept the election of officers.” In ARTICLE XII: Strike out sections III, IV and V. A committee of five, consisting of Messrs. Ward, Goode, Chickering, Riley, and Rathbun, was appointed to confer with the * 1882. POWELL, JOHN W. Outlines of Sociology. <The Saturday Lec- tures, &c., pp. 60-82, also separate with title page as Saturday Lecture No. 4. 8vo. p. 25. +1882. Ritey, CHARLES V. Little Known Facts About Well Known Ani- mals. <The Saturday Lectures, &c. pp. 83-112. Also separate with title page as Saturday Lecture No. 5. 8vo., pp. 32. Fifteen woodcuts. 40. BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. committees appointed by the Anthropological and Philosophical Societies in reference to the proposed scheme for the consolidation of the Scientific Societies of Washington and the formation of an Academy of Sciences and to report the result of their conferences. Dr. Frank Baker read a paper entitled ON THE RAMIFICATIONS OF THE ARTERIES. ‘This was discussed by Messrs. Gill, Barnard, and Scudder. Mr. G. Brown Goode exhibited several remarkable specimens of taxidermic skill from the work shops of the National Museum.* SIxTH SaTurRDAY LEcTuRE, April 15, 1882. About six hundred persons listened to the lecture of Dr. Robert Fletcher upon PauL BRocA AND THE FRENCH SCHOOL OF ANTHRO- POLOGY.T SEVENTH SATURDAY LEcTUuRE, April 22, 1882. Abot six hundred and fifty persons assembled to hear the lecture by Mr. William H. Dall upon Deep-Sra Exp.Lorations.f Among the audience was Captain Sir George S. Nares, R. N., late com- mander of the British corvette ‘‘ Challenger’’ during its three years cruise of deep-sea exploration. , Twenty-NintH MEETING, April 28, 1882. The President occupied the chair. Forty-five members were present. The Society voted that the next regular meeting of the Society should be a ‘‘ Darwin Memorial Meeting.’’ A committee * See Report of the Assistant Director of the U. S. National Museum. <Re- port of Smithsonian Institution for 1831. + 1882. FLETCHER, RoBerT. Paul Broca and the French School of Anthro- pology. <The Saturday Lectures, &c. pp. 113-142. Also as separate, with title page. 8vo., pp. 32. . $1882. Dart, Witt1am H. Deep-Sea Explorations. <The Satur- day Lectures, &c. pp. 143-162. Also separate, with title page, as Saturday Lecture No. 7. 8vo., pp. 22. : PROCEEDINGS. 41 consisting of Messrs. Goode, Riley, Ward, Rathbun, and Gill, having been appointed by the Council to arrange for the same, and having anticipated the action of the Society by making certain pre- liminary arrangements. Mr. Edmund B. Wilson, of Johns Hopkins University, a corres- ponding member, presented a paper on THE EMBRYOLOGY OF RENILLA.* Mr. Frank H. Cushing spoke on the topic ZuN1 BroLocy, descri- bing some of the peculiar plants and animals occurring in the deserts of the Southwest, and referring to the manner in which animals are regarded by the Zufii Indians. EicHTH SaturDAy Lecture, April 29, 1882. About six hundred persons listened to the lecture of Dr. Swan M. Burnett upon the topic How WE SEE.+ SPECIAL MEETING, May 5, 1882. The President occupied the chair. Thirty-eight members were present. Mr. Goode presented the report of the Committee on the Dar- win Memorial Meeting, which was accepted. Prof. Ward submit- ted the report of the Committee on the Consolidation of the Scien- tific Societies in Washington, as follows: | The joint committee composed of the several committees appointed by the Philosophical, Anthropological, and Biological Societies of Washington to con- sider the desirability of a federation of those societies— Recommend to the several societies a federation on the following basis, and for the purposes set forth : * The remarks of Mr. Wilson were in part included in the following papers : 1880, WiLson, EpMuND B. The Early Stages of Renilla. < American Jour- nal of Science, XX, 1880, pp. 446-9, plate VII. 1882. Witson, EpmMunp B. On Animal Polymorphism. <Johns Hop- kins University Circulars, No. 15, May, 1882, pp. 203-4. +1882. Burnett, SwAN M. How We See. <The Saturday Lectures, &c. pp. 163-185. Also separate, with title page. 8vo., pp. 25. Three wood- cuts. 42 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. I. The purposes of this federation shall be— First, the pnblication of a common body of transactions; Second, periodic meetings of the united societies; Third, the management of courses of popular lectures; and, Fourth, such other objects as may be agreed upon. II. The federation shall be known as the Washington Academy of Sciences. III. The several societies shall retain their own organizations, excepting as hereinafter modified. IV. The three societies shall have the same annual fees of membership. V. The uniform fee for each of the three societies shall-be three dollars. VI. The Academy shall be organized by the election of a president, a secre- tary, a treasurer, and two councilmen, bythe Academy. The presidents of the several societies shall be ex officio vice presidents of the Academy, and members of its council, one secretary from each society shall be a member of the council, and each society shall elect two additional councillors for the council of the Academy. VII. A grade of fellowship shall be established in the Academy. VIII. The annual fee of fellowship shall be five dollars. IX. The existing members of all the societies shall be fellows of the Acad- emy, on the payment of the fellowship fee. X. The council of the Academy may subsequently elect fellows from the members of the Academy. XI. The fellows of the’ Academy shall be ex offcio members of all the societies. ° XII. It is recommended to the several societies that the existing committees of conference be continued, for the purpose of collecting the sense of the said societies on the above propositions, and of carrying out such scheme of organi- zation as may be mutually accepted. WILLIAM B. TAYLOR, Chairman of Foint Committee. Committee of Philosophical Society.—John VV. Powell, Theodore Gill, James C. Welling, John S. Billings, William B. Taylor. Committee of Biological Society.—Lester F. Ward, G. Brown Goode, Charles V. Riley, Richard Rathbun, John W. Chickering. Committee of Anthropological Society.—John W. Powell, Garrick Mallery, James C. Welling. Mr. Goode submitted the following table of statistics, showing the comparative membership in the three societies : - PROCEEDINGS. 43 Total membership in the three Societies _- % 329 Membership in Philosophical Society .._.- 160 ¢ Anthropological Society.. 115 Lg SMOROUICRS SOCHTY oi lan ca oun wanes 134 Comet Be re es hs a ee eae ae 22 #s Philosophical and Anthropological Societies ___ 32 " Philosophical and Biological Societies -__.-__- 38 Anthropological and Biological Societies..--..---.---.---. 36 Members of Philosophical Society only.------__.---------2 97 $6 Anthropological Society only_.-....--.-.-.-. 61 a Biological Society. only .:<~ bss al ee 20 The reports of the committee were discussed by Messrs. Wilson, Bean, True, Riley, Kidder, Seaman, and Ellzey, a strong feeling of opposition to any scheme of consolidation being manifest. The motion of Prof. Riley, ‘Resolved, That it is the sense of this (in- formal) meeting that a federation with the Anthropological and Biological Societies is desirable,’’ was carried by a vote of 22 to 8. The first six articles of the report of the committee were provisionally approved one by one, and the committee was continued, with instruc- tions to report further action at a regular meeting of the Society. THIRTIETH MEETING, May 12, 1882. DARWIN MEMORIAL MEETING. The President occupied the chair. In addition to the members of the Society, the members of the other societies and their friends had been invited to attend; and although the night was stormy, about seven hundred ladies and gentlemen were present to attend the memorial service in honor of Charles Darwin, who died at Down, Kent, England, April 19, 1882. On the stage sat, in addi- tion to the officers of the Society, Dr. W. B. Taylor, President of the Philosophical Society; Major J. W. Powell, President, Dr. Robert Fletcher and Prof. O. T. Mason, Vice-Presidents, and Col. F. A. Seely, Secretary, of the Anthropological Society. A large portrait of Darwin, painted by Henry Ulke, V. P., and a bust, by Mrs. Mica Heideman, decorated the stage. The order of exercises was as follows: MRIGOURON Coo Se oo cas Theodore Gill. Miooraphica) Sketeh.. 25. bisa a os --an s. Bes Dall, The Philosophic Bearings of Darwinism ~.----- John W. Powell. 44 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Darwin’s Coral Island Studies _-_-..-.....-- Richard Rathbun.* Darwin’s Investigations on the Relation OF Finnts ane Insects oo ee Charles V. Riley. RAT WIRE STAM ee tines Lester F. Ward. Darwin on Emotional Expression ---------------- Frank Baker. A Darwinian Bibliography_-_-.-..---------- Frederick W. True. A Forralt 0b Deg oe a a Sen ees Henry Ulke. The addresses delivered on this occasion are printed in full in the appendix. Tuirty-First MEETING, May 26, 1882. The President occupied the chair. Thirty-five members were present. Mr. Wm. H. Dall made an appeal for aid in the exploration of the molluscan fauna of the District of Columbia. Dr. Tarleton H. Bean exhibited a specimen of a rare arctic bird, the Spoon-billed Sandpiper, Zurynorhynchus pygmaeus, obtained by him on the coast of Siberia.f : Dr. M. G. Ellzey made a brief communication upon the natural history of mules. The Society ratified the action of the council in voting that the proceedings of the Society, together with the addresses at the Darwin Memorial Meeting, should be printed, and that the funds of the Society now in the treasury should be used for that purpose. A resolution to the effect that women should be admitted to member- ship in the Society was referred to a committee consisting of Gen. William Birrey, Messrs. Dall and Goode, and Doctors Prentiss and Kidder. The Society then adjourned to meet in October. * Omitted on account of the illness of Mr. Rathbun. +1882. BEAN, TARLETON H. Notes on Birds collected during the sum- mer of 1880, in Alaska and Siberia. <Proc. U. S. Mus., V, 1882, pp. 144+ (Z£. pygmaeus, p. 195.) : Also, 1881. BEAN, TARLETON H. Our unique Spoon-billed Sandpiper. <Forest and Stream, XVI, April 12, 1831. ADDRESSES DELIVERED ON THE OCCASION OF THE DARWIN MEMORIAL MEETING, HELD IN THE LECTURE-ROOM OF THE U. S. NATIONAL MUSEUM, May 12, 1882. 45 THE DOCTRINE OF DARWIN.* By THEODORE GILL. The chief for many years of the leaders in science knows no longer the world he erstwhile knew so well. CHARLES Darwin has closed a life illustrious in the annals of biology, scarce full of years but very full of honors. How fruitful was that life and how potent its influence on philoso- phy and on sociology the united voice of the civilized world pro- claims—how grievous the loss the lamentations of mankind testify. Less than a quarter of a century has elapsed since the publication of the ‘‘ Origin of Species by means of Natural Selection.’? How great is the contrast between the beliefs and practice of naturalists before its appearance and those of their present successors! He would, indeed, have been a bold man who would have predicted that, in two decades after its appearance, the views therein promul- gated would be universally accepted and be taken as the recognized platform of biologists. But the incredible has actually happened ; all the students of nature, and in every land; zoologists and bot- anists, paleontologists and geologists—in America and Europe, at the confines of Asia, the extreme of Africa, and in distant Aus- tralia—all meet on common ground as evolutionists ; all recognize to a greater or less extent the operation of natural selection in the survival of the fittest. To appreciate the cause of the profound impression produced by the deceased naturalist’s greatest work, some reference to the antecedent and succeeding conditions is fit- ting. , It had been, from time immemorial, a generally accepted idea that the living beings which people the globe had, in some mys- * Several of the paragraphs in this address were published in advance, with a few modifications, in “ The Critic,” of New York, for May 6, 1882. : 47 « 48 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. terious manner, been each ‘‘created’’ separately; but how, few ventured to express in words, for the mere attempt to do so con- .jured up such strange fancies that the intelligent mind drew back in revolt and refused to consider them. Now, it is a recognized scientific creed that the animals and plants which have successively inhabited the earth, were the descendants, with modification, from previous inhabitants since the dawn of life. A glimmer of the truth had now and then occurred to contemplative students. Philosophers had ventured to think that living forms like ancient ones might have descended from them. The \investigators in various departments of biology had gradually deduced generaliza- tions which all tended in a similar direction. The’ taxologists, in their very nomenclature, compared the animal kingdom to a tree of which the principal types were ‘‘ branches’ diverging from a com- mon trunk, while the minor groups were successive offshoots ; and the idea of genetic relationship suggested by the various degrees of likeness was expressed in the names conferred on other groups— ‘tribe,’ ‘‘ family,’’ etc. The embryologists had recognized a co- incidence between the stages of development of the ‘superior’ animals and the adults of animals inferior in the system. The paleeontologists had discovered an approximate coincidence between the successive inhabitants of the earth and the successive stages in the development of the living animals of the same types. The series of facts thus obtained had even, to some extent, been co- ordinated. All these series of facts were such as would have been the result of the derivation of existing types from previous ones. But the possibility that the seeming was the real did not commend itself to the consideration of naturalists. Instead thereof, it was assumed that the facts were ‘in accordance with a plan of the Creator ;’’ that the Deity had conceived a few patterns, and that by those he constructed the animals which successively appeared on the globe, to be in time swept off and replaced by others. If answer was made that such was a puerile conception of creation and that it lim- DARWIN MEMORIAL. 49 ited the power of Deity, excessive anger was displayed, and its op- ponents called infidels and atheists. But even those who doubted whether the accepted views of creation were tenable, hesitated to take the alternative view. An efficient factor in variation remained to be discovered, and a full presentation of the data had yet to be made. It was in 1859 that the desiderata indicated were supplied in ‘«The Origin of Species by means of Natural Selection.’’ ‘‘ Varia- tion under Domestication’? was compared and contrasted with ‘Variation under Nature.’’ The ‘‘ Struggle for Existence’’ which is the result of the progressive increase of living beings was con- sidered, and ‘‘ Natural Selection’’ was designated as the factor which determined the development and existence as ‘‘ species’’ of forms which had descended, with modifications, from countless antecedent generations. With the successive changes in temperature and other conditions ensuing in the ever-changing world, the animals and plants which peopled it were compelled to keep pace by correspond-. ing changes in structure, or to give place to others who could adapt themselves to the new conditions. So much were the views thus enunciated opposed to the current ideas that a brief period of astonished silence ensued, and men felt about before they could realize their full purport, or that such opin- ions were broached in sober earnest. Then followed on every hand torrents of detraction and abuse. The naturalists of the old school and the priests of revelation met on common ground, and loud and bitter was the denunciation. Numerous were the arguments against the new theory. But why this great turmoil and uproar? Darwin was not the first to believe that species had been derived and not created. So had philosophers believed before; the grandfather of Darwin be- lieved and urged the belief; a great naturalist at the commencement ef the century—Lamarck—boldly and wisely formulated a theory of evolution ; the ‘‘ Vestiges of Creation ’’ took up the view, and gained marked attention in Britain. Even a clergyman of the English 4 50 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Church, the Savilian professor in orthodox Oxford, the Rev. Baden Powell, in 1855, had considered the ‘‘ Philosophy of Creation’’ in a ‘masterly manner,’’ and Darwin bore testimony that nothing can be more striking than the manner in which the enlightened priest showed that the introduction of new species is a regular phenom- enon in contradistinction to a miraculous process. Darwin was not the first even to conceive of the principle of natural selection. An American resident in England, Dr. W. C. Wells, as early as 1813, had recognized the operation of the principle in the distri- bution of the human race. In 1831, Patrick Matthews also appre- ciated the principle of natural selection; so Darwin himself wit- nesses. It was not, then, the mere enunciation of the theory of evo- lution, nor of the principle of natural selection, that characterized the ‘‘ Origin of Species,’’ and drew the attention of mankind to it. It was the recognition of the incessant and universal operation of the factors, the masterly co-ordination of the facts of biology—zool- ogy, botany, anatomy, general morphology, physiology, embryology, palzontology—and geology, the marshalling in orderly array and concentration in one direction of all natural knowledge, the force of the logic, the clearness of the exposition, the judicial candor of the argument that arrested men’s attention, and provoked serious con- sideration of what before had been ignored as being beyond the domain or possibilities of investigation. In the time of Lamarck the world was not ready for a consideration of the question. Lam- arck’s was the prophesy of intuitive genius—genius the greater in that the facts that had then been garnered were few. The “ Vestiges of Creation’’ was so replete with errors of fact and misconceptions as to attract more attention to the fault of its details that to the logic of its argument. The principle of natural selection had been applied to very special fields by Wells and Matthews; no evidence had been furnished of its wide extension, and it even occupied a subordinate position in the thoughts of those investigators. The author of the ‘‘ Origin of Species’’ was a different man from DARWIN MEMORIAL. 51 his predecessors, and lived in a happier time. The facts had been accumulated and co-ordinated; men were ready to consider the reason why facts were such, and none was better fitted than Darwin —TI should rather say none was so well fitted—to arrange and present the facts and to draw the deductions therefrom. Ever a close ob- server, practiced in many lands, student of all nature—especially skilled as a geologist, a botanist, and a zoologist—endowed with a severely judicial mind, honest above all, none like him had ever grappled with the mystery of creation. For more than twenty years he had pondered on the subject ; with impartial severity he had weighed the evidence. He was, perforce, led to the conclusion | that all the living had been derived from past forms, with modifica- tions incident to individuality ; the sums of the divergencies, small in themselves, became large in the aggregate, became enormous in time. The increasing beings, crowding upon each other, invading each other’s domains, struggled for the life into which they were born. Happy were those possessing some slight advantage—strength, swiftness, dexterity, or adaptability resulting from modification of structure—for they could procure place or food at the expense of their competitors, and the characters that gave them victory secured, likewise, the temporary ascendancy of their kind. How great is this variability our domesticated animals attest ; how ancient is our globe geology teaches; that the race is to the strong or the cunning observation of inferior nature assures. With known variability, time, and space, what could not result? Which, then, was the more probable that Nature—or, if you will, the Creator—had always operated under law, or that there had been constant interference ? Thus were the issues fairly joined. On the one hand, Creation was the rallying cry; on the other, Evolution and Darwin. But what meant the opposed terms? It is surely but reasonable to ask the question. The evolutionists conceded the reasonableness, and gladly accepted the ordeal. Could less be required of the creation- ists? In reverential mood would I submit the alternatives. If they repel, blame not me. Ihave long and fruitlessly searched for better. 52 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Creation implies the actual fashioning of forms in full panoply, and with all the characteristics of their kind. But when it was asked how this had been effected the answer was vague and evasive. Did ‘‘ elemental atoms flash into living tissues?’’ Was there vacant space one moment and an elephant apparent the next? Or did a laborious God mould out of gathered earth a body to then endue with life? The questions are surely pertinent, for only by such means can we conceive of creation. But passionate disclaimers and angry denunciations greeted him who would frame such conceptions in exact language. Metaphysical jargon and rhetoric about divine purposes might sophisticate, but could not answer. Evolution denotes the derivation of living beings from preceding in endless succession. Variation in progeny, limited heredity, and time are its correlatives. These being conceded, the peopling of the globe with its life, past and present, is conceivable. What was the evidence to support the conflicting conceptions ? For creation it was urged that the universal consensus of mankind supported it; that divine revelation taught it; and that the diver- sities and specialization of organic forms forbade the idea of their derivation from a common parentage. The universal consensus of mankind maintained till the sixteenth century the doctrine that the earth was flat ; that the sun and other planets circled round the earth; and that the earth was the great. centre of the universe. The universal consensus of mankind for thousands of years is not the universal concensus of the enlight- ened man, nor of the present century. The teachers of revelation have been often mistaken. Many are they who once were contemned and denounced because their utter- ances were not in accordance with the opinions of their day, who are now accepted as the champions of a purer religion. One of the wisest priests of England has said that ‘‘ with a certain class of religionists every invention and discovery is considered impious and unscriptural as long as it is new. Not only the discoveries of as- tronomy and geology, but steam, gas, electricity, political economy, DARWIN MEMORIAL. 53 have all in their turn been denounced ; and not least, chloroform. Its use in parturition has been anathematized as an infraction of the penalty pronounced on Eve!’’* It is not I, but a great clergy- man, who expresses such sentiments. The objection that the differentation and specialization of organic beings gainsay their derivation from a common source is a most weighty one. In the infancy of our own knowledge it was unan- swerable, and the less we know of nature the more we are impressed with these diversities. It is not, however, simply a question of whether evolution is true; but which is the more probable of two alternatives—that all the phenomena which point in one direction and which could have occurred in natural sequence, have taken place in such sequence ; or that direct creative intervention has en- sued again and again, when the same ends could have been produced without such intervention. Nature was true to her disciple, and herself furnished the replies. It was contended that if evolutidn were true, the evidence should be forthcoming in the existence in previous geological epochs of forms of a generalized character intermediate between still earlier ones and later widely separated forms; and that of such there were very few. The graves of the distant past gave up their dead, and the ossu- aries of our own far West yielded most cogent testimony to the truth. Forms from the eocene and later beds, resurrected by the wand of the anatomist, rising in successive lines behind the wide gaps in the living files, proclaimed that all were of one blood, and showed the genealogy of the contemporaries of man. Many were the forms thus connected. Few are those that may be mentioned on this occasion. The horse-like animals, the rhi- noceroses, and tapirs are so unlike, that proof of their derivation from one source might be thought to be impossible. But as we go back into the ages we find equines with lateral digits and hooflets *Rey. Baden Powell’s Essay on the Spirit of the Inductive Philosophy, etc., P- 455- 54 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. becoming larger and longer, teeth shorter and more generalized, skeletons less characteristic ; rhinoceroses with cutting teeth, and more slender forms ; tapir-like animals without the peculiar tapirine teeth, with rhinocerotoid skulls, and with otherwise modified structure; all these accompanied by innumerable other modifica- tions, till finally we are almost at a loss to tell whether it is a horse- like, a rhinocerotoid or a tapiroid animal that is before us, and chey become lost in earlier forms with special characters of their own. And as we go still further back we are confronted with still other forms that are connected by series projected backward from the ruminants and from the elephantids. We do, in fine, know the genealogy of our own contemporaries—imperfectly it is true, but still we know it. It was objected that animals were segregated by such very wide intervals that they must be isolated in different branches, and that there could be no community of structure between such branches ; they expressed fundamentally different plans of structure. One by one zoology, anatomy, and embryology supplied the links between the old branches; the branches were at length completely — uprooted, and it has even become a matter of simple convention what should be considered major groups. Plansof structure can no . : longer be claimed to be peculiar to different types. That branch of which man is the primate—the vertebrates—was supposed to be perfectly unassailable and isolated ; but zoology and anatomy have revealed to us amphioxus, and embryology the earlier stages of the tunicates. ‘The evidence is now conclusive that these forms which once appeared to be among the most distant are now the most closely related. The affinities of the tunicates with inver- tebrates are evident, and thus we may look far back to that time when vertebrates did not exist, but when the common ancestors, from which they and the related invertebrates should diverge, held sway. It was even pretended that the evidence was insufficient to show that variation was possible or could be propagated. From every hand testimony was forthcoming. ‘Ihe breeder could DARWIN MEMORIAL. 55 point to every domesticated animal—the horticulturist and pomolo- gist to allcultivated plants—the systematist and zoégeographer to the limits of species which varied with knowledge of their distri- | bution—the paleontologist to the gradation between the extinct forms and widely separated living species, as well as to that between forms which lived in successive earlier epochs. It was urged that the Darwinian theory was opposed to revelation, and subversive of Christianity. As students of nature and seekers after truth alone—so far as nature is concerned—we only ask whether the views of Darwin are true or not. But now, from many a pulpit, and from the most en- lightened of the clergy, we hear the claim that evolution is in per- fect accordance with revelation, and is a witness to the power, pres- cience, and goodness of God. It was contended that acceptance of the teachings of Darwin would have a pernicious tendency, and entail riot, lawlessness, and crime in the world. A long life of singular purity and blamelessness in the person of Darwin was an answer. An unsullied heritage from an ancestor entertaining like views has been transmitted to heirs of his body without flaw. Sons of the great philosopher continue the studies of their great sire, and worthily wear the heavy mantle left to them. One after another the scientific opponents of evolution became convinced of its verity, or died out. The naturalists of a new generation with one accord accepted ‘‘ Darwinism’’ as a starting point for their more profound studies. ‘The methods and aims of biology became changed. Biology became exalted from empiricism into a science. Long before ‘‘ The Origin of Species’? had even ‘come of age,’’ acceptance of its teachings had become an essential of scientific creed, and Darwin was acknowledged to have effected a greater revolution in science than any Englishman since the time of Newton. Most meet was it then that he should rest by the side of his great predecessor whose rival he will ever be in fame. 56 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. ‘BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH. By Witiram H. DALL. Charles Robert Darwin, son of Dr. Robert Waring Darwin, F. R. S. : and Emma Wedgewood, grandson of Dr. Erasmus Darwin and Josiah Wedgewood, was born at Shrewsbury, England, February 12th, 1809. He died of disease of the heart at his residence,— Downe Court, Beckenham, Kent, at 4 P. M.,-April 19, 1882, and consequently had attained the age of 73 years, 2 months, and 7 days. At Shrewsbury his childhood was passed and his education was obtained at the once famous Shrewsbury Grammar School, presided over by the Rev. Dr. Samuel Butler, afterward Bishop of Litchfield and Coventry. At the age of sixteen he entered the University of Edinburgh (1825) where he remained two years. Even at this early period he had become a student of natural history, and read his first scientific paper before the Plinian Society. It was ‘‘On the Movement of the Ova of Flustra,’’ one of the incrusting marine corallines. In 1827 he entered Christ’s College, Cambridge, where he grad- | uated as a Bachelor of Arts four years later. Here he fell under the influence of the teachings of Prof. John Stevens Henslow, an excel- lent botanist, whose instruction doubtless did much to determine the field of study subsequently occupied by his pupil. In 1831 Captain Fitzroy, R. N., offered to share his cabin with any competent naturalist who would accompany him on his prospecting voyage to South America in H. M. S. Beagle, detailed for surveys in that region. Mr. Darwin, then only twenty-two years of age, offered his services with the stipulation that he should control the collections made, and was accepted. The Beagle sailed November 27, 1831, from Plymouth, and returned to England on the 2d of October, 1836. During a large part of the voyage Mr. Darwin suffered greatly from sea-sickness, or some difficulty which simulated it, and which, in some form, returned at intervals throughout his whole life, as sudden fits of © PEERS sree ee Nee ea bee on mCP, DARWIN MEMORIAL. 57 illness which prostrated him for days together, and which were fol- lowed by long periods of wakeful convalescence. Under the cir- cumstances, the amount of keen and patient observation, the vast accumulation of facts, and the extensive collections obtained by Mr. Darwin during his voyage, appear more marvelous than ever. After his return his health was much shattered, and his studies more or less interrupted for some years. He took his Master’s de- gree in course, and shortly after his return was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society, (of which his father and grandfather were pre- viously Fellows,) and of the Geological Society, of which last he was made secretary. In 1839 he published his epoch-making work ‘‘A Journal of Researches into the Geology and Natural History of the Various Countries visited by H. M. S. Beagle; ’’ the first of that long series of investigations to which his life was devoted, and the pub- lication of which revolutionized the study of biology, and gave to Darwin a position as a naturalist unparalleled in the history of — science. In the same year, 1839, Mr. Darwin married his cousin, Emma Wedgewood, and retired to the secluded and beautiful district of Kent where, in his country-house of Downe Court, near Orpington, more than forty years of his life were spent. The district is purely agricultural, a plateau of chalk, some 400 feet above the sea, in- terrupted by the wavy hollows characteristic of the English chalk country, with beech woods here and there on the slopes. His dwelling is one of the old square-built, red-brick mansions of the last century, to which has been added in more recent times a gable- fronted wing, with another square-built wing and pillared portico on the corresponding side. Shut in and almost hidden from the roadway by a high wall and belt of trees it offers ideal seclusion for a quiet student. On the southern side the walled garden opens into a secluded meadow bounded by a tract of underwood through which there is a lovely view of the narrow valley which descends toward Westerham. 58 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Here, and in the by-paths of adjacent woods and meadows, Mr. Darwin was accustomed to take daily exercise with a characteristic regularity. Up to ten or twelve years ago, his tall figure, mounted on a favorite old black horse, was a familiar object in the country lanes. This animal fell and died suddenly one day, after which’it was noted that Mr. Darwin rode no more. His invariable hours for walking, in these later years, were seven in the morning, noon, and four o’clock in the afternoon, usually accompanied by one or more of his sons; one of whom, Mr. Francis Darwin, has long been es- tablished as a surgeon in the hamlet of Downe. His habits were ex- tremely regular. He rose at six, took a cold plunge bath (which was repeated in the evening), breakfasted alone, and after his first morning walk was usually in his library by 8A. M. At nine he would spend a little time in the dining-room opening his mail, and in the evening would linger an hour or two in the society of his family, or that of some of his scientific friends who occasionally visited him ; but the greater part of his time was spent in his library, his garden, and the adjacent grounds. A few friends, among whom were Sir John Lubbock and Dr. Farr, near residents, were often with him, and with such he was social, frank and ever ready to en- joy a joke or frolic ; with all men he was unpretentious, kind, and devoid of any artificiality of manner ; but his life was essentially a secluded one, as may be judged from the fact that the news of his death did not reach London until noon of the following day. Nevertheless, his life was far from solitary, for his family formed quite a colony in itself until the children reached maturity. Two children, a boy and girl, were lost in infancy, one dying in 1842 and the other in 1858, and are buried in the village churchyard of Downe, near by some of the Wedgewoods. In the family who lived Mr. Darwin was fortunate. His eldest son, William, is a banker at Southampton; the second, George, took high honors at Cambridge, and is now a Fellow of Trinity Col- lege and a distinguished mathematician ; the third, Frank, having inherited his father’s delicate constitution, acted as his secretary ; the fourth, Leonard, an officer of artillery, has distinguished himself DARWIN MEMORIAL. 59 in the direction of astronomy ; the fifth, Horace, is an excellent mathematician. One married and one unmarried daughter com- plete a family whose constant care has always been to relieve its head from any trouble and anxiety. ‘Mr. Darwin has always been in easy circumstances, financially, so that he could use his time as he chose, without care. When young he pursued field-sports, with the combined interest of the hunter and the naturalist ; in later years he found his chief relaxation in read- ing popular novels. His work was taken up with great method, and he never wrote for more than two hours at a time. _ In 1853 he received the gold medal of the Royal Society for his various works; in 1859: that known as the Wollaston medal from the Geological Society ; in 1871 he received the Prussian Order of Knighthood ‘‘ For Merit,’’ and was elected a corresponding member of the Austrian Academy of Sciences; and in 1878, foreign asso- ciate of the French Academy. He received honorary degrees from Leyden and Cambridge, and other scientific honors almost without number. His death was unexpected. He had been slightly unwell for several weeks, and the weakness of the heart’s action was such that he was not permitted to ascend the stairs, but in the main, he was still able to pursue his ordinary routine. On Tuesday morning Sir John Lubbock found him apparently about as usual. That he was seriously ill, was first known in the village Wednesday afternoon by the arrival of his groom on horseback, horse and man reeking with foam, having galloped for ice six miles and back from the nearest point where it could be procured ;_ but in vain, the relief arrived too late, Charles Darwin had already passed away, surrounded by his family, including several of his sons, Mrs. Darwin, and a married daughter. On the 26th his mortal remains were laid in Westmin- ster Abbey, near by the ashes of Isaac Newton, and were followed to the tomb, not only by dignitaries of Church and State, but by the universal reverence of the scientific world.* *Tt is hardly necssary to state that this sketch is a compilation from all the different sources which happened to be available at the time. 60 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. DARWIN’S CONTRIBUTIONS TO PHILOSOPHY. By Joun W. PoweELL. Many are the definitions of philosophy. If we wish not to define . what is ¢rwe philosophy, but simply to define the term in all its uses when referring to all times and all men, this definition will do: Philosophy ts the explanation of the phenomena of the universe. Now, the phenomena of the universe are embraced in many vast categories. First, we have the constitution of the heavenly bodies, and their real and apparent motions to be explained. What are they, and how came they to be what they are? Then we have the earth itself; its forms, its lands and seas, its mountains and valleys, its rivers and lakes, the winds which blow about it, the storms which fall upon it, the lightnings that flash athwart the sky, the thunders that roll among the clouds. What are all these things, and whence came they, and why are they? Again, in the constitution of the earth we find rocks with their minerals, and geologic formations with their fossils. What are rocks and minerals, formations and fossils, and whence came they? Look at the innumerable forms of plants covering the earth with verdure—the whole vegetable kingdom on the land and on the sea; forests, mosses, and confervee. Who shall explain the meaning of the phenomena of the vegetable kingdom? The oceans teem with animal life ; reptiles crawl over all the land; the hills and the valleys, the mountains and the plains, are all in- habited by beasts; and the air itself is populated. Who shall tell us of all the living things, and then explain life itself? Turn to the contemplation of man, organized into tribes and nations; man possessed of innumerable languages; man engaged in arts and industries; man endowed with reason and will; man in search of moral principles to guide his conduct. Whence came this ‘ man, and whither does he go? DARWIN MEMORIAL. 61 Among all tribes and nations of the globe, and in all times, men have sought to discover the whence, the how, and the why, of all things—the phenomena of the universe. The explanation of the universe is philosophy. The philosophies of the world may be classified as— I. Mythologic. II. Metaphysic. III. Scientific. Mythology and science constitute the two grand systems of philosophy, but between them stands metaphysic philosophy as a stepping-stone from the former to the latter. In the lower stages of society philosophy is purely mythologic. All savage and barbaric peoples explain the phenomena of the uni- verse by a system of myths. A mythology is always a growth, and among every people there grows up by the employment of diverse and superficial analogies—curious suggestions—a body of mythic explanations which constitute its philosophy. Among the Wintuns of California the world is three-storied. There is a world—a great chamber—above, and there is this world} and a world below. The waters fall from the world above because the sky, the floor of that upper world, leaks; and the waters come from the world below through the springs that issue from the flanks of the dead volcanoes of that land; so the waters from above and the waters from below meet and flow down the great Sacramento to the sea, where again they divide; the waters from above taking their BS way to their upper home, and the waters from below taking their way to the lower world. The mountains were formed by the great mole-god, who crawled under the land and upheaved the mountain ranges that stand on either side of the Sacramento Valley. And so they explain all of the phenomena of the universe, with which they are acquainted, in a system of myths which constitutes the philosophy of the Win- tuns. 62 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Now such a system of philosophy, a mythology, is found in every - savage and barbaric tribe of the world. But there came a time in the history of mankind when some of the peoples changed their philosophy—their explanation of the phenomena of the universe—by changing their methods of reason- ing. ORIGIN OF METAPHYSIC PHILOSOPHY. From three to two thousand years ago Europe, Asia, and Africa established a commerce in ideas—an exchange in philosophies— carried on by the navigation of the Mediterranean. During that and some previous time there were built on the shores of this sea many cities. Through the building of these cities, and through the industries and arts which sprang up therewith, society was re- organized, and placed upon a new basis—tribal society developed into national society—barbarism into civilization. The peoples of these cities spoke diverse languages, and enter- tained diverse mythologic philosophies. Through the intercourse which sprang up between them each learned of the philosophy of the other, and the scholars of that day attempted to discover in all of these diverse mythologies a common body of truth upon the theory then. widely accepted, that they had all sprung from a com- mon source—a primitive philosophy itself the truth—and that all the philosophies then existing were degenerations therefrom. This line of investigation led to a curious result. All of the mythologies of the cities of the Mediterranean were found to be baseless—each a fabric of poetic but superficial analo- gies. In the mental activity of that time many new philosophies were proposed, diverse and contradictory, and the wisest philoso- phers said, ‘‘ How shall we know the truth?’’ And they endeav- ored to discover some criterion by which truth should be known. This resulted in the development of formal /ogic as a testing ma- chine into which opinions were put for the purpose of sifting truth from error. DARWIN MEMORIAL. 63 Now the machine called logic, the tool of the metaphysician, is curiously constructed. Its chief hypothesis is that man was primi- tively endowed with fundamental principles as a basis of reason- ing, and that these principles can be formulated. These fundamen- tal principles are supposed to be universal, and to be everywhere accepted by mankind as self-evident propositions of the highest order, and of the broadest generalization. These fundamental propositions were called mayor propositions. ‘The machine, in for- mal logic, was a verbal juxtaposition of propositions with the major propositions at the head, followed by the minor propositions, and from this truth was supposed to flow. : This formal logic of the Aristotelian epoch has lived from that period to the period of science. Logic is the instrument of meta- physics, and metaphysic philosophy, in its multifarious forms, is the product of logic. But during all that time—z,ooo years—no truth has been discovered, no error has been detected by the use of the logical machine. Its fundamental assumption is false. It has been discovered that man is not endowed with a body of major propositions. It is found that in the course of the evolution of mind minor propositions are discovered first, and major prop- os:tions are reached only by the combination of minor propositions ; that always in the search for truth the minor proposition comes first, and that no major proposition can ever be accepted until the minor propositions included therein have been demonstrated. The error in the metaphysic philosophy was the assumption that the great truths were already known by mankind, and that by the proper use of the logical machine all minor truths could be discov- ered, and all errors eliminated from philosophy. As metaphysic methods of reasoning were wrong, metaphysic philosophies were false ;. the body of metaphysic philosophy is a phantasmagoria. THE ORIGIN OF SCIENTIFIC PHILOSOPHY. , While metaphysic philosophers have been playing with their logical kaleidoscopes, another body of philosophers have been at 64 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. work gathering the materials for the philosophy of science. Their method is to collect facts and to discover their relations, and they accept no conclusions that are not reached by this method. All other conclusions they hold as undetermined or indeterminate. And now must be given a definition of science. Science ts tue discernment, discrimination, and classification of facts, and the dis- covery of their relations of sequence. ‘This is a simple statement, but for its full comprehension a little illustration may be necessary. A savage hears the voice of his fellow-man, he hears the voice of the beast, and of the bird; he also hears the noise of the thunder, and he supposes that the noise isa voice. In these cases he discerns noises, but he does not discriminate one noise from the other, and supposes them all to be voices, and that the noise of the thunder is the voice of the Thunder Bird. To understand facts we must not only discern, but discriminate. The next step in the progress of science is classification. Having discerned and discriminated facts, they must be classified—all those of like nature thrown together. All noises made by living beings for conveying intelligence may be grouped into one class and called voices ; all noises made by explosions grouped in another class; and so, as we go on discerning, discriminating, and classifying, we col- lect the materials of philosophy. But this is not all of philosophy. Facts have genetic relations. If one thing is done something else will follow, and the highest function of scientific philosophy is to discover the order of succes- sion of phenomena—how phenomena follow phenomena in endless procession, how every fact has had its antecedent fact, and every fact must have its consequent fact. This part of science is called evolu- tion, and by this expression scientific men mean to be understood that phenomena go on in endless consequences, and that every act has been preceded by some other act, and that every act will be followed by some other act; that the causes of all of the phenomena of the universe that we wish to explain in a system of philosophy run back into the infinite past; that the consequences of all of the DARWIN MEMORIAL. 65 phenomena which we may now observe in the universe will run on into the infinite future. This is evolution. The statement now given of the three great systems of philosophy is perhaps sufficient for our purposes this evening, and it remains for us to point out the part contributed to scientific philosophy by Darwin, whom we mourn to-night. When Darwin rose as a light in the scientific world, scientific philosophers had already discovered that the philosophic method of research should include the discernment, discrimination, and classi- fication of facts. At that time the scientific men of the world were engaged chiefly in the collection and arrangement of facts. To some extent they were engaged in discovering their relations of sequence. Important and interesting sequences had been discov- ered in the vast realm of astronomy; other interesting sequences of facts had been discovered in the realm of geology; some interesting sequences of facts had been discovered in the realm of human history. In the realm of biology, in plant and animal life, the order of succession of facts, the method of evolution, had not been dis- covered; yet many men were thinking on this subject, many men searching for the method and course of biologic evolution. The facts relating thereto were partly known, and the course and laws of biologic evolution were dimly discerned. It remained for Darwin to demonstrate the laws of biologic evo- lution, and the course of the progress of life upon the globe. This he has done in a manner so masterly that there lives not in the world a working biologist, a scientific man engaged in this field of research, who has not directly or indirectly accepted his great con- clusions, and the larger body of biologists have accepted them directly. Let us now go back to the statement that prior to the time of Darwin, scientific men engaged in researches relating to vegetal and animal life were occupied chiefly in the discernment, discrim- ination, and classification of facts. Botanists and zodlogists were engaged in describing species, and 5 66 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. classifying species, and this did not always enlist the highest talent: and naturalists had become wearied with discussions over minute differences and obscure resemblances, the origin and meaning of which were not understood. The discovery, largely made by Darwin, of the laws of succes- sion, or genesis, gave to this department of scientific research a wonderful impetus, and since that day thousands of men have sprung up throughout the civilized world to take part in biologic research. In this field the greatest talent of the latest time is absorbed. The philosophy of biology satisfies the reason. In the universe of life, system is discovered, and biologists see visions of the origin of living beings and dream dreams of the destiny of living beings. Had philosophers discovered that the generations of living beings were degenerating they would have discovered despair. . Had they discovered that life moves by steps of generations in endless circles— that what has been is, and what is shall be, and there is no progress, the gift of science to man would have been worthless. The revelation of science is this: Every generation in life is a step in progress to a higher and fuller life; science has discovered hope. Darwin demonstrated what others vaguely believed or dimly saw: The course and methods of biologic evolution. Darwin gave hope to philosophy. The universe of phenomena may be classed in three great cate- gories. I. Physical. II. Biologic. III. Anthropologic. Physical phenomena may be thrown into three categories: 1. Molar or mechanical physics; 2. Stellar or astronomical physics; 3. Molecular physics. | Biologic phenomena may be classed as: 1. Vegetal; 2. Animal. Anthropologic phenomena may be classed as: 1. Sociologic; 2. Philologic; 3. Philosophic; 4. Psychologic. : DARWIN MEMORIAL. 67 To the discovery of the methods and course of physical evolution, t. e., the order of succession in physical phenomena, many great men have contributed. Among these, Newton stands pre-eminent. The discovery of biologic evolution, 7. ¢., the succession of phe- nomena in vegetal and animal life, is in like manner due to the researches of many men, but among these Darwin stands pre- eminent. By his discoveries the discoveries of all other biologists have been correlated and woven into systematic philosophy. The methods and course of anthropologic evolution have yet to be systematized. Important discoveries have been made, but this por- tion of philosophy is yet inchoate. WORKING HYPOTHESES. But Darwin’s investigations have not ended research or com- pleted philosophy. He brought scientific men to the frontiers of truth, and showed them a path across the border. Yet more than this he did. He pointed out one of the fundamental methods of research. Before his time philosophers talked about deductive methods and inductive methods. Darwin has taught us that both are fruitless. Deductive methods are the logical or metaphysical methods which have been already described, by which men arrived at conclusions from general principles supposed to be innate in the human mind. The vanity of these methods has already been characterized. Inductive methods have found their best expression in the Ba- cohian philosophy. By inductive methods men are to collect facts, unbiased by opinions, or preconceived theories. They are to gather the facts, put them together, arrange and combine them to find higher and still higher generalizations. But there are facts and facts—facts with value, and facts without value. _ The indiscriminate gathering of facts leads to no important discoveries. Men might devote themselves to counting the leaves on the trees, the blades of grass in the meadows, the grains of sand on the sea shore ;—they might weigh each one, and measure each 68 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. one, and go on collecting such facts until libraries were filled, and the minds of men buried under their weight, and no addition would be made to philosophy thereby. There must be some method of selecting, some method of determining what facts are valuable, and what facts are trivial. The fool collects facts; the wise man selects them. Amid the multiplicity of facts in the universe, how does the wise man choose for his use? The true scientific man walks not at random through the world making notes of what he sees; he chooses some narrow field of investigation. Within this field he reviews what is already known and becomes conversant with the conclusions al- ready reached. He then seeks to discern more facts in this field, and to make more careful discriminations therein, and then to make “more homologic classifications ; and, finally, more thoroughly to dis- cover the complexity of sequences. If he attain to success in doing all this his investigations are al- ways suggested by some hypothesis—some supposition of what he may discover. He may find that his hypothesis is wrong, and discover something else; but without an hypothesis he discovers nothing. A scientific man taking up a subject reviews the facts that are known, and imagines that they lead to conclusions that have not yet been reached by others. His imagination may lead him quite astray, yet he follows it, and says ‘‘ Now if this be true, then there must be certain yet undiscovered facts,’’ and he seeks for them. He may find that which he seeks, or he may find some- thing quite other. If he be an honest thinker, a true philosopher, it matters not to him. He substantiates his hypothesis or con- structs a new one. If such hypothesis leads to many new discoy- eries scientific men accept it, and call it a working hypothesis, and if it still leads on to discovery scientific men call it a theory; and so working hypotheses are developed into theories, and these theories become the fundamental principles, the major propositions of science, the widest generalizations of philosophy. Sometimes the inductive method—the Baconian method—is said ee ae tee ey DARWIN MEMORIAL. 69 to have been modified or improved by the addition of the method by working hypotheses, and then modern scientific methods are said to be inductive. With this understanding, it may be said that the deductive methods of metaphysics have been supplanted by the inductive methods of science. It would, perhaps, be better to say that deductive and inductive methods. have been superseded by the method of working hypotheses. Working hypotheses are the instruments with which scientific men select facts. By them, reason and imagination are conjoined, and all the powers of the mind employed in research. Darwin, more than any other man, has taught the use of working hypotheses. Newton and Darwin are the two great lights of science—the Gemini in the heavens of philosophy; stars whose glory is the brightest of all. There be good folk in the world who love mythologic and meta- physic philosophy—one or both. In the ears of such the praise of Darwin is not sweet music. Let. me beg of such who may be here to consider that we come to-night to praise our dead, and to tell of our love for the man who gave us hope. You and I cannot contend over an open grave, and in my soul I find no cause for angry contention elsewhere. Every man’s opinions are honest opinions—his opinions are the children of his own reasoning, and he loves his offspring. | When I stand before the sacred fire in an Indian village and listen to the red man’s philosophy, no anger stirs my blood. I love him as one of my kind. He has a philosophy not unlike that of my forefathers, though widely separated from my own, and I love him as one near akin. Among civilized men I find no one who has not a philosophy in. part common with my own; and of those smaller portions of our philosophies which are not alike I see no cause why anger should be kindled between us thereby. They and I are bound together by the same cord of honesty in opinion. In Darwin’s writings I find no word of reproach. Denunciation 70 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. and ridicule, greater than any other man has endured, never kindled a spark of hatred in his breast. Wrapped in the mantle of his phi- losophy he received no wounds, but lived with and loved mankind. Let us not gird science to our loins as the warrior buckles on his sword. Let us raise science aloft as the olive branch of peace and the emblem of hope. DARWIN’S WORK IN ENTOMOLOGY. By CHARLES V. RILEY. Charles Robert Darwin was one of the original members of the London Entomological Society, of whom only six are yet living. He always took the keenest interest in the science of entomology, and drew largely from insects for illustrations in support of the theory with which his name will forever be associated. Indeed, I have the authority of my late associate editor of the American Ln- tomologist, Benjamin Dann Walsh, who was a classmate of Darwin’s, at Cambridge, that the latter’s love of natural history was chiefly manifested, while there, in a fine collection of insects; so that, as has been the case with so many noted naturalists, Darwin probably acquired from the study of insects that love of nature, which, first forever afterward, inspired him in his endeavors to win her secrets andi nterpret aright her ways! Though he has left no descriptive or systematic work of an ento- mological character, yet his writings abound in important facts and observations anent insects, and no branch of natural science has more fully felt the beneficial impulse and stimulus of his labors than entomology. Indeed, the varying conditions of life in the same individual or species; the remarkable metamorphoses; the rapid development; the phenomena of dimorphism and heteromorphism ; of phytophagic and sexual variation; the ready adaptation to changed conditions, and consequent rapid modification; the great prolificacy and immense number of individuals; the three distinct- DARWIN MEMORIAL. 71 ive states of larva, pupa, and imago, susceptible to modification, as well as other characteristics in insects—render them particularly | attractive and useful to the evolutionist, and the changed aspect which natural history in general has assumed since the publication of the ‘‘ Origin of Species’’ is perhaps more marked in entomology than in any other branch, for its author helped to replace ridicule by reason. During his voyage on the ‘‘ Beagle’’ he collected a very large number of interesting species, especially in Coleoptera, and they formed the basis of many memoirs by Walker, Newman, and White, and particularly by G. R. Waterhouse, who named Odontoscelis Darwinii after him. ‘These memoirs were published either in the Annals and Magazine of Natural History, and in the Transactions of the London Entomological Society, or in various entomological periodicals, and I append a list, which, in this connection, it is not necessary to read. Scattered through his memorable works, a ‘‘ Journal of Researches into the Natural History and Geology of the countries visited dur- ing the voyage of H. M.S. Beagle round the world,’’ (which is best known by the publisher’s title, ‘‘ A Naturalist’s Voyage Round the World,’’) and ‘The Origin of Species by means of Natural Selec- tion,’ are many interesting entomological facts, and in almost every instance they are illumined by his masterly genius and his keen, penetrating mind. These are so numerous, so varied, and withal so widely dispersed, that I can only make reference, at this time, to a few of the most important and striking of them. He pointed out the great preponderance of phytophagous over predaceous species in the tropics as exemplifying the relation of the insect and plant worlds, both of which attain their maximum in those zones. Carabide are few; Scavengers and Brachelytra very common; Rhyncophora and Chrysomekde astonishingly numerous. (Journal of Researches, etc., p. 34-) He showed by minute observations that the insect faunas of Tierra del Fuego, separated from Patagonia only by the Straits of Magellan, have nothing in common, and he discussed the influence 42 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. of primary barriers on the distribution of species, as shown in the marked divergence of the faunas on the eastern and western slopes of the Cordillera. ‘‘ We ought not,’’ he remarks, ‘‘to expect any closer similarity between the organic beings on the opposite sides of great mountain ranges than on the opposite shores of the ocean, except for species which have been able to cross the barrier, whether of rock or salt water.’’ (/did, pp. 326-7.) I believe he was the first to draw attention to the paucity of in- sects on islands, and to establish the principle that the smaller the area, the less favorable it is for the development of insect life. (Lbid, p. 391.) It is a fact of observation that islands predispose to the apterous condition among insects, a fact that is especially noticeable in Kerguelen’s Land, as observed by Dr. Hooker, and particularly by our fellow member, Dr. Kidder. Darwin (Origin of Species, etc., Pp. 109,) first suggested the most plausible reason, viz: that the in- discriminate use of wings might prove injurious to an insular species by tempting it out to sea and to destruction, so that the loss of the power of flight is a positive advantage to the species. The argument against this explanation, viz: that insular species should be gifted with strong powers of flight to fortify themselves against being blown to sea in heavy gales, has little force, because either requirement may be fulfilled; and, in reality, where flight is abso- lutely necessary, as in the majority of Lepidoptera, and flower- frequenting Coleoptera, the wing capacity, in insular species, is actually increased, or correlated with a diminution of bulk; whereas, in those less dependent on aérial progression, natural se- | lection would decrease wing-power, and there would be just such a correlated increase of bulk as is generally the case. The principle he laid down, that the accidental introduction of organic beings amongst others to whose interest they are hostile, may be a powerful means of keeping the latter in check, and of finally destroying them, finds vivid exemplification in insects, as I have shown in discussing those imported into this country.* * Second Annual Rep. on the Insects of Missouri, 1879, pp. 8-13. DARWIN MEMORIAL. 73 He gave reasons for the belief (now generally accepted) that the usual gaudy coloring of intertropical insects is not related either to the heat or light of those zones, but rather to the conditions of ex- istence being generally favorable to life.—(Journal of Researches, etc., p. 381.) He has written on the Phosphorescence of Fire-flies, and on the habits of the larva of one of them—Lamphyris occidentalis. —(/bid, pp. 29-30.) . He discussed the food-habits of stercovorous beetles, with reference to the origination of a new habit and the power of adaptation to new conditions.—(/0id, p. 490, note.) At Port St. Julian, Patagonia, he found a species of Tabanus extremely common, and remarks: ‘‘ We here have the puzzle that so frequently occurs in the case of mosquitoes—on the blood of what do these insects commonly feed? ‘The guanaco is nearly the only warm-blooded quadruped, and is found in quite inconsiderable numbers compared with the multitude of flies.’”’ He has discussed the question of hibernation of insects, and shown that it is governed by the usual climate of a district, and not by absolute temperature. (bid, 98-9.) He gave the first true explanation of the springing power of the Elateridze when laid on their backs, showing how much depended on the elasticity of the sternal spine. (Jdid, p. 31.) He was the first, I believe, to record the exceptional powers of run- ning and of making sound, in a butterfly, viz., Ageronia feronia of Brazil. In his most famous work he lays stress pdrticularly on the follow- ing facts and generalizations, for which he draws from insects: the individual differences in important characters; the remarkable manner in which individuals of the same brood often differ, dimor- phism and trimorphism being only the extreme exaggeration of this fact; the difficulty of distinguishing between species and varie- ties; that geographical races are local forms completely fixed and isolated ; that representative species are better distinguished from each other than local forms and sub-species; that the species of large genera vary more frequently than those of small genera, and that specific differences in the former are often exceedingly small ; \ TA BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. that fecundity does not determine the rate of increase; that the struggle for life is most severe between species of the same genus; that secondary sexual characters are generally displayed in the same parts of the organization in which the species of the same genus differ from each other; that distinct species present analogous varia- tions; that similar structures are often independently developed ; the varying importance for classification of the same important or- gan in the same group of beings; that analogical or adaptive re- semblances are misleading for classification; that the great fre- quency of mimicry among insects is associated with their small size and general defencelessness, as no species furnished with a sting, or other defensive property, is known to mimic other species ; the importance of relative position or connection in homologous parts; the remarkable changes of structure effected during devel- opment; that adaptation to the conditions of life in the insect larva is just as perfect and beautiful as in the adult animal, and that, consequently, larvee of different orders are often similar, and larve belonging to the same order often very dissimilar; that larval and pupal stages are acquired through adaptation, and not through inheritance; that rudimentary organs plainly declare their origin and meaning. Finally he brought together a large body of interesting facts in entomology, bearing on the development and perpetuation of mimicry, and of secondary sexual characters—all more or less explicable by, and furnishing convincing argument for, the gen- eral theory of natural selection; while he freely acknowledged that he found among insects facts that seemed to be most fatal to the theory. This is especially the case in social insects where the colony contains neuters and sterile females which often differ widely in instinct and in structure from the sexual forms, and yet can- not propagate their kind. This is not the place to enter into a discussion of the subject, and I will simply remark that there are reasons for the belief that, in his candor, he has been led to exag- gerate the difficulties in this case. DARWIN MEMORIAL. 75 But Darwin’s chief investigation into insect life were in its rela- tions to plant life, and his work ‘‘On the Various Contrivances by which British and Foreign Orchids are Fertilized by Insects, and on the good effect of crossing,’’ as also that on ‘ Insectivorous Plants,’’ are monuments of skill, industry, and lucid exposition. Entomologists had often noticed the pollen masses of orchids attached to the proboscis of various moths, and in commenting upon the fact had pronounced it ‘‘curious.’’ Darwin in this, as in so many other ¢ases, gave meaning to the curious, and brought light out of darkness. Before his time we find frequent reference to the injury caused to plants by insects, and Sprengel, Gaertner, Herbert, and others had shown that insects were, also, in many cases, beneficial and even necessary to plants, the color, form, odor, secretions, and general structure of which have reference to their necessary insect pollinizers. Yet their writings had produced but slight impression outside of. a limited circle. It remained for Darwin to impress the world with a broader sense of the actual interrelation between the two, and to inspire a number of observers in this field, in all parts of the globe, who are now constantly adding to the rich store of facts we already possess on the subject. I need only refer to the work of Hooker, Bennet, Axell, Delpino, Hildebrand, H. Miiller, and others abroad, and to that of Dr. Gray, and Mr. Wm. Trelease at home. The importance of insects, as agents in cross-fertilization, was never properly appreciated till after Darwin’s remarkable work on Primula, and his researches on Orchids, Linum, Lythrum, etc. He established the principle that ‘‘nature abhors close fertiliza- tion,’’ and though some less careful observers in this country— exaggerating the importance of their isolated and often inaccurate observations—have opposed his views, the scientific world has been convinced alike by the force of his logic as by the eloquence of his innumerable facts. We all know how paleontology has verified many of his anticipa- 76 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. tions as to missing links being supplied with increased knowledge of the geological record, and in connection w:th his work on the fertilization of orchids, we have a remarkable instance of similar verification. The nectaries of Angrecum sesquipedale were found by him to sometimes reach 11% inches in length, with only the lowest 1% inches filled with nectar. He said ‘‘ there must be moths with probosces capable of extension to a length of between ro and tr inches.’’ In Mature for July 17, 1873, or some years later, Fritz Miiller recorded, through his brother, Herman Miller, the finding of a Brazilian Sphingid having a length of proboscis of 0.25 meters, or between 1o and 11 inches. I cannot do justice to Darwin’s work on Insectivorous Plants within the time to which these remarks have been limited, nor with- out trenching on the ground to be covered by Prof. Ward. I must be content to remark, therefore, that he demonstrated the new and wonderful fact in physiology that many plants are capable of ab- sorbing soluble matter from captured insects, and that they have special contrivances and sensibilities that facilitate the capture of © their prey: in other words, that plants actually capture and digest animal food; for the secretion of Drosera, and other insectivorous plants, with its ferment acid belonging to the acetic series, resembles the gastric juice of animals with its pepsin and hydrocloric acid. The fact of absorption demonstrated, it follows that the process would prove serviceable to plants growing in very poor soil, and that it would tend to be perfected by natural selection. The pleasure Darwin took in observing the habits and ways of insects, and the simple and lucid manner in which he recorded his observations are frequently exemplified in his Journal of Researches, and his account of sundry Brazilian species on page 35, and fol- lowing, may be consulted as an example. In the same way that he has influenced all lines of thought and investigation, he has influenced entomology. We find everywhere, in his treatment of insects, the same acute perception, the same candor and impartiality, the same clearness of expression, the same DARWIN MEMORIAL. raf aptitude to get at the significance and bearing of facts observed, as well as the same readiness to deduce a theory which is only equaled by the devotion with which he clings to the truth, whether favora- ble or unfavorable to the theory. In the light of Darwinism, insect structure and habit have come to possess a new significance and a deeper meaning. It has, in short, proved a new power to the working entomologist who, for all time, will hold in reverence the name of. him who, more than any other man, helped to replace scholasticism by induction and who gave to the philosophic study of insects as great an impetus as did Linnzus to their systematic study. In his private life Darwin has given usa lesson of patience, cour- tesy, and consideration, that will be best appreciated by those who have the misfortune to be endowed with move irritable and ag- gressive natures. As the above account of Darwin’s entomological work is doubt- . less rather uninteresting to most of those gathered here, I will close, by request, with a few personal impressions. I have had the pleasure on two occasions of visiting Darwin at his invitation. On the first occasion, in the summer of 1871, I was accompanied by Mr. J. Jenner Wier, one of his life-long friends and admirers. From Mr. Weir I first learned that Darwin was, in one sense, virtually a confirmed invalid, and that his work had been done under physical difficulties which would have ren- dered most men of independent means vapid, self-indulgent, and useless members of society. It is eloquent of the indomitable will and perseverance of the man that, during the long voyage on the Beagle, he suffered so from sea-sickness that he never fully recovered from the shock to his system, and could not again venture on the ocean. He had, in fact, on his return from the voyage, to go through a long course of _ hydropathic treatment. We also now know that though he had suffered much for some months past from weakness and recurring fits of faintness, and had been confined to the house, yet as late as 78 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Tuesday evening before the day of his death, at 4 P. M., Wednes- day, he was in his study examining a plant which he had had brought to him, and that he read that night before retiring, while as late as the 16th of March, he read two papers on special botani- cal subjects before the Linnean Society. The village of Down is fifteen miles southeast of London, four miles from Orpington station on the Southeastern Railway. ‘The country is among the most beautiful agricultural suburbs of London, and I shall never forget the impression of peaceful, quiet seclusion experienced, as we drove from the station and finally through one of those characteristic English lanes, just wide enough for one vehicle, and worn down several feet below the general level—the sense of confinement being enhanced by the luxuriant hedge on either side. This lane skirts the orchard wall for 100 yards and then goes in front of the house, from which it is separated by a grass plot and flint wall overgrown with ivy. The Darwin residence is a plain, but spacious, old-fashioned house of the style so common in England, and which, with the sur- rounding well-kept grounds and conservatory, convey that impres- sion of ease and comfort that belong to the average home of the English country gentleman. A noticeable feature is a bow window extending through three stories and covered with trellis and creepers. In Darwinian phrase the environraent was favorable for just such calm study and concentration as he found necessary to his health and his researches. | Upon introduction I was at once struck with his stature (which was much above the average, and I should say fully six feet,) his ponderous brow and long white beard—the moustache being cut on a line with the lips and slightly brown from the habit of snuff- taking. His deep-set eyes were light blue-gray. He made the im- pression of a powerful man reduced somewhat by sickness. The massive brow and forehead show in his later photographs, but not so conspicuously as in a life-sized head of him when younger, which hung in the parlor. DARWIN MEMORIAL. 79 In the brief hours I then spent at Down the proverbial modesty and singular simplicity and sweetness of his character were appar- ent, while the delight he manifested in stating facts of interest was excelled only by the eagerness with which he sought them from others, whether while strolling through the greenhouse or sitting round the generously spread table. Going to him as a young entomologist with no claim on his favor, he seemed to take delight in manifesting appreciation. I had occa- sion in my third report on the insects of Missouri, published in the spring of that year, to discuss the question of Natural Selection in its bearings on Mimicry, as exemplified in two of our North Ameri- can butterflies, (Danazs archippus and Limenitis disifpus.) This re- port I found in his study with many leaves turned down, and he appeared to take especial pleasure in conveying a sense of his ap- preciation of particular parts. The few letters which I received from Darwin were in his own hand-writing, which was rapid and better calculated to save time : than to facilitate the reading. I take the liberty of reproducing here the first and last as indicating his attitude toward all workers in the field of natural science, however humble or however unde- serving of his praise they may have been; and this generous trait in his character will explain, in some measure, the stimulus and en- couragement which he gave to investigators : : Down, JuNE 1, [1871.] BECKENHAM, KENT. My Dear Sir: I received some little time ago your Report on Noxious In- sects, and have now read the whole with the greatest interest. There is a vast number of facts and generalizations of value to me, and I am struck with admir- ation at your power of observation. The discussion on mimetic insects seems to me particularly good and original. Pray accept my cordial thanks for the in- struction and interest which I have received. What a loss to natural science our poor mutual friend, Walsh, has been: it is a loss ever to be deplored. Pray believe me, with much respect, Yours, very faithfully, Cu. DARWIN, 80 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Down, SEPTEMBER 28, 1881. BECKENHAM, KENT. My Dear Mr. RILEY: I must write half-a-dozen lines to say how much in- terested I have been by your “ Further Notes” on Pronuba, which you were so kind as to send me. I had read the various criticisms, and though I did not know what answer would be made, yet I felt full confidence in the result, and now I see I was right. bd * * * If you make any further observation on Pronuba it would, I think, be well worth while for you to observe whether the moth can or does occasionally bring pollen from one plant to the stigma of a distinct one; for I have shown that the cross-fertilization of the flowers on the same plant does very little good and, if I am not mistaken, you believe that the Pronuba gathers pollen from the same flower which she fertilizes.* What interesting and beautiful observations you have made on the metamor- phoses of the grass-hopper destroying insects! Believe me, My dear sir, Yours sincerely, Cu. DARWIN. My own experience in this regard is the common experience, for an interest in natural science was an open sesame to his generous soul. His consideration, without aggression, was the secret of the gratitude and respect which all felt who had the honor to know him, either personally or through correspondence. His approval of the work of others was coupled with a deprecia- tion of his own, which was very marked on the occasion of my second visit to Europe, in 1875, when I crossed the ocean with his son Leonard on his way from the Transit of Venus expedition. ««Insectivorous Plants’’ was just finished and Darwin was worn and in feeble health, staying, in fact, at Abinger Hall for rest. He was quite disgusted with the book, to use his son’s expression, and doubted whether it could prove of sufficient interest, with its long and dry records of experiments, to be read by any one. *This isa misapprehension. Pronuba is an effectual cross-fertilizer, rnnning from flower to flower, and often flying from raceme to raceme with one and the same load of pollen. The omitted passages in this letter refer to the work of a gentleman stil! living. DARWIN MEMORIAL. | 81 DARWIN AS A BOTANIST. By LrEstTer F. Warp. Appointed by the committee to furnish a brief sketch on this occasion of the contributions of Charles Darwin to the science of plants, I have purposely chosen the title, ‘‘ Darwin as a Botanist,’’ in order to emphasize the contrast which may be drawn between different classes of botanists, and to do what I can to accustom the public mind to associate with the terms dofanist and dofany certain great fields of investigation which are now rarely suggested by these words. If I had entitled my paper: Darwin’s researches into the phenom- ena of the vegetable kingdom, I fear it might not have occurred to some of you that this great investigator was a botanist, as he is not generally known as such. Yet I fail to see why the science of bot- any is not fully entitled to receive its share of the dignity and the : luster which Darwin’s investigations have reflected upon biology in general, The popular idea of botany, however, is very different from this. Not ignorant people alone, but scientific men as well, place all botanists under two general classes: ‘‘ Field Botanists’’ and ‘‘ Closet Botanists.”’ : The field botanist is one who, being passionately fond of plants and having mastered the rudiments of botany and become familiar with the names and classification of plants, searches the country for new and rare species, and for new localities for old ones, and makes large collections. Success in these objects is his triumph, and occasionally becoming the proud discoverer of hitherto un- known forms of vegetable life, he finds the scientific world quick and generous in awarding him due credit. The closet botanist is one who, disdaining the boyish pursuit of flowers, devotes himself to the study of the characters of plants as revealed by the herbarium specimens which the field botanist so 6 82 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. copiously furnishes, and by which method he, too, can discover ‘*new species,’’ and obtain prompt recognition. The closet bota- nist performs the further useful service of ‘‘revising’’ intricate families and genera of plants, unraveling the entanglements of previous authors, and making such changes in the classification and names as are best suited to secure the maximum personal credit. I need not tell this audience that Charles Darwin belonged to neither of these classes of botanists. A lover of nature, he yet never wasted precious time in the idle pursuit of rarities. Thoroughly familiar with the distinctive characters upon which botanical classi- fication rests, he yet never pursued to any marked extent the inves- tigation of specimens from the hortus siccus. I doubt whether a single species of plant was ever named after him by reason of his having either discovered it in a wild state or detected its specific dis- tinct ness by the examination of its characters. I even doubt whether he possessed an herbarium, in the accepted sense of the word. And yet this man has probably contributed more to our real knowledge of plants than any other single botanist. In what, then, have Darwin’s botanical investigations consisted? There is a little French book entitled ‘‘ Voyage d’un Botaniste dans sa Maison,’’ a title which, allowing for the characteristic hy- perbole of the French tongue, suggests the general nature of Dar- win’s botanical studies. His researches were conducted in his laboratory, in pots of plants at his window, in his aquarium, in his green-house, in his garden. He worked with- instruments of pre- cision, recorded his observations with exactness, and employed every mechanical device for making his results reveal important truths, of which the genius of man would seem to be capable. Darwin looked upon plants as “ving things. He did not study their forms so much as their actions. He interrogated them to learn what they were doing. | The central truth, towards which his botanical investigations con- stantly tended, was that of the universal activity of the vegetable ag te ae SRI ay 5 y oho DARWIN MEMORIAL. 83 kingdom—thatall plants ove and act. He has, so tospeak, animated the vegetable world. He has shown that whichever kingdom of organic nature we contemplate, to “ve is to move. He blandly rebukes the vulgar notion that ‘plants are disting- _uished from animals by not having the power of movement,’’ and still more modestly says that ‘‘ plants acquire and display this power only when it is of some advantage to them.’’ But is this the whole? Do animals display this power except when it is of some advantage to them? Certainly not. Darwin shows us that certain parts of all plants are at all times in motion; not merely the molecular activities of their tissues and of the living protoplasm in their cells, but organized movement of parts. Every leaf, every tendril, every rootlet, possesses the power of spontaneous movement, and under nearly all circumstances actu- ally exercises that power. There are a great many distinct kinds of movement, depending in all cases upon the special advantages thereby gained to the plant. ) The laws under which these movements take place have received from him an admirable terminology. Most of them are condi- tioned either by light, by gravity, by radiation, or by insect agency. We thus have of the first class, hefotropism, or movement to- wards the light; apheliotrofism, or movement from the light; diaheliotropism, or movement at right angles to the source of light ; and paraheliotropism, embracing such movements as screen the plant from excess of light. To the second class belong: geotrofism, or movement towards the earth or into the soil; afogeotropism, or movement contrary to the force of gravity; and dageotropism, or movement at right angles to the force of gravity. | The third class embraces the so-called myctotropic movements of plants by which they appear to sleep, and which prove to be devices ror the prevention of excessive radiation of the plants’ heat. Under the fourth class fall all those wonderful movements which aid the plant in preventing self-and securing cross-fertilization, a 84 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. subject of the most absorbing interest, and of which you have already listened to so able a presentation by Prof. Riley from the point of view of the entomologist. . But Darwin’s great service has been to show that these varieties of activity are simply modes in which inherent and spontaneous activities manifest themselves under these varying external influences. His preliminary investigations into the nature of these innate powers of movement were directed to that large class of plants known as twiners and climbers, whose revolving motions were so thoroughly described in his work on ‘* Climbing Plants.’’ It was here that he laid the foundation for those later studies which eventually resulted in that great work, almost his last, on the “¢ Power of Movement in Plants.’’ In this work he demonstrates by an enormous induction that the ample sweeps of the twining plant are but the most obvious manniestations of a class of phenomena which are common to the entire vegetable kingdom. Amid the varied forms of movement which plants present Darwin has succeeded in finding one fundamental and generic one to which every other may be referred. To this universal form of plant activity he gives the name ‘‘circumnutation.’’ Not only twining stems and tendrils, but parts of flowers, tips of growing shoots, caps of penetrating roots and rootlets, radicles, epicotyls, cotyledons, and even full-grown leaves, are incessantly describing circles, ellipses, and other more or less regular geometrical figures ; and he conclusively shows that it is out of this primary form of activity that all the more specialized forms already mentioned have been developed. All movements of the parts of plants are thus to be interpreted as modified forms of this innate periodic circumnutation which is common to all plant life. Such modifications are always in the direction of the plant’s advantage and may be so great as to become difficult of recognition as forms circumnutation. I need not labor to convince you that any modification which is an advantage to the plant will be secured by the process of natural selection. It is the glory of the great genius whose labors we are DARWIN MEMORIAL. 85 here to commemorate to have demonstrated this truth to the entire satisfaction of the united scientific world. ; Darwin has actually solved the great problem of phytology, so long supposed to be incapable of solution, viz: Why does the root grow downward and the stem upward? Briefly and roughly stated, the answer to this question is that, as the bursting seed ‘pushes out its two germinal points these circumnutate from the first, and thus explore their surroundings for the means of benefiting the plant. 9? To employ Darwin’s own word, they ‘‘ perceive’’ the advantage that would result from the penetration of the soil, on the one hand, and from the ascent into the free air and sunlight, on the other, and through the pre-Darwinian law of the ‘‘ physiological division of labor,’’ the one becomes geofropic and the other heliotropic —the one develops into a radicle and then into a root, while the other develops into an epicotyl and then into a stem. I will only add to the thoughts already. presented that Darwin’s discovery of the existence in all plants of an innate and spontaneous ~ mobility belonging to them as forms of organic life, possesses an important ulterior significance. The law of natural selection, as a fundamental process, has long since passed the stage of discussion. But there has always remained one unsettled question lying at its very base which Darwin him- self admitted to be an open one. That question concerns the cause itself of variation. It is granted that, admitting the zendency Zo vary, all the results claimed for natural selection must follow; but many declare that, in this very tendency to vary, there is a mystery as great as the mystery of life itself. It is only in this work on the ‘‘ Power of Movement in Plants”’ that Darwin has really assailed this last fortress of supernaturalism. Not that he has avowed any such purpose, for of this he would have been incapable, but so skilfully and so powerfully has he marshaled the facts that the conclusion follows without being stated. No one can doubt that he perceived this, and [, for one, am convinced that he saw it from afar, and that it was the great end of his labors; 86 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. but with his characteristic wisdom he has declined to invoke the odium thealogicum, correctly judging that the truth must ultimately assert itself. : The tendency to vary, then, is a mechanical result of the proved fact of universal movement coupled with the admitted law of natu- ral selection. By means of the former all plants and growing parts of plants are perpetually exploring their immediate surroundings in search, as it were, for conditions favorable to development. By means of the latter they are able to avail themselves of such favor- able conditions when found. Nothing further than this is required to complete the natural explanation of all the phenomena presented by the organic world, and thus, at last, the whole domain of biol- ogy is emancipated from teleological fetters, and placed on the high plane of rational investigation. In conclusion, let me simply say that, while we can but deeply mourn the irreparable loss which science has sustained in the death of Charles Darwin, we have still the highest grounds for congratu- lation in the fact that he lived to complete that great work which, next to the ‘‘ Origin of Species,’’ will, I firmly believe, be awarded by posterity the highest place, viz. ,“‘ The Power of Movement in Plants;’’ for, while the former auspiciously opened the great debate by stating the profoundest of all biological problems, the latter has fittingly closed the argument by answering the last objection. DARWIN MEMORIAL. 87 DARWIN ON THE EXPRESSION OF THE EMOTIONS. By FRANK BAKER, M. D. From the tendency of the imagination to magnify the unknown and remote, arises a popular error that to attain eminence a man of science must be able to gather facts from great distances—from the sources of the Nile, and from polar snows. But the near and com- monplace are subject to the same laws as the atoms of interstellar space, and true scientific insight may discover in the very dust under our feet secrets hitherto concealed. Darwin’s work upon the Expression of the Emotions is continu- ous with and supplementary to his larger and better-known treatise on the Descent of Man. As with other matter bearing directly upon the development hypothesis, its publication was deferred as long as possible, in order that the evidence might be fully weighed. Pro- | jected in 1838, it was not published until thirty-five years later. One class of objections to the hypothesis was not considered in the main work. It was generally held that, by his emotional expres- sion, man was widely separated from the lower animals. The emi- nent anatomist, Duchenne, who remains to-day the best authority on muscular movements, merely expressed the views of the time when he stated that no cause could be assigned for facial ex- pression, except the ‘‘ divine fantasy ’’ of the Great Artificer. Having projected his work, how does Darwin proceed? From the gentlemen who have preceded me you have learned of his methods. To test the truth of his conceptions he commences a series of most minute and careful observations, omitting nothing within his reach. His most important field is that which is nearest ; his own children, his friends and companions, even the dogs that accompany his daily walks, come under that powerful scrutiny. Where, indeed, can we find so perfect an observer? The calm sanity of his mind keeps him equally aloof from egotism and from self-depreciation. A fact isa fact, to be stated with the fairness 88 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. and openness of perfect daylight. [ Here is a man who cares more for the truth than for himself. ~ The black spot in man’s sunshine, the shadow of himself, seems non-existent for him. | He stands by his work, that is enough; if it has worth, well—if not, still well ; the elemental drift of action and reaction will continue, the out- come will still be good. As Carlyle has said, ‘‘A noble uncon- sciousness is in him. He does not engrave ¢vwth on his watch-seal ; no, but he stands by truth, speaks by it, works and lives by it.’’ But not as a fact gatherer do we find him greatest. Many others have struggled with ant-like toil to amass piles of facts which, like the ant-heap, remain but sand after all. Darwin brings to his work an informing spirit, the genius of scientific hypothesis. Breathed upon by this spirit, the dry bones of fact come together ‘‘ bone to his bone,’’ the sinews and the flesh come upon them, they become alive and stand upon their feet ‘‘ an exceeding great army.’’ He searches always for the principles which underlie the facts and make them possible, realizing that the phenomena, the things which are seen, are temporal and transitory; the things which are not seen, the cosmical forces which govern and control, are eternal. In his examination of the expression of the emotions he found that both in man and animals they can be referred to three general principles which may be termed habit, antithesis, and nervous over- flow. Byhabit, or repetition, serviceable movements become fixed— involuntary, or semi-voluntary. By antithesis, opposite frames of mind are expressed by opposite actions, even though those actions may not be serviceable. The theory of nervous overflow is that un- usual quantities of force generated by the cerebro-spinal system are discharged by unusual channels of expression when the ordinary channels are insufficient. He finds that emotional expressions are generally direct conse- quences of anatomical structure, and clearly shows the interdepen- dence of anatomy and physiology. For structure can no more be divorced from function than matter can be dissociated from force. , All the complex expressions of grief—from the twitching of the DARWIN MEMORIAL. 89 eyelids and mouth to the shedding of tears—he has shown to depend upon the necessity for preventing engorgement of the eyes during screaming, an act originally useful solely to attract attention. The steps by which he arrived at this conclusion are typical of his method. Starting first with animals, he finds that their expressions of grief are much less complex and various than those of man. They are confined to noises, such as screaming, barking, whining, in higher forms accompanied by changes in facial expression, par- ticularly by contraction of the muscles surrounding the eye. There is a physiological necessity for this, as otherwise the expiratory effort caused by screaming might engorge and rupture the small ocular blood-vessels. By pressing on the lachrymal gland this causes, in some of the higher animals, a flow of tears. What at first was accidental, merely occasioned by the proximity of the gland, becomes at last habitual, and the nervous force automatically follows the line of its accustomed action, causing a flow of tears after emotional excitement, even though no screaming take place. The | correctness of this view is supported by the fact that infants do not shed tears until several weeks old, although they scream violently. The functional activity of the lachrymal gland, in connection with grief, is, therefore, later in phylogenetic development. The laws of heredity and adaptation are found to be operating here, as else- where, in the domain of life; the supposed gap between the emo- tions of man and of other animals is successfully bridged over, and another anthropocentric fallacy is consigned to the limbo of igno- rant superstitions. Many expressions of the lower emotions are found to be disfig- uring vestiges of acts useful to lower animals for offense and de- fense, or for obtaining food. These survive—relics of the previous history of our race—as rudimentary organs are preserved long after their use has ceased. ‘The erection of the hair during fear is re- motely derived from the same cause that makes puss bristle when attacked and the puff adder swell out when approached. Originally used for the purpose of exciting fear in an enemy by an increase of 90 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. size, it now involuntarily accompanies the somewhat changed emo- tion of which some of the phases are extinct. It is not very rare to find persons who can make the hair over the front of the head bristle at will. Rage is habitually expressed by uncovering the teeth, which is, in the lower animals, an attempt to frighten their enemies by a show of weapons. This expression may become soft- ened and modified to express the milder emotions of contempt and disdain. I have met a lady who has to perfection the rather rare accomplishment mentioned by Darwin of drawing up the upper lip in a triangular notch directly over the canine teeth so as to display them alone, usually on one side at a time. This most expressive gesture of disdain can be performed under the influence of the emotion by many who cannot do it at will. 3 Of an opposite class are certain higher expressions, which, having arisen later, are not yet entirely fixed. Blushing is one of the most curious of these. It is not found in infants, and varies greatly in frequency and amount in adults, accompanying the sentiment of modesty, almost unknown among animals. The reddening is usually confined to the face and neck. Darwin suggests an in- genious explanation for this. The blood-vessels most exposed to variations of temperature acquire the habit of expanding and con- tracting—their vaso-motor nerves become more sensitive. The chief expression of personal appearance isin the face; the attention of the mind is, therefore, directed there whenever the emotion of modesty is aroused. This interferes with the ordinary tonic con- traction of the blood-vessels, and an excess of blood suffuses the surface. | A remarkable confirmation of Darwin’s views is the recent discov- ery of localized centers in the brain which control emotional ex- pression, and exist in animals as well as in man. It may some- time be possible to read the currents and counter-currents of the brain by means of feature-play with a precision approaching that by which we estimate the force of a distant battery by the play of a galvanometer needle. Many phenomena of expression, which DARWIN MEMORIAL. 91 were obscure before this discovery, can now be satisfactorily ex- plained. Among these are the phenomena of associated move- ments. It has been stated that the variety and complexity of the movements involved in the simple act of walking are such that it would be impossible ever to perform it were it necessary to think what had to be done, and weigh in the judgment the precise amount of force necessary to distribute to each muscle at each moment of the act. It is now known that the cerebral centers which control the separate muscles put in action are closely contiguous in the brain, and that they probably intercommunicate and excite each other in a definite manner, predetermined by habit and heredity. The conscious mind has only to set in motion the subordinate ap- paratus, when it. goes on, and works out the problem with matchless skill, like the system of cogs and eccentrics that produce the intri- cate pattern in an engraver’s lathe. All have noticed the uncouth manner in which children and untrained persons follow with lips and tongue the motions of their hands when using a tool of any kind. Darwin ascribes this to unconscious imitation, but it can be explained more strictly in accordance with his own principles. The facial muscles are actuated from a cerebral center in close proximity to those which move the arms and hands. In the lower animals this is necessary, for the mouth is an organ of prehension, used in strict association with the fore-limbs in seizing prey, and in other acts. As this associated movement became strongly fixed by long habit, it survives with great obstinancy, and though it has not been useful to the race since the historical period, we have yet to caution our children not to put their tongues out when they write. My limit of time forces me to conclude this hasty and imperfect summary. ‘The practical bearing of these views is not without im- portance. Physicians have always depended greatly upon emo- tional expression as a means of diagnosis. Unconsciously the face of the patient reveals his physical state. Yet too much has been left in the empirical border-land of science. Way a certain pathologi- 92 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. cal state should be indicated by a definite combination of expres- - sions has not always been clearly shown. ‘To-day the whole subject is studied from the point of view of anatomy and physiology. No occult force is admitted, the correlative nerve-supply of muscles and the effect of excitation of nerve-centers are rationally investigated. { Aside from the great special value of the work, of what tremen- dous import to the race are Darwin’s deductions! For he has shown us that our every thought and act mold our physical frames, and through them the generations yet unborn, either to beauty and grace, or to uncouth uglinessand deformity. As the struggle for existence filled the rocks with organisms forever extinct, because not for the highest use, so may we, too, fossilize and outgrow habits and desires of ignoble birth, ascending by the ‘‘ power of leasts,’’ by that wondrous calculus of nature, to purer and nobler existence. Darwin has taught us that the forces which, acting through countless cycles, have brought us up from formless slime, now remain in our hands to use for good or ill— “That life is not as idle ore, But ison dug from central gloom, And heated hot with burning fears, And dipt in baths of hissing tears, And battered with the shocks of doom For shape and use.” A DARWINIAN BIBLIOGRAPHY. By FREDERICK W. TRUE, Librarian of the U. S. National Museum. The complete bibliography of Darwinism should contain, not alone the works which emanated from the busy brain and ready pen of Darwin himself, but the many other productions which these called into life. The aquiescences of friends, the objections of critics, the censures of foes, should all be enrolled in their proper places as representing the ripples and counter-ripples in the sea of DARWIN MEMORIAL. 93 thought, produced by the weighty ideas which dropped from the clear mind of the philosopher. It is not to the merits of these, however, that I can call your attention, but only to a few facts rel- ative to the books of Darwin himself. I would not have you suppose, if, indeed, one could, after the lucid remarks to which you have listened, that the faulty—and, I fear, almost indiscernible—list of published works, which I have attempted to exhibit before you, reveals more than a moiety of Darwin’s writings.* A large number of comprehensive papers, pregnant notes, and incisive queries. are contained in those store- houses of precise knowledge, the journals of science, and the pub- lications of learned societies. During more than half a century, from the beginning of Darwin’s career to its very close, scarcely a year passed in which a number of articles did not issue from his pen. His first paper, on the Ova of Flustra, and another of simi- lar nature, were read before the Plinian Society, of Edinburgh, in 1825. His last note on the Distribution of Fresh-water Bivalves appeared in JVature but a few days before his death. During the first twenty-five years the articles have mostly a geo- logical and zoological bearing, but later botanical and anthropologi- cal subjects come into prominence. They were contributed to many publications, including a few American, German, and French journals. The mass of papers, however, are to be found in the Proceedings and Transactions of the Geological Society of London, the Philosophical Transactions, the Philosophical Magazine, the An- nals and Magazine of Natural History, and Nature. It is in these papers that we first find the germs of many of those more elaborate works, to which general attention has been attracted. Thus the works on the Origin of Species, the Fertilization of Plants by Insects, the Action of Earth Worms, and others were foreshadowed at a time considerably antedating their final appear- ance. * The speaker referred to two large scrolls hanging on the lecture room walls, upon which were inscribed a list of Darwin’s most important publications. 94 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. . Darwin seemed to prefer to work out and write out his ideas alone. Once at least, however, he shared the toil with his friend, Mr. Wallace, and later, in several instances, with his sons, Francis and George Darwin. Regarding the separately published works of Darwin, there is much of interest from the bibliographical point of view. The con- scientiousness with which the author profited by the criticisms of others, revising, improving, and extending his generalizations, makes each new edition seem like a separate production. Whole chapters were stricken out and new ones inserted ; facts of doubtful character were replaced by others of a more positive nature and more recent acquisition. Time forbids that I should refer to the details of publication of more than one work. The inquiring student will find his wants satisfied in the several lists which have already been published. I will give the history of but one work, the most important of all, the ‘‘ Origin of Species by Means of Natural Selection.’’ The first edition of this work received the signature of the author on November 24, 1859, and was published the same year. The second edition, which appeared soon after, ‘was little more than a re- print of the first.’’ ‘‘The third edition was largely corrected and added to, and the fourth and fifth still more largely.’’ The sixth edition, which appeared in 1872, was likewise largely amended, and had reached its twenty thousand in 1878. In the meantime foreign editions and translations began to appear. The American and French editions at first kept pace with the English, the second Amer- ican being from the second English, and the third French from the third English. The Germans, coming in a little later, published their second edition from the third English, and their third, from the fourth English one. The last editions in all these languages were derived, I believe, from the sixth English one. ‘‘ The Italian is from the third, the Dutch and three Russian editions from the second English editions, and the Swedish from the fifth English edition.’’ DARWIN MEMORIAL. 95 At least twelve of the more important works have been issued in one or more editions in German and French, and a number in other European languages as well. The sage of Down was undoubtedly honest in his surprise at the ever-extending circle of his influence. A wider and more intelli- gent audience could scarcely be desired. The number of books in which his opinions are discussed or alluded to is legion. As the illustrious Asa Gray has remarked, ‘‘ Dante literature and Shakes- peare literature have been the growth of centuries, but Darwinism filled teeming catalogues during the life time of the author.’’ CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF THE WRITINGS OF CHARLES DARWIN. 1835. [Extracts from Letters addressed to Professor Henslow. ] Tract, privately printed, 8vo., Cambridge, 1835. 1837. Note sur la Decouverte de quelques Ossemens Fossiles dans l’Amerique du Sud. Ann, Sci. Nat., 2d series, (Zoology,) VII, 1837, pp. 319-320. 1837. [Notes upon the Rhea Americana. ] Proce. Zool. Soe., London, V, 1837, pp. 35-36. 1837. Remarks upon the Habits of the Genera Geospiza, Camarhynchus, Cac- tornis, and Certhidea of Gould. Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1837, p. 49. 1838. Sur Trois Espéces du Genre Fe/is. l'Institut, VI, 1838, no. 235, pp. 210-211. 1838. On the Formation of Mould. Trans. Geol. Soc., 2d ser., V, 1840, pp. 505-510: Proce. Geol. Soc., IT, 1838, pp. . 574-576: Philos. Mag., 3d ser., XII, p. 89: Gardener’s Chronicle, 1844, p. 218: Frorieps Notiz., V1, 1738, cull. 180-183. 1838. Observations of Proofs of the Recent Elevation of the Coast of Chili, made during the Survey of H. M. S. “ Beagle,’ commanded by Capt. Fitzroy. Proc. Geol. Soc., II, 1838, pp. 446-449: Philos. Mag., 3d ser., XI. p. 100. 1838. A Sketch of the Deposits containing Extinct Mammalia in the neighbor- hood of the Plata. Proc. Geol, Soc., II, 1838, p. 543: Philos. Mag., 3d ser. XI, p. 206: Ann. Sei Nat., VII. Zool., 1837, pp. 319-320. 96 > 1838. 1838. 1838. 1838. 1839. 1839. 18309. 1839. 1839. 1840. BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. On certain Areas of Elevation and Subsidence in the Pacific and Indian Ocean, as deduced from the study of Coral Formations. Proce. Geol. Soc., IT, 1838, pp. 552-554: Philos. Mag., ser. 3, XI, p. 307: Froriep. Notiz., IV, 1838, coll. 100-103. Geological Notes made during a Survey of the East and West Coasts of South America, in the years 1832, 1833, 1834, and 1835, with an Account of a Transverse Section of the Cordilleras of the Andes be- tween Valparaiso and Mendoza. Proce. Geol. Soe., II, 1838, p. 210-212: Philos. Mag., ser. 3, VIII, p. 156. Origin of Saliferous Deposits. Salt Lakes of Patagonia and La Plata. Journ. Geol. Soce., II, 1838, pt. 2, pp. 127-128. On the Connexion of Certain Volcanic Phenomena, and on the Formation of Mountain-chains and the effects of Continental Elevations. Proce. Geol. Soc., If, 1838, pp. 654-660: — Geol. Soc., V, 1840, pp. 601-632: Poggend. Annal., ‘bil. 1841, pp. 484-496 Journal of Researches into the ovine and Natural History of the Vari- ous Countries Visited by H. M. S. “ Beagle,” under the Command of Captain Fitzroy, R. N., from 1832 to 1836. By Charles Darwin, Esq., M. A., F. R. S., Secretary to the Geological Society. 8vo., London, 1839. [Narrative of the Surveying Voyages of H. M. SS. “Adventure” and “ Beagle,” describing their Examination of the Southern Shores of South America, Vol. III.] Journal and Remarks, 1832-1836, 8vo, London, 1839. Note on a Rock seen on an Iceberg in 61° South Latitude. Journ. Royal Geog. Soc., IX, 1839, pp. 528-529. Ueber die Luftschifferei der Spinnen. Fror. N. Not., Bd., 77, no. 222, 1839, pp. 23-24. Observations on the Parallel Roads of Glen Roy and of other parts of Lochaber, in Scotland, with an attempt to prove that they are of Marine Origin. Philos. Trans., 1839, CX XIX, p. 39-82: Edinb. New Philos. Youunek: XXVIII, 1839, pp. 395-403. Geological Observations (with numerous Maps and Sections) made during the Voyage of H. M. Ship “ Beagle,” under the command of Capt. Fitzroy, R. N., on the Volcanic Islands of the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, and on Coral Formations; together with a Brief Notice of the Geology of the Cape of Good Hope, and of parts of Australia. By Charles Darwin, Esq., M.A., Secretary to the Geological Society of London. 1840-1844. ‘The Zoology of the Voyage of H. M. S. “ Beagle,” under the com- mand of Capt. Fitzroy, during the years 1832 to 1836. Edited and Superintended by Charles Darwin. 8vo. London, 1840-1844. Fossil Mammalia. By R. Owen. Witha Geological Introduction by Charles Darwin. . 1841. 1842. 1842. 1842. 1843. 1844. 1844. 1844. 1846. 1846. 1846. 1848. 1849. 1850. DARWIN MEMORIAL. 97 On a Remarkable Bar of Sandstone off Pernambuco, on the Coast of Brazil. Philos. Mag., 3d ser., XIX, 1841, pp. 257-260. Notes on the Effects produced by the Ancient Glaciers of Caernarvonshire, and on the Boulders Transported by Floating Ice. Philos. Mag., 3d ser., XXI, 1842, p. 180: Edinb. New Philos. Journal, XXXIII, 1842, pp. 352-353. On the Distribution of Erratic Boulders, and on the Contemporaneous Unstratified Deposits of South America. Trans. Geol. Soc., 2d ser., 1842, VI, Fe 415-432: Proc. Geol. Soc., IIT, 1842, PP. 425-430: Philos. Mag., 3d ser., XIX, p. 536: Leonhard & Bronn, Neues ahrb. for Min., Geol., &c., 1843, p. 741. The Structure and Distribution of Coral Reefs. 8vo. London, 1842. Remarks on Charles Maclaren’s paper “On Coral Islands and Reefs, as described by M. Darwin.” Edinburgh New Philos. Journal, XXXIV, 1843, pp. 47-50. Observations on the Structure and Propagation of the genus Sagz#ta. By Charles Darwin, F. R. S., V. P. G. S. Ann. and Mag. of Nat. History, 13, 1844, pp. 1-6, pl. 1, figs. A-D: Ann. de Sci. Nat., 3d series, Zoologie, I, 1844, pp. 360-365, figs.: Fror. N. Not., Bd XXX, no. 639, 1844, pp. 1-6. Brief Descriptions of several Terrestrial Planarig and of some remark- able Marine Species, with an Account of their Habits. By Charles Darwin, F. R. S., V. P. G. S. Ann. and Mag. of Nat. History, 14, 1844, pp. 241-251, pl. V, figs. 1-4. Geological Observations on the Volcanic Islands, visited during the voy- age of H. WM. S. Beagle, together with some brief notices on the Geology of Australia and the Cape of Good Hope. Being the sec- ond part of the Geology of the Voyage of the “ Beagle,” under the command of Capt. Fitzroy, R. N., during the years 1832 to 1836. 8vo. London, 1844. ; Journ. Geol. Soc., I, p. 556. Geological Observations on South America. 8vo. London, 1846. An account of the Fine Dust which often falls on Vessels in the Atlantic Ocean. Journ. Geol. Soc., II, 1846, pp. 26-30. On the Geology of the Falkland Islands. Journ. Geol. Soc., II, 1846, pp. 267-274. On the Transportal of Erratic Boulders from a Lower to a Higher Level. Jour. Geol. Soc., IV, 1848, pp. 315-323. [Geological Instructions, in Admiralty Manual of Scientific Instructions. Edited by Sir J. Herschel. 8vo. London, 1849. ] On British Fossil Lepadide. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. London, VI, 1850, pp. 439-440. 7 98 + 1851. 1851. 1851. 1854. 1854. 1855. 1857. 1858. 1858. 1859. 1859. 1862. 1862. 1862. BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. A Monograph of the Fossil Lepadide, or Pedunculated Cirripedes of Great Britain. London. Printed for the Paleontographical Society, 1851. 4to. A Monograph of the Sub-Class Cirripedia, with Figures of All the Spe- cies. The Lepadide; or, Pedunculated Cirripedes. London, printed for the Ray Society, 1851. 8vo. Analogy of the Structure of some Volcanic Rocks with that of Glaciers. Edinburgh Proc. Roy. Soc., II, 1851, pp. 17-18. A Monograph on the Fossil Balanidze and Verrucide of Great Britain. London, printed for the Paleontographical Society, 1854. 4to. A Monograph of the sub-Class Cirripedia, with Figures of All the Spe- cies. The Balanide, (or Sessile Cirripedes); the Verrucide, etc., etc., etc. Printed for the Ray Society, 1854. 8vo. On the power of icebergs to make rectilinear uniformly-directed grooves across a sub-marine undulatory surface. Phil. Mag., X, 1855, pp. 96-98. On the action of Sea-water on the germination of Seeds. Journ. Linn. Soc., I, 1857, (Botany,) pp. 130-140. On the Agency of Bees in the Fertilization of Papilionaceous Flowers, and on the crossing of Kidney Beans. Gardeners’ Chronicle, Nov. 13, 1858: Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 3d series, 1858, pp. 459-465. Darwin, Charles and Wallace, Alfred. On the Tendency of Species to Form Varieties, and on the Perpetuation of Varieties and Species by Natural Means of Selection. Journal Proc. Linn. Soc., London, ITI, 1858, pp. 45-62. On the variation of organic beings in a state of nature; on the natural means of selection; on the comparison of domestic races and true species. Journ. Linn. Soce., ITI, (Zoology,) 1859, pp. 46-53: Halle. Zeitsch. Gesell. Naty XVI, 1860, pp. 425-459. On the Origin of Species by Means of Natural Selection, or the Preserva- tion of Favoured Races in oe Struggle for Life. 8vo. London, 1859. On the Two Forms, or Dimorphic Condition, in the species of Primula, and on their remarkable Sexual Relations. Journ. Linn. Soe., VI, 1862, (Botany) pp. 151-157. On the three remarkable sexual forms of Catasetum tridentatum, an . Orchid in the possession of the Linnean Society. Journ. Linn. Soc., 1862, (Botany,) pp. 151-157. On the Various Contrivances by which British and Foreign Orchids. are: Fertilized by Insects. 8vo. London, 1862. 1863. 1863. 1863. 1863. 1864. 1867. 1867. 1867. 1868. 1869. 13870. 1871. 1872. 1874. 1875. 1876. 1876. 1876. 1877. DARWIN MEMORIAL. «99 Observation sur I’hétéromorphisme des fleurs, et des conséquences pour ° la fécondation. Ann. Sci. Nat., XIX, 1863, (Botany,) pp. 204-255, On the thickness of the Pampean formation near Buenos Ayres. Journ. Geol. Soc., XLX, 1863, pp. 68-71. On the existence of two forms, and on their reciprocal sexual relation, in several species of the genus Linum. Journ. Linn. Soc., VII, 1863, (Botany,) pp. 69-83. On the so-called “Auditory Sac” of Cirripedes. Nat. Hist. Review, 1863, pp. 115-116. On the Sexual Relations of the Three Forms of Lythrum. Journ. Linn. Soc.. Vol. VIII, 1864, p. 169. On the Character and Hybrid-like Nature of the Illegitimate Offspring of Dimorphic and Trimorphic Plants. Jour. Linn. Soc., Vol. X, 1867, (Bot.,) p. 393. On the specific difference between Primula veris and P. vulgaris; and on the Hybrid Nature of the Common Oxslip. Jour. Linn. Soc., Vol. X, 1867, (Kotany,) p. 437. Queries about Expression for Anthropological Inquiry. Report, Smithsonian Institution, 1867, p. 324. The Variation of Animals and Plants under Domestication. 2 vols., 8vo. London, 1868. Notes on the Fertilization of Orchids. Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 4th series, IV, 1869, pp. 141-159. Note on the Habits of the Pampas Woodpecker ( Colaptes campestris.) Proe. Zool. Soc., London, 1870, pp. 705, 706. The Descent of Man, and Selection in relation to Sex. 2 vols., 16mo. London, 1871. The Expression of the Emotions in Man and Animals. t2mo. London, 1872. ! Flowers of the Primrose destroyed by Birds. Nature, X, 1874, pp. 24, 25. Insectivorous Plants. 8vo. London, 1875. Effects of Cross and Self-Fertilization in the Animal Kingdom. Movements and Habits of Climbing Plants. 8vo. London, 1876. . Sexual Selection in relation to Monkeys. Nature, XV, 1876, pp. 18, 19. The Different Forms of Flowers on Plants of the same Species. 8vo. - London, 1877. 100 1877. 1877. 1877. 1878. 1879. 1879. 1879. 1880. 1880. 1880. 1880. 1880, 1881. 1881. 1881. 1881. 1881. 1881. 1881. BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. [Testimonial to Mr. Darwin. Evolution in the Netherlands.] Nature, XV, 1877, pp. 410-412. Letter of Mr. Darwin. The Contractile Filaments of the Teasel. Nature, XVI, 1877, p. 339. A Biographical Sketch of an Infant. Mind, II, (No. 7, July, 1877,) pp. 285-294. Transplantation of Shells. Nature, XVIII, p. 120. Fritz Miiller on a Frog having Eggs on its Back; On the Abortion of the Hairs on the Legs of certain Caddis Flies, &c. Nature, XIX, 1879, pp. 462-464. Rats and Water Casks. Nature, XIX, 1879, p. 481. Erasmus Darwin. By Ernst Krause. Translated by W. S. Dallas. With a preliminary notice by Charles Darwin. 8vo. -. London, 1879. Fertility of Hybrids from the Common and Chinese Goose. Nature, X XI, 1880, p. 207. The Sexual Colors of certain Butterflies. Nature, X XI, 1880, p. 237. The Omari Shell Mounds. Nature, X XI, 1880, pp. 561, 562. Sir Wyville Thomson on Natural Selection. Nature, XXIII, 1880, p. 32. Black Sheep. Nature, XXIII, 1880, p. 193. The Power of Movement in Plants. By Charles Darwin, LL. D., as- sisted by Francis Darwin. 8vo. London, 1881. Movements of Plants. Nature, XXIII, 1881, p. 409. Mr. Darwin on Vivisection. Nature, X XIII, 1881, p. 583. The Movements of Leaves. Nature, XXIII. 1881, p. 603. Inheritance. Nature, XXIV, 1881, p. 257. Leaves Injured at Night by Free Radiation. Nature, XXIV, 1881, p. 459. [On the Bodily and Mental Development of Infants. ] Nature, XXIV, 1881, p. 565. 1881. 1881. 1882. 1882. DARWIN MEMORIAL. 101 The Parasitic Habits of Molothrus. Nature, XXV, 1881, pp. 51-52. The Formation of Vegetable Mould through the action of worms, with observations on their habits. With illustrations. t2mo. London, 1881. The Action of Carbonate of Ammonia on the Roots of certain Plants, and on Chlorophyll Bodies. Jour. Linn. Soc., London, X ? 1881, p. ?: Abstract in Nature, X XV, 1882, pp. On the Dispersal of Freshwater Bivalves. Nature, X XV, 1882, pp. 529-530. APPENDIX. THE PROPER USE OF THE TERM BIOLOGY.* By THEODORE GILL. From the Presidential Address delivered Fanuary 28, 1881. The father of modern natural history, following in the footsteps of his prede- cessors, recognized three kingdoms of nature, and allowed them equal rank in his scheme of classification. These were severally the subjects of the sciences designated as mineralogy, botany, and zoology. The contrasts between the char- acteristics of the first and the last two, and the generalities which have since compelled us to employ a term in common for botany and zoology, were not then appreciated. The same method and the same system of terminology were used __ by Linnzus for the description of the mineral as for the vegetable and animal /; kingdoms. Nevertheless suggestions had been made still earlier towards a segre- gation under a common head of the kingdoms of organic nature. As early as 1587, Cristofle de Savigny, in a scarce and little-known work (Tableaux accomplis de tous les arts libéraux, Paris,) contrasted the organic kingdoms under a common denominator, psychologie, now universally accepted with a very different signification. The suggestion in question, however, fell still born. It was not till 1802 and 1803 that a term destined to general adoption “was proposed. Then the illustrious Lamarck made use of the word BIOLoGIE as a common name under which to consider the phenomena presented by organic nature. A number of words were subsequently urged as substitutes and as better, ¢. g., Somiologie by Rafinesque, in 1814; Physigue Organique by Comte, in 1830; Organomie by d’Omalius d’ Halloy, in 1838; Zoologie by Jean Reynaud, in 1843; Organologie by Gerdy,in 1844; and, lastly, Zoonomy by Baden Powell. None of them, however, have been received with favor, and, slowly at first, afterward by general consent, BIOLOGY was accepted as a term much needed “to group the many generalities enunciable respecting animals and plants. The old professorships of natural history or of zoology and botany combined are now being replaced by professorships of biology, and almost pari passu with cxces- sive (because exclusive) cultivation of special departments of botany and zoology has been a tendency to combine on common ground to consider the general laws and principles affecting alike the organic kingdoms of nature, and by students agreeing in the method which they employ in their several pursuits. As a result of this feeling has been born the BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. * Much discussion having attended the consideration of a name for the “ Biological Society of Washington ” the subject was treated of in the first presidential address, and that portion thereof relating to the question at issue is here reproduced. 102 USE OF THE TERM BIOLOGY. 103 The applicability of the term biology, in the sense now so generally accorded to it, is doubtless debatable, and has been strongly objected to by an eminent scholar, Baden Powell. That gentleman, in the first essay of his “‘ Order of Na- ture,” (2 4, p. 173, note,) while discussing the “Theory of Life” and “Life in Geological Epoch,” has uttered a protest against the use of the word in the fol- lowing terms: : “While on this subject I cannot omit to take this occasion of recording my protest against the now prevalent, but barbarous use of the term ‘Biology.’ Bios never means ‘life’ in the sense of ‘vitality;’ it means the ‘life’ of a man as progressing in ¢#me—his birth, actions, and death. Plato has ‘Pto¢g €wi-,’ the lifetime of alife. _(Epinomis, [or the Philosopher,] 982.) Unfortunately the term ‘ Zoology,’ which would be the proper one for this branch of science, has been already appropriated to what ought to have been called ‘Zoography;’ but there is still ‘Zoonomy,’ the science of the laws of life, open to adoption, and, at any rate, much better than ‘ézo/ogy,’ which, if it means anything, would be a theory of the facts of dzography.” * On the other hand, a still more eminent and probably better scholar in Greek philology, William Whewell, has preferred the term biology to any other. In his ‘‘ History of Scientific Ideas,” under the caption of * The Philosophy of Biology,” (Vol. 2, p. 170,) he urges that “the word Physiology, by which they [that is, to use again his own words, ‘the organical sciences’] have most commonly been described, means the science of nature ; and though it would be easy to explain, by reference to history, the train of thought by which the word was latterly re- stricted to Hiving nature, it is plain that the name is, etymologically speaking, loose and improper. The term dzo/ogy, which means exactly what we mean to express, the science of life, has often been used, and has of late become not un- common among good writers.” It may be added that the word floc, although doubtless generally used in the sense of lifetime, as urged by Baden Powell, nevertheless does not appear to have been limited to such meaning, but to have had practically the same range as our word life. Even if it were so limited, however, it would be eminently appropriate from the standpoint from which all scientific students of nature now take view, for it is the lifetime of nature and the questions of how organisms have been evolved and how grown and developed that must interest the students of life, plants and animals, as well as those organisms neither plants nor animals that for- merly existed and still survive. It is in fact the sum of those phenomena which may be aptly described as con- stituting the lifetime of nature that forms the true aim of what may, with the strictest and exact propriety, be called BioLocy. The word seems to have been also used quite generally by entomologists in a very restricted sense; that is, as a common denominator for whatever relates to the special habits and manners of insects in contradistinction to Physiology. Thus Hagen, in his Bibliotheca Entomologica, (1863,) groups all entomological * Powell, Order of Nature, Essay 1, 2 4, p. 172, note, Theory of Life. 104 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. treatises under eight categories, viz: (1) Accessories and Generals; (2) Genera Entomology; (3) Special Entomology, z. ¢., the subordinate groups, orders, etc. (4) Anatomy; (5) Physiology; (6) Biology; (7) Benefits from Insects; and (8) Injuries from Insects. This summary will give some idea of what entomologists intend by the word, and the original sense of the word, as indicated by Plato in the connection already indicated, might be used as an argument in justification. There would, indeed, be no strong objection to the use of the word to signify a study of habits had it not been abready, by general consent, used in another sense. Our well considered rules, as well in zoology as in botany, that priority determines the use of a name, and that the same name cannot be well used in two different senses, combine with the universal consecration of the term otherwise, to forbid us to use it in the limited sense indicated. ALPHABETICAL INDEX. A. Page. Academy of Sciences, Washington............ 40, 42 Accounts, auditing 22 Address, presidential 22, 26, 36 Agassiz, Mr. Alexander 9 Ageronia feronia 73 BIBS soos cise 25 Allen, Dr. Harrison 36 Allen, Mr. J.A 9 Amendments to the Constitution 23 Ampelopsis quinquefolia 28 76 30 Angreecum sesquipedale Animals, Mortality of. Animals, Well Known 39 Anthropology, French, School of..............00 . 40 Anthropolegy, What is. ; 38 Anthropological Socicty.......... 5, 36, 37, 41, 42, 43 Anthropologists in Biology 35 Appalachian Mountains, Contrasts of........... 38 Arrearages 22 Arrearages, penalty for 24 Arteries, Ramifications of the.............ceeeeee - 40 Ashford, Dr. F. A 11 Assessments, collection of 22 B. Baird, Prof. S. F....... 5, 9, 36 Baker, Dr. Frank 11, 30, 40 _ Baker on Ramifications of Arteries............. - 40 Baker on Darwin's Expression of Emotions 87 Ballots, count of. 22 Barker, Mr. J.S 1l Barnard, Dr. Wm. S$ ll Bats, suctorial organs of. 28 Bean, Dr. Tarleton I 11, 25, 35, 44 Bean, Voyage to Alaska and Siberia.............. 25 Bean on Spoonbill Sandpiper 44 Bessels, Dr. Emil ll Beyer, Dr. H.G li Bibliography, Darwinian 92 Billings, Dr. John S 11, 42 Biology, Anthropologists In 35 Biology, Use of Term 102 Biology, Zufii 41 Birney, Mr. 1. I 11, 30 Birney, General William 1l, 44 Blepharocera 28 Blish, Mr. J. B 11 Blood corpusoles, di d 27 Page. Botanist, Darwin as a. 81 - Bransford, Dr. J. F 11 Brewer, Prof. W. H 9, 39 Brewster, Mr. Wm 9 Broea, Paul 40 Brooks, Dr. W. K 9 Brown, Mr. J. T. 11 Brown, Mr.S. C 12 Burdick, Mr. E. A i2 Burnett, Dr. Swan M 14, 41 Burnett on “* How we See”’ 41 Busey, Dr. 8S. C 12 Business, miscellaneous 23 Cc. Canby, Mr. W. J. 12 Carman, Dr. M. A. 12 Cassia chamecrista 28 Chase, Mr. H.S 12 Chiasmodontida. 35 Chickering, Prof. J. W...... 12, 25, 28, 35, 38, 39, 42 Chickering, Mr. J. J 12 Chiasmodus niger. 35 Chickering on Appalachian Mountains......... 38 Chickering on Roan Mountain and its flora. 28 Christie, Mr. A. S 12 Chrysemys picta 32 Cicada, the Periodical 32 Clark, Mr. A. H 12, 30 Clupea sapidissima.., : 33 Collett, Dr. Robert 9 Collins, Captain J. W 12, 32 Collins on the Mackerel Fishery.................. 32 Committees, appointment of ................2. cee 21 Committees, reports of...... 23 Comstock, Prof. J. H 12, 25, 30, 81 Comstock on Seale Insects 31 Conant, Mr. W. P 12 Constitution 21-23 Constitution, adoption of. 25 Constitution, amendments to 23 Constitution, amendments propsed by Baker 39 Constitution, Committee on 24 Correspondence, conduct of. 22 Coryyualis cornutus 28 Coues, Dr. Elliott 12, 36, 37, 38 Coues on Advances in Ornithology............. 38 Council, list of. 7 Council, composition of........ al 105 106 Page. Council, duties of 22 Council, Minutes Of...........cceeeseceeeesteeseseeeeeeees 22 Council, presiding OfMCEL..............+seeeerreeeees eee Council, quorum of....... cccdeas iodo wadiceasoseakos exp hue 21 Cox, Mr. W. V seeseceescnsenece 13 Cretaceous Beds of Maryland............ceeeeeees 38 Cushing on Zufli BiolOgy.......ceceersreercerees 41 D. Dale, Dr. F. C pESS SUS 3 13 Dall, Prof. William H 13, 29, 40, 44 Dall, Biography of Darwin..........ccseseecerees 56-59 Dall on Deep-Sea Explorations...............ss00 40 Dall on mollusks of Dist. Columbia............... 44 Danias archippus 79 Darwinian Bibliography............sseeeeseceeees . 92-101 Darwin, Biography of. 56-59 Darwin as a Botanist....... 81 Darwin’s Contributions to Philosophy....... 60-70 Darwin on Expression of Emotion 87 Darwin Memorial Meeting...............e00+ 40, 43, 45 Darwin, Mrs. Heideman’s bust of...............+. 43 Darwin, The Doctrine of............. 47-55 Darwin, Ulke’s portrait Of............:ccecsseeeeeeeeee 43 PUGS PPOL EAs Oi sayrcsshoovessasshesdasnspsmeacousengibess 13 De Haas, Dr. Wills 13 Deep-Sea Explorations...... 40 Boer, POE, TD, Aicccceovins cs sexdisinevensdsenceusosen seein 9 Dewey, Dr. F. P 13 Disbursements 22 PISO icsskeycniccraesssvnstecobs 23 District of Columbia, flora Of...............cseeee 26, 31 District of Columbia, mollusks of..............06 44 Dodge, Mr. C. R 13 TL FRE Ta est ck che cps tohinansrxene sive 13 ons o sss ncceassecdcannboonccebessedehonuais 76 Dutton, Captain C. E 24 ' EB. Earll, Mr. R. E 13, 30, 34 Elliott, Mr. Henry W............:....esee0 13, 33, 36, 37 Elliott on Arctic Sea-cow 36, 37 BATIOUS OE OBO OT i csisicincneccseseosssontssscdutecese 33 Ellzey, Dr. M. G 13, 44 Ellzey on Mules 44 Emotions, Expression Of..........cccccccssssseeeeeeee 87 Eurynorhynchus pygmeeus 44 Evolution, anthropologic............ccccsscessesceeees 67 Evolution, biologic 67 Evolution, physical 67 Exhibition of specimens 23 Explorations, Deep-Sea 40 Expression of Emotions 87 as Farlow, Prof. Wm. G 9 Fee, annual 23 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Page. Fee, initiation............ccsesesecesreres 23 Fees, collection Of,............cee++ 22 Ferguson, Major T. B..........ssssscsecssseressseseneees 13 Finances, direction Of..........ccsscceseeeeesseeeeceeees 22 Fish Commission, explorations Of..........00. 34 “Mish Hawk,” steamer.........:s0ssececensussesansets 34 Fish mortality 30 Fishes, Giinther’s Study Of.........scccccccsceeceeee 29 Fishery, Mackerel 32 BISCCHOP DP: HOUCTE, <sccesecvcesscasassocsuacees 18, 30, 40 Fletcher on Paul Broca 40 Flint, Dr. J. M 18, 30 ROMY ECOG LING OIGEIG Sc cisiucetecessisevestyesesunssesneass 26 Flora of District of Columbia. 31 Flora of Roan Mountain .............c.ccccceceeeeese «28 Foreman, Dr. E........:.-..ceses. 13 Foreman on Cretaceous Beds of Maryland... 38 WOUM GOL ie cesscicdacelecasascieossacasases Soeees il G. Garrett, Mr. L. M............ 14 Gannett, Mr. Henry 14 Gedney, Mr. C. D 14 GQOOtroPisM ioii.c. wesscseccesedessoseses 83, 85 Giglioli, Dr. E. H 10 Gihon, Dr. A. L 14, 39 Gilbert, Mr. Charles H. 26 Gilbert, Mr. G. K 14, 39 Gill, Prof. Theodore...... 14, 24, 25, 28, 29, 30, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 41, 42, 43, 47 Gill, Principles of Biology.... 26 Gill on Use of term Biology 102 Gill on Darwin 47-55 Gill on Views of Nature 3T Gill on Great-Swallower 35 Gill on Giinther’s Study of Fishes 29 Gill on History of Classification 36 Gill on Suctorialism in Marsupiates.............. 28 Glass snake 85 Goode, Mr. G. Brown...... 3, 7, 14, 24, 25, 29, 30, 32, 34, 35, 37, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44 Goode on the Mackerel 32 Goode on Statistics of Societies of Washing- ton 43 Goode on Taxidermy 40 Gore, Prof. J. H 14, 30 Gray, Prof. Asa 10, 95 Great plains, absence of trees 34 Griffith, Dr. S. H 14 Grimm, Prof. Oscar von . 10 Growth, retardation of. 34 Giinther, Dr. A.C. G 35 Giinther’s study of fishes 29 H. Hammond, Dr. William A 36 Hassler, Dr. F. A 14 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. Page Hawes, Dr. George W 14, 30 Hawes, Dr. George W., death of. 14 FES WwKOG DOW hpi ccc tivcasnstevpctes codecs anes eae et & Hayden, Mr. E. E 14 Hayden, Di, FeV viecsscsseissesrssieedecsaons 36 Heideman, Mrs. Mica............... Bes ceanuchepkiakeoaae 43 TROLIGtRO DESI. ciinsisedsccdecesasusantecdscsdevecebececse 83, 85 Henshaw, Mr. H. W 15 Hessel, Dr. R 15 High Island 30 Hoffman, Dr. W. J 15, 30 Hog, Tape-worm from 32 Hooker, Sir Joseph D 72 Hornaday, Mr. W. T 15 Hough, Dr. F. B Sieiialal 15 Houeh, Mr. Mi Be Wischmann dine 15 Howard, Mr. L. O 15, 30 FEW WO BOG oii ovine ntcciniasassbsancsoessseas evens scbwas 41 Howland, Dre Bo Pais i iiiedeceviescans 15 Hyatt, Prof. A...... 10 Hypotheses, Working. ........scsccesecsesenesessecesenes 67 I. Ingersoll, Mr. Ernest. 15, 24, 30 Ingersoll on Mortality of Marine Animals.... 30 Insects, SCAG... ccsccccvcseccete csonse 31 TEEPORMUCEORT NOC siséiccsccacevotsseccccscosesssese sense rich J. Jabirandi, Physiological Action of............... Nae | SODMBON, Mire As Besser silsiscucss si gnaacpieuptaasscaces 15 Johnson, Mr. B. F 15 Johnson, Dr. J. T 15 Jordan, Prof. D.S 26 Jordan on Salmon of the Pacific Coast.......... 26 Jouy, Mr. P. L 15 K. Kennicott, Dr. Robert. aang icannee eee Kerguelen’s Land 72 Kidder, Dr. J. H 15, 25, 27, 35, 72 Kidder on External Air of Washington........ 27 King. DroAs FP: Accticniiectans 7, 15, 25, 28, 30, 39 King, Septenary Periodicity...: 28 Koebele, Mr. A 16 L. Lamarck .... 49 Lamphyrus occidentalis 73 Lawrence, Mr. Geo. N panei Lectures, Saturday 37 LiOG, DIR. Wi icickivscccinsictrcocichspnconseGieatebeuen - 16 TLGWNG, BARS Dinas restos ticccscuces 16 Page Lehnert, Rev. E....... washes ssakes ubeki ebese cae dcbus sacs Limenitis disippus............ 79 Locusts 32 M. McDonald, Col. M 16, 28, 32, 34 McDonald on Experimentsin Fish Culture. 32 McDonald on Periodicity in Development... 28 McDonald on Shad in Conflnement.......... osvee Oe MeMurtrie, Dr. Wm 16 Mackerel 32 Mallory, Col. Garrick 42 Mann, Mr. B. P 16 Mirsh, Mr. C. C 16 Marsupiates, Suctorial Powers of................6 28 Martin, Mr. Frank....... 16 Marx, George 16, 30 Mason, 0. T 7, 16, 25, 30, 35, 43 Mason on What is Anthropology............. essere BO Mason on Anthropologists in Biology........... 35 Matthews, Patriokiicsscceesesicacdccsocecevsosvssevecass + 650 Meek, F. B 36 Meeting, annual.................. Fa ADE EP Te tong 22 Meeting, first annual 26 Meeting, second annual..................c0ccsseeccneee 35 Meeting for organization...............sccsssseseseees 24 Meeting, preliminary..............cccsccscccsosecsesessss 2A PRCOU DBE, TONG ca cicccascsecscsdssécissensscivcedgnctson 23, 30 Meeting, notice of. 22 Meetings, special 23 ROOT; BORGO oi oias scivsnevececnvessecescssascenssaetorees 22 Member, original tsas il Members, active, list of. 11-20 Members, balloting for 23 Members, classification of. 21 Members, corresponding, list Of............. 2200 9,10 Members, election of...................+6 21 Members, honorary, list of..................eseees oe PEOMDOIMT, WOMB O68 ois alec sc esl esccccs sasecs cevups 44 Membership, nominations for.................+ 22, 28 Membership, proposals fOr.............0.ssecee sees 21 Merrill, Mr. George P. 16-30 Mesmerism in animals..................sceesecseeeees . 3 MEXICO. GRIDGE, cc csareccoscsosnsvsvvabssnsivccescsdu vases 30 Micrococcus septicus. 31 MiGroqOme, PrOOSIN eG, -vicccciieccesseccsrscoccsunencoes 33 Miller, Mr. Benj 16 Miner, Mr. R. H 16 Minutes of proceedingS..........0.cccecceseserereeeees 22 Minutes, reading of 23 Molluscan fauna Of D. C.....ccccsceccseeeeceeeeeceeees 44 Mollusks, Antiquity and Extinction of......... 34 Morse, Prof. Edward S 10 Miiller, Fritz 76 Miller, Herman 76 Mules hossoes ae Mythology 61 108 W. Page. Name of the Society 21, 24, 102 Nares, Sir George S..........secccressseaee 40 National Museum......... 26, 27, 30, 31, 35, 37, 40, 44 Nature, Scientific and Popular Views of....... 37 PRION ETFS. WU Gis ci cocvonce spesas opcasbaes vat accaen 16 Newberry, Prof. J.S 36 Norris, Dr. Basil... 16 O. Object of the Society...... 21 Odontoscelis Darwinl..... .ccesackcacsnssossassscesens 71 Meee se os al can sauce nhidionsceheeatunsains 7 Officers, classification Of ..........cccssssescessseecees 21 Oicers, election of. jcc<c.)scajcscjvestndeh cts 22. 23 Officers for 1880 25 Officers for 1881 26 Officers for 1882 pear cakeneaea 35 Officers, term OF ‘OffICe............ccccaccesesscenvsacoses 22 Opalization 33 OpheOosaurus VOnLralas, oa cecistenvecwidqcenessosssouses 35 Bader OF HUBTONE 5555s csecerpeyrbsadddadenvscynens 23 Order of business, suspension Of..............00 23 Ornithology, advances 1N%.2... 5.55055 deesdeesesvctes 38 Osten Sacken, Baron R. VON... ..sscccessecesceeses 36 F. Packard, A. S., Jr : 10 Papers, reading and discussion of.............. 21.23 Patagonia, insect fauna Of........60cccccscssesensesee 71 MU TIAN Bai sisess Ciaweaentensneok 17, 24, 28, 30 INE TOA Bess iocevcescesyocseonnsnchassuencassongites - 36 POPMONAG iT cis edcs Sosescs 17, 30 Periodicity, laws of............... 28 Periodicity, Septenary 28 Petrifaction bieedavictuve 33 Phenomena, anthropologic, categories of..... 66 Phenomena, biologic, categories Of...........20 66 Phenomena, classification of. 66 Phenomena, physical, categories oOf.............. 66 Philosophy, classification of. 61 Philosophy, definition of..........ccccsccsccccosceoees 60 Philosophy, mMetaphysic........cceccscsceseccoesscacees 62 PHUNOBOPNY, BOLON EITC oo iocvcs bs ose seknadbbkewununte 63 Philosophical Society...........cccecesccees 36, 41, 42, PHOLOMICPORTADNS, 66055555. ccncsesiacncvedleveniien 27, 31 Pilocarpus pinnatifolius.............cccsesdsecscdaeda 31 Polymorphism, animal 41 Porter, Dr. J. H... 17 Potomac Side Naturalist’s Club 86 Pourtales, Count L. F. De 36 Powell, Rev. Baden cisicicdicecssesicscasdsccecek 50, 53 Powell, Major J. W........cc.cce0e. 17, 37, 39, 42, 43, 60 Powell on Darwin’s Contribution to Philoso- _ phy 60-70 Powell, Introduction to Saturday Lectures... 37 Powell on Sociology 39 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Page. Prehension, suctorial...... 27 Prentice’on Jabirandl......0.....csscssccsencaniesiseens 31 Prentiss, Dr. D. W..... 7, 17, 28, 30, 31 35, 36, 38, 44 Prentiss on Mesmerism in Animals 38 President, duties of 22 President, retiring ..... 22 Presidential a:idress............. 22 Presidential address for 1881 26 Presidential address for 1882...........sscccesceeses 36 Proceedings, printing of ....:::..2..:..secccesseansers 44 Proceedings of the Society............cecseesesees 24-44 Programme, provision for 2 Pronuba. 27, 80 ROE Bs sas iauy concn vascuedy sadasasceees cuts covare 27 RMON aos a ccc seveusatn acess 33 Pusa lutris ... 33 Q. Quorum baaxoasesnen. ak R. Rabbits, Septiceemia in 29 Rathbun, Mr. Richard.....3, 7, 17, 24, 25, 29, 30, 34, 35, 42, 44 Rathbun on Explorations of Fish Commis- sion senanpseceserbesvashwathesee 34 BAA 5 EAR MODI Ge cuceinch sScievcaacckeri ss» danas vnesuiae at Renilla, Embryology of. 41 Retardation Of Growth .civiscccsiscssecsscsevedvcvacsas 34 BOY RUTH, DE BODO i Gs oiicgaiesisns tethiedas sted pees 17 Rhytina Stelleri.............. cee Pilicas eRiavdere 36, 37 RICHGY, DG Fh. Ons scacsecessigeiisccs Steacieccoscasodscsons 17 Ridgway, Robert 17, 25, 30, 32, 35 Ridgway On THrkeye i. cisccecccsccccesscivesiccese cases 32 Riley, Prof. C. V..17, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 34, 35, 39, 41, 42, 43, 44, 70, 79, 80 Riley on Darwin in Entomology..........ece00 10-77 Riley, Facts about Animals............c00ccsscsdecees 39 Riley, Fertilization of Yueca...........s...sescesees 27 Riley, Reminiscences of Darwin............ec008 77 Riley on Retardation of Growth ............0cc00 . 34 FI GY OR EeOCHSGR os cioicess oss scvess os suateiwabeceandanns 32 Riley on Scale [nsects...,........0.c0seseeessevesecovens 31 Riley on Suckers of the Helgramite, ete...... 23 Roan Mountain and its Flora.....i...cc.ccscessesee 28 Russell, Mr. I. C...:..... 17 Ryder, Mr. John A 17, 33 Ryder on Development of Shad................008 33 Ss. Salmon of :Pacifle Coast. isis sccccsiscssseevisiicssesese 26 Sandpiper, Spoonbilled 44 Saturday Lectures De a plate ee 37 Seale insects 31 Schaeffer, E. M 17, 33 Sch6nborn, Mr. H 17 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. Page. Schuerman, Mr. C. W 17, 30 Schwartz, Mr. E.A 18, 30 Science, definition of. 64 Sendder, Mr. C. W, 18, 30 Scenddery Mr. Ni Pivsccescicescevesse . 18, 28, 30, 32, 40 €&2udder on Breeding of Tortoise 32 Sea-cow, Arctic 36, 37 Seaton, Hon. C. W 18 Seaman, Profs We Ei sccccecccssecakencssaccstaesee 18, 30, 31 Sea-otter 33 Sections, chairman of. 29 Sections, formation Of.......cu..scccecceceessesecees 22, 29 Seeley, Col. F. A 43 Saptenary: Periodiolty 0.05 isnescseseonsnsseoscsrnaas 28 Shad, Eggs of. 33 Shad in Confinement 34 Sheldon, Mr. C.8 18, 30 Shufeldt, Dr. R. W ...... 18, 35 Shufeldt on Glass Snake............cccceeeceseeecceees 35 Shute, Mr. D. K 18 Siberia 25, 44 Simulium, sp 28 Smiley, C. W 18, 30 OTST PTO, By Dis, cask ssc csaces code ox tarnaasanu niaaaaee 10 Seek. BEG. We eisai h ea ees 18 Smithsonian Institution, Secretary of.......... 5 Sociology, Outlines of 39 SOLAN UM POSCTACUII ionisccs cescccccessoovessncsosnessenwe 28 Specimens, exhibition Of................2ccceeeseeeee 33 po yen 1 gy Seneann OH GOERS RODD ARG eE PME PEED ORO 18 Sternberg, Dr. George M..............008 18, 29, 30, 31 Sternberg on micrococcus 31 Sternberg on Septiceemia... 29 Stevenson, Mr. James.............0..0006 18 Bi hareereta | WE. Ws os cae cavesy cc snkcin ones hkcws don vais 18 Sr Ge, TPR 0. EE ccase uasasth dds nest pncdbeed cacthnahine 18 PULOKOTS OF DOB, oo iciccecdsiivrcdcrstiasepeuniertions 28 Suckley, Dr. George 36 Suctorial Prehemsion...........c00.sccesscooessesescenese 27 og Paylor, BS. We occas vocsectascpcdavevatsab ia hisie conde smc 19 Taylor, Dr. Thomas 19, 30, 31, 33 Taylor, Dr. William B 42 Taylor on Freezing Microtome 33 Taylor on Tape-worm from Hog 32 Tape-worm from Hog 32 Faxidermie Sill Bxiissaiecs tasbaekiciia 40 Taxonomy 26 Terra del Fuego, insect fauna Of...........000.008 Sas 3 | Thom peon, Dr. J. FOr 2c. ssicccscics cacccsvccesurcoced 19 Todd, Prof. J. E 19, 28 Todd on Flowering of Solanum, etc............. Ae Toner, Dr. J. M 19 Tortoise, painted............... see. OS Tortoises, Land, of North America............. 35 Page. Treasurer, duties of. 22 Trees, Absence on Great Plains ..........000.se00 . 34 . True, Mr. Frederick W.... 19, 24, 27, 30, 32, 35, 36, 37, 39, 44 True, Darwinian bibliography. 92 True on Arctic Sea-cow, 36, 37 True on Land Tortoises 35 True on Suctorial Prehension in Animals..... 27 True on Siren lacertina 36 True on Zoologischer Jahresbericht............ - 32 Turkeys, wild and domesticated 32 Turner, Mr. L. M 19 U. Ulke, Mr. Henry........... 19, 25, 30, 34, 35, 36, 43, 44 Upham, Mr. E. P. + ae ¥. Vasey, Dr. George..............s0000 7, 19, 24, 25, 30, 35 Velie, Dr. J. W 10 Verrill, Prof. A. E 10 WEBTEOS OF CYeOMbiONs iiss icésseksnassnersnsocepeasan 40, 50 Vice-President, duties of. 22 WO OP REIIORS OS ciicscisvedisnscnncncthanscassscsuuctegasy 23 w. Walsh, Mr. Benjamin Dann 70 Ward, Prof. Lester F...... 3, 7, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30» $1, 34, 35, 36, 38, 39, 42, 44 Ward on Darwin as a Botanist 81 Ward, Exhibition of Petrifaction 33 Ward on Flora Columbiane of 1830 and 1880.. 26 Ward, statistics of flora of D. C 31 Ward on Trees on Great Plains ............5...0008 34 Washington, external air of. 27 Washington, scientific societies of........ 36, 40, 41 Waterhouse, Ge Beiicas ciiciniisccsivoncoyscsuarcsasencegs 71 Watson, Sereno 10 Weir, Dr. J. Jenner 77 Welling, Dr. James C - 42 Wells, Dr. W. C 50 White, Dr. C. A 19, 26, 27, 34 White, Mr. M. P 19 White on Antiquity and Extinction of Mol- lusks 34 White on Collection of Fossils 27 Wilder, Prof. Burt G 36 Williams, Mr. A 19, 30 Wilson, Mr. J. M 20 Wilson, Dr. Edmund B 10, 41 Wilson on Renilla 41 Winslow, Mr. F 26 Wolfley, Mr. W. J 20, 30, 39 Women, admission of. 44. 110 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. <=; Page. Yarnall, Dr. J. H 20 Yarrow, Dr. H. © 20 PSU ET Wy Pocchcs cbanedascacsessanevenscocvagceruasucaces 20 Yellow fever 27 Yucca, fertilzation of. 27 Z. Zoological Record Zoologischer Jahresbericht Zoology, classification in Zumbrock, Dr. A Zufii biology Peters eseresssoees PROCEEDINGS OF THE . BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. PUBLISHED WITH THE CO-OPERATION OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. VouumME II. JuLy 1, 1882, To JULY 1, 1884. WASHINGTON: PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY. 1885. ery Bet oe Per, ses. ot le PUBLICATION COMMITTEE. RICHARD RATHBUN. ROMYN HITCHCOCK. CHARLES V. RILEY. WILLIAM H. SEAMAN., WILLIAM H. DALL. HENRY G. BEYER. Naat ya Paps RAMS Soe Roe MAS fea ees oe] Pek ved Rises ei! rs CONTENTS. Officers and Council elected January, 1884 -------- Standing’ Committees, 1884 -----...-- ---- ---- Laas Sedat List of Members, January. 25, 188¢. < oon ccs cee eon <3 ee wien Additional List of Members, corrected to July 1, 1884 ---------------- CORRE 5 icceccce <tincl pobee steely 4 sieseeibennieeesed Waller icine ec ches vi ommin iwi caters Proceedings, October 13, 1882, to May 31, 1884 —---~.. ...-. .--. -—_. ---- Addresses and communications ...--. Nic dah paises bk eaten The Principles of Zoogeography, Annual Address of the President, Theo- adore Gil; January LOU O0$ 5 So scp ae tpetee wpe emmin megan hicmalie Certain phases in the geological history of the North American Continent, biologically considered, Annual Address of the President, Charles A. White, January 25, 1884---_---_-- Notes on North American Psyllide, C. V. Riley (April 10, 1884 *) ----- Remarks on the bag-worm, 7hyridopteryx ephemereformis, C. V. Riley CApril 16, 1834) <2 cae Se i i sen cole een as aera oie List of plants added to the flora of Washington from April 1, 1882, to April 1, 1884, Lester F. Ward (April 10, 1884) sli aera Description of a new genus and species of pediculate fishes (Haléeute//a lappa), G. Brown Goode and Tarleton H. Bean.__- ----~---------~-- Descriptions of some new North American birds, R. Ridgway (April 10, 9984) ooo ccs sewn US Sica, ei ech gril ct ete! chip dehinee Description of a new American kingfisher, R. Ridgway (April 10, 1884) Note on Psaltriparus grind@ Belding, R. Ridgway (April 10, 1884) ---. Note on the generic name, Calodromas, R. Ridgway (April 10, 1884) -- Diagnoses of new species of birds from Kamtschatka and the Commander Islands, Leonhard Stejneger (April 10, 1884) ...-..----. ---- -------- Diagnoses of three new species of fishes from the Gulf of Mexico, T. H. Bean and H, G. Dresel (April: 10, 1883) 35 2. eon A review of the American cross-bills (Zoxia) of the ZL. curvirostra type, R. Ridgway (April 26,1864) 228 oe ne teen Sok new Note on the Anas hyperboreus Pall., and Anser albatus Cass., R. Ridg- way (April 28, :1864): soon oo ck. 2 be eee alee cei eiekinieibey Remarks on the type specimens of Muscicapa fulvifrons Giraud, and Mitrephorus pallescens Coues, R. Ridgway (April 28, 1884) -...- ---- a Note regarding the earliest name for Carpodacus hemorrhous (Wagler), R. Ridgway (April 25; 1864) \o20 os 5 ee On some Hydrocoralline from Alaska and California, W. H. Dall (April DE Be | cctools eg eee hes wk Geka ck Shas een ae <mniaieee emer hi aese a Some results by massage et contre-coup, W. S. Barnard _-----. ---- ---- 99 IOI 107 108 IIo III 116 * Author’s extras of each of the special papers here enumerated were published at the dates given in parentheses following the author’s name. ; ¥ nN eae n SP shamgnecd yt inte ho at “ NEP Ck y's ot ~ AN te LIST OF THE OFFICERS AND COUNCIL OF THE BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. ELECTED JANUARY II, 1884. OFFICERS. PRESIDENT. CHARLES A. WHITE. VICE PRESIDENTS. WILLIAM H. DALL. LESTER F. WARD. THEODORE GILL. CHARLES V. RILEY. SECRETARIES. G. BROWN GOODE. RICHARD RATHBUN. TREASURER. TARLETON H. BEAN. COUNCIL. CHARLES A. WHITE, President. TARLETON H. BEAN. RICHARD RATHBUN. WILLIAM H. DALL. CHARLES V. RILEY. THEODORE GILL. JOHN A. RYDER. G. BROWN GOODE. FREDERICK W. TRUE. OTIS T. MASON. GEORGE VASEY. D. WEBSTER PRENTISS. _ LESTER F. WARD. VII STANDING COMMITTEES. COMMITTEE ON COMMUNICATIONS. CHARLES V. RILEY, Chairman. G. BROWN GOODE. RICHARD RATHBUN. COMMITTEE ON PUBLICATIONS. RICHARD RATHBUN, Chairman. CHARLES V. RILEY. FRANK BAKER. G. BROWN GOODE. J. W. CHICKERING, Jr. WILLIAM S. BARNARD. , COMMITTEE ON LECTURES. G. BROWN GOODE, Chairman. OTIS T. MASON. RICHARD RATHBUN. LESTER F. WARD. FREDERICK W. TRUE. COMMITTEE ON THE TREES AND SHRUBS OF WASHINGTON. LESTER F. WARD, Chairman. EDWARD FOREMAN. WILLIAM SMITH. FRANKLIN B. HOUGH. GEORGE VASEY. VIil LIST OF MEMBERS OF THE BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Date of Election. 14. 1881, Jan. 1882, Mar. 1882, Dec. 1882, April 1882, April 1881, Feb. 1881, Feb. 31. 22. 25. 25. JANUARY 25, 1884. HONORARY MEMBERS. BAIRD, SPENCER FULLERTON, M. D., LL. D., M. N. A.S., Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution and Director of the U. S. National Museum; U.S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries; Foreign Member of the Zoological and Linnean Societies of London. Smithsonian Institution, and 1445 Massachusetts Avenue N. W. CORRESPONDING MEMBERS. AGASSIZ, ALEXANDER, A. B., S. B., M. N. A. S., Curator of. the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge; Foreign Member of the Zoological and Linnean Societies of London. Cambridge, Massachusetts. ALLEN, HARRISON, M. D.,’Professor of Physiology in the Uni- versity of Pennsylvania. z77 South Twentieth Street, Phil- adelphia, Pennsylvania. ; ALLEN, JOEL ASAPH, M.N. A. S., C. M. Z. S., Assistant in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge; Presi- dent of the American Ornithologists’ Union; Editor of “The Auk.” Cambridge, Massachusetts. BREWER, WILLIAM Henry, Ph. D., M. N. A. S., Professor of Agriculture in the Sheffield Scientific School, Yale College, New Haven. Mew Haven, Connecticut. BREWSTER, WILLIAM. 67 Sparks Street, Cambridge, Massa- chusetts. Brooks, WILLIAM KEITH, Ph. D., Associate Professor of Biology and Director of the Marine Laboratory of Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore. Baltimore, Maryland. IX x BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Date of Election. CORRESPONDING MEMBERS—Continued. 1882, Jan. 6. | CoLLEeTT, Rosert, C. M. Z. S., Conservator of the Zoological Museum of the University of Christiania. Christiania, Norway. 1882, Dec. 22. | Cope, EDWARD DRINKER, M. A., M. N. A.S.,C. M. Z.S., Editor of “The American Naturalist.” 2z00 Pine Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. 1881, April 14. | DeRBy, ORVILLE ADELBERT, M. S., Curator of the Geologi- cal Section of the National Museum of Brazil. Rio de Janeiro, Braztl. 1882, Jan. 6. | FARLOw, WILLIAM Gitson, A. M., M. D., M. N.A.S., Professor of Cryptogamic Botany in Harvard University. Cambridge, Massachusetts. 1881, Mar. II. | GicLioLt1, ENRIco HILLYER, D. Sc., C. M. Z. S., Director of the Royal Zoological Museum of Vertebrates, and Professor of Vertebrate Zoology in the Royal Institute, Florence. 2. Istituto di Studi Superiori, Florence, Italy. 1882, Jan. 6. | Gray, Asa, M. D., LL. D., M. N. A. S., Fisher Professor of Natural History in Harvard University; Foreign Mem- ber of the Royal Society of London, and of the Institute of France. Botanic Garden, Cambridge, Massachusetts. 1884, Jan. 11. | HUBRECHT, A. A. W., C. M. Z. S., &c., Professor of Natural History in the University of Utrecht. Utrecht, Holland. 1882, Jan. 6. Hyatt, ALpHeEus, S. B., M. N. A. S., Professor of Zoology and Paleontology in the Massachusetts Institute of Tech- nology; Custodian of the Boston Society of Natural History ; President of the Society of Naturalists of the Eastern United States. Cambridge, Massachusetts. 1883, Jan. 5. | JORDAN, Davip Srarr, M. S., M. D., Professor of Natural History in Indiana State University. Bloomington, Indiana. 1881, April 8, | LAWRENCE, GrorcE N., C. M. Z.S. 45 East 2rst St., New York City. 1883, Dec. 14. | LYMAN, Hon, THEODORE, A. M., M. N. A. S., Member of Congress from Massachusetts. z24g07 Massachusetts Avenue LM. W., Washington. 1882, Dec. 22. | MARTIN, Henry NEWELL, A. M., M. D., D. Sc., Professor of Biology in Johns Hopkins University. Baltimore, Maryland. 1882, Mar. 31. | Morse, Epwarp S., Ph. D., M. N. A. S., Director of the Pea- body Academy of Science, Salem. Salem, Massachusetts. Date of Election. 1883, Nov. 30. 1882, Mar. 31. 1882, Dec. 22. 1882, Mar. 3. 1881, Feb. 25. 1882, Mar. 31. 1882, April 28. 1882, Mar. 3. 1883, Jan. 19. 1883, Dec. 28. LIST OF MEMBERS. xI CORRESPONDING MEMBERS—Continued. MosELEY, HENRY NotripcE, A. M., F. R. $. Fa t23.; F. Z. S., &c., Linacre Professor of Human and Comparative Anatomy in the University of Oxford. zg, St. Giles, Ox- Jord, England. PACKARD, ALPHEUS SPRING, Jr., A. M., M. D., M. N. A.S., Professor of Zoology and Geology in Brown University, Providence; Editor of “« The American Naturalist.” Provz- dence, Rhode Island. SCUDDER, SAMUEL HuBBARD, A. M., M. N. A. S., President of the Boston Society of Natural History; Editor of “Science.” Cambridge, Massachusetts. SMITH, SIDNEY IRVING, Ph. B. Professor of Comparative Anatomy in Yale College, New Haven. Mew Haven, Con- necticut. VELIE, JOHN W., M. D., Secretary and Curator of the Chicago Academy of Sciences. 267 Wabash Avenue, Chicago, [lli- nots. VERRILL, ADDISON Emory, A. M., S. B., M. N. A. S. Pro- fessor of Zoology and Curator of the Zoological Collections in Yale College, New Haven. Mew Haven, Connecticut, WATSON, SERENO, Ph. D., M. N. A. S. Curator of the Her- barium of Harvard University. Botanic Garden, Cambridge, Massachusetts. Witson, EpMuND BEECHER, Ph. D. Acting Professor of Natural History in Williams College. Wiliiamstown, Mas- sachusetts. ACTIVE MEMBERS.* ACKER, GEORGE N., A. M., M. D., Demonstrator of Practical Physiology and Pathological Histology, National Medical College. 1407 New York Avenue N, W. ACKERMAN, ALBERT AMMERMAN, Ensign, U. S. Navy, on duty on U. S. Fish Commission Steamer “ Albatross.” Smithsonian Institution. * When not otherwise expressly stated, all addresses are in Washington. By the words “Original Member” are designated those who attended the meetings for organization, November 26 and December 8, 1880. XII Date of Election. 1883, Jan. 19. Orig. Member. 1881, Jan. 14. 1882, Mar. 3. 1881, Nov. II. Orig. Member. 1883, Jan. 5. 1881, Mar. 25. 1881, Nov. II. 1884, Jan. II. 1883, Mar. 2. 1882, Mar. 17. 1881, Jan. 14. 1882, Jan. 20. 1882, Feb. 17. 1881, Noy. It. BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. AMES, DELANO, Student. 7600 13th Street N. W. ASHFORD, FRANCIS AsBURY, M. D. Dean of Faculty and Professor of Surgery in the Medical Department of the University of Georgetown. Died, 1883. BAKER, FRANK, M. D., Professor of Anatomy in the Medical Department, University of Georgetown. Office of Light House Board, and 326 C Street N. W. BARKER, JOHN SHEPARD, Law Student. 775 A Street NV. W. BARNARD, WILLIAM STEBBINS, S. B., Ph. D. Assistant Ento- mologist, U. S. Department of Agriculture. gz7 New York Avenue. BEAN, TARLETON HOFFMAN, M. D., M. S., Curator, Dep’t of Fishes, U. S. National Museum. JVational Museum, and 1404 S Street N. W. BENEDICT, JAMES EVERARD, Naturalist of the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer “ Albatross.”’ tion, and 140 B Street N. E. Smithsonian Institu- BESSELS, EMIL, M. D., Ph. D. sggg NM Street N. W. BEYER, HENRY G., M. D., Passed Assistant Surgeon, U. S. Navy. U.S. Steamer“ Blake,” Navy Yard, Brooklyn, New York. BIGELOW, HORATIO RIPLEY, M. D. s228 NW Street N. W. (office), and 2 Iowa Circle. BIGELOW, ROBERT PAYNE, Student. z507 Zighteenth Street N. W., and Harvard University, Cambridge, Massachusetts. BILLINGS, JOHN SHAW, A. M., M. D., Surgeon and Brevet Lieutenant Colonel, U. S. Army; Curator of the Army Medical Museum. Army Medical Museum, and 3027 N Street N. W. BIRNEY, HERMAN HOFFMAN, Student in Lehigh University. 1901 Harewood Avenue, Le Droit Park. BIRNEY, GEN. WILLIAM, A. M. zg0z Harewood Avenue, Le Droit Park. BLISH, JOHN BELL, Ensign, U. S. Navy. Mavy Department, Washington. BRANSFORD, JOHN Francis, M. D. Passed Assistant Surgeon, U.S. N. Mavy Department, Washington. Date of Election. 1882, Nov. 24. 1883, Dec. 14. Orig. Member. Orig. Member. 1882, Nov. 24. 1882, Dec. 22. 1883, Dec. 28. Orig. Member. 1883, Jan. 5. 1882, Mar. 17. Orig. Member. 1881, June 3. 1881, June 3. 1883, Jan. 19. 1882, Feb. 17. 1883, Apr. 27. Orig. Member. LIST OF MEMBERS. XIII ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. BRITTON, WILEY, Agent, Quartermaster’s Dept., U. S. Army. Quartermaster General's Office, Washington. BROMWELL, JOSIAH Rosson, M. D. nue, N. W. 1138 Connecticut Ave- BROWN, JAMES TEMPLEMAN, Aid, U. S. National Museum. National Museum, and 1607 Fifteenth Street N. W. BROWN, STEPHEN CARVOSSO, Registrar, U. S. National Mu- seum. Vational Museum, and 311 Eleventh Street S. W. BROWNE, JOHN MILLs, M. D., Medical Director, U. S. N.; -Curator of Naval Museum of Hygiene. Bureau of Medi- cine and Surgery, U. S. Navy. BRUNER, LAWRENCE, Assistant, Entomological Division, De- partment of Agriculture. Department of Agriculture. BRYAN, JOSEPH H., Passed Assistant Surgeon, U. S. Navy. Museum of Hygiene, U. S. Navy. BURDICK, EDSON ALMERON. Pension Office, and 406 Spruce Street NV. W. BURGESS, EDWARD SANDFORD, A. M., In charge of Depart- ment of Natural Science, Washington High School. K Street N. W. I2I4 BURNETT, SWAN Mosss, M. D., Professor of Clinical Ophthal- mology and Otology, Medical Department, University of Georgetown. s2r5 I Street N. W. BusEY, SAMUEL CLAGETT, M. D., Emeritus Professor of the Theory and Practice of Medicine, Medical Department, University of Georgetown. z525 Z Street N. W. CANBY, WILLIAM JACKSON. 4173 Tenth Street N. W. CARMAN, MyRON ALBERT, D. D. S. Mew York City. CHAPPEL, JOHN WILLIAM, M. D. TZennallytown, D. C. CHASE, HENRY SANDERS, Ensign, U. S. Navy, on duty in the National Museum. Smithsonian Institution. CHESTER, CoLtBy M., Commander, U. S. N.; Hydrographic Inspector, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. Coast Survey Office. CHICKERING, Rev. JOHN WHITE, Jr., A. M., Professor of Natural Science in the National Deaf-Mute College. Ken- dall Green, N. E. XIV Date of Election. 1881, May 20. 1882, Mar. 1881, Jan. 1883, Dec. 1881, Feb. Orig. Member. t881, Dec. 23: Orig. Member. 1881, Nov. II. 1881, Jan. 28. 1883, Feb. 3. 1881, Nov. II. 1881, Nov. II. 1882, Jan. 20. 1882, Dec. 22. 1881, Jan. 28. 1881, Feb. 25. BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. 17. 28. ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. CHICKERING, JOHN JAMESON, A. M., Teacher in the Public Schools. Kendall Green, N. E. CHRISTIE, ALEXANDER SMYTH, Astronomical Computer, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. Coast Survey Office, and 513 Sixth Street N. W. CLARK, ALONZO HowarbD, Assistant, U. S. National Museum. National Museum, and 1527 S Street N. W. COLLINS, JOHN F. Pension Office, and 1007 L Street N. W. COLLINS, JOSEPH WILLIAM. JVational Museum, and Glou- cester, Massachusetts. ComsTock, JOHN Henry, S. B., Professor of Entomology and General Invertebrate Zoology in Cornell University, Ithaca. Jthaca, New York. ConANT, WoopbuRY PAGE, Assistant Botanist, Department of Agriculture. Agricultural Department. Cougs, ELLIOTT, A. M., M. D., Ph. D., M. N. A. S., C. M. Z. S., Professor of Anatomy, Medical Department, Colum- bian University. Smithsonian Institution, and 1726 N Street VN. W. Cox, WILLIAM VAN ZANT., A. B. Smithsonian Institution. DALL, WILLIAM HEALEY, Assistant, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey; Honorary Curator, Dept. of Mollusks, U. S. National Museum. Coast Survey Office, and 1119 Twelfth Street N.W. DAVIS, HARRY C., A. B., Professor of Greek, Wilkesbarre Academy. 248 Franklin Street, Wilkesbarre, Penn. DEWEY, FREDERIC PERKINS, Ph. B., Curator, Dept. of Metallurgy, U. S. National Museum. Mational Museum, and g20 N Street N. W. DoDGE, CHARLES RICHARDS, Special Agent, Tenth Census, Division of Fruit and Orchard Statistics. 7237376 Vermont Avenue VV. W. DosH, FRANK BOWMAN. Died, 1883. DRESEL, HERMAN GEORGE, Ensign, U. S. N., on duty in the National Museum. Smithsonian Institution. EARLL, ROBERT EDWARD, S. B. Smtthsonian Institution. ELLIOTT, HENRY Woop. Smithsonian Institution, and Cleve- land, Okio. f Date of Election. 1881, Nov. 25. 1882, Oct. 27. 1883, May II. 1881, Jan. 28. 1881, Mar. 25. 1881, Feb. IT. 1881, Dec. 9. 1883, Apr. 13. 1883, Apr. 27. 1883, Dec. 14. 1883, Mar. 30. 1883, Jan. 5. 1881, Mar. 25. 1882, Feb. 17. Orig. Member. 1881, Mar. II. LIST OF MEMBERS. XV ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. E.izey, MAson GRAHAM, A. M., M. D., Lecturer on Hy- giene and Medical Jurisprudence, Medical Department, University of Georgetown. zoz2 J Street N. W. ENTHOFFER, JOSEPH, U. S. Coast Survey. 68 J Street NV. W. FAutis, Moor S., Medical Student. z200 LHighteenth Street N. W. FERGUSON, THOMAS BARKER, Assistant Commissioner of Fisheries. 7475 Massachusetts Avenue N. W. FLETCHER, ROBERT, M. D., Acting Assistant Surgeon, U. S. Army; Editor of “Index Medicus.” Surgeon General’s Office, and 1326 L Street N. W. FLINT, JAMES MILTON, M. D., Surgeon, U. S. Navy; Hon- orary Curator, Section of Materia Medica, U. S. National Museum. WJVational Museum, and Riggs House. FOREMAN, EDWARD, M. D., Assistant, U. S. National Mu- seum. ational Museum, and 200 Eleventh Street S. W. FOsTER, RICHARD, B. S., Instructor of Natural History in Howard University. Howard University. Fox, WIILIAM HENRY. 7828 A Street N. W. FRANZONI, CHARLES WLLIAM, Ph. B., M. D. 820 H Street NV. W. FRIEDRICH, LEON L., M. D., Prosector to the Chair of An- atomy, National Medical College. 327 East Capitol Strect. FRISTOE, EDWARD T., A. M., LL. D., Professor of Chemistry in Columbian University and National Medical College. 1434 N Street. GANNETT, HENRY, S. B., A.Met.B., Chief Geographer of the U. S. Geological Survey. Office of Geological Survey, and 1884 Harewood Ave., Le Droit Park. GARRETT, LERoy MASON, Ensign, U. S. Navy, on duty on Steamer ‘* Albatross.”? Swztthsonian Institution. GEDNEY, CHARLES DeForest. Coast Survey Office, and 115 F Street N. E. GiHoN, ALBERT Leary, A. M., M. D., Medical Director, U. S. Navy. In charge of the U. S. Naval Hospital, Wash- ington, D. C. 2079 Hillyer Place N. W. XVI Date of Election. 1882, April 28. Orig. Member. 1883, Mar. 30. 1882, Nov. 24. BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Orig. Member. 1882, Oct. Orig. Member. 1881, Nov. 1882, Nov. 1883, Dec. 1882, Nov. Orig. Member. 1881, Feb. 1882, Feb. 1882, Feb. 1882, Mar. 1881, Jan. _ 1883, Feb. 27. Tl. 24. 14. 24. 25. 3: 17. 31. 14. 16. ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. GiLbert, Grove Kart, M.N. A. S., Geologist, U. S. Geo- logical Survey. May Building, and 1424 Corcoran Street NV. W. GILL, THEODORE NIcHoLas, M. D., Ph. D., M. N. A. S. Cosmos Club, and 321 Four-and-a-half Street. GILPIN, GEORGE E., M. D. Zennallytown, D. C. GopwIn, Harry P., Journalist. Office of “Evening Star,” and 15 Second Street S. E. GoopDE, GEORGE Brown, A. M., Assistant Director of the U. S. National Museum. Smithsonian Institution, and 1620 Massachusetts Avenue N. W. GOoDRICH, JOSEPH KING, Assistant, U. S. National Museum. National Museum. GorE, JAMES HowarbD, S. B., Professor of Mathematics in Columbian University; Astronomer, U. S. Geological Sur- vey. Columbian University, and 13705 Q Street N. W. GRIFFITH, SAMUEL HENDERSON, M. D., Passed Assistant Surgeon, U. S. Navy. Bureau of Medicine, U. S. Navy. GURLEY, REVERE R. Children’s Hospital. HAGNER, CHARLES E., M. D. sgoo H Street N. W. HAMILTON, JOHN B., M. D., Supervising Surgeon General, U. S. Marine Hospital Service. g B Street NV. W. -| HASSLER, FERDINAND AucustTus, M. D. Tustin City, Los Angeles Co., California. HAwEs, GEORGE WesSON, Ph. D. Died, 1882. HAWKES, WILLIAM HIMEs, A. B.,M. D. 13370 New York Avenue. HAYDEN, EDWARD EVERETT, Ensign U. S. Navy, on duty at the National Museum. Smithsonian Institution. HENSHAW, HENRY WETHERBEE, Ethnologist, Bureau of Eth- nology, Smithsonian Institution. szzg M Street N. W. HESSEL, RUDOLPH, Ph. D., Superintendent of Government Carp Ponds. srg Tenth Street N. W. HICKLING, DANIEL PERCY. jor Pennsylvania Avenue N.W, Date of Election, 1883, Feb. 16. 1883, Nov. 16. 1882, Dec. 22. Orig. Member. 1882, April 14. 1882, May 26. 1882, April 27. Orig. Member. 1883, Feb. 6. 1881, Feb. 25. Orig. Member. 1882, Dec. 22. 1882, Mar. 3. 1882, Jan. 20. 1882, Feb. 3. 1882, Nov. 24. LIST OF MEMBERS. XVII ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. HICKLING, DANIEL PERCY, Jr., Student. Avenue N. W. jor Pennsylvania Hitcucock, Romywn, F. R. M. S., Assistant, U. S. National Museum ; Editor of “American Monthly Microscopical eae , nal.” 338 Tenth Street N.W. HOADLY, FREDERICK H.,M. D. New Haven, Connecticut. HOFFMAN, WALTER JAMES, M. D., Assistant Ethnologist, Bureau of Ethnology, Smithsonian Institution. 222 £ Street NV. W. Hornapay, WILLIAM TELL, Chief Taxidermist U. S. National Museum. WJational Museum, and gog Spruce Street, Le Droit Park. Houcu, FRANKLIN BENJAMIN, A. M., M. D., Ph. D., Statis- tician. Lowville, N.Y. Houeu, Myron BEACH WARNER. and 312 Indiana Avenue N. W. U. S. Treasurer's Office, Howarp, LELAND O., M. S., Assistant, Entomological Divi- sion, U. S. Department of Agriculture. Agricultural De- pariment, and 1407 Fifteenth Street N. W. Howe, FRANK T., M. D., City Editor “‘ National Republican.” Office of “Republican,” and 1434 Corcoran Street NV. W. HowLanb, EpwIn Perry, M. D. 2zz Four-and-a-half Street INGERSOLL, ERNEST. Mew Haven, Connecticut: ISRAEL, GEORGE ROBERT, A. B., LL. B., Teacher in Wash- ington High School. go7 Mew York Avenue N. W. JOHNSON, ARNOLD BurGes, A. M., Chief Clerk, U. S. Light House Board. sor Maple Avenue, Le Droit Park. JOHNSON, BLANCHARD FREEMAN, Student. nue, Le Droit Park. 501 Maple Ave- JOHNSON, JOSEPH TABER, A. M., M. D., Professor of Obstet- rics and Diseases of Women and Infants, Medical Depart- ment of the University of Georgetown; Gynecologist to Prov- idence Hospital. 926 Seventeenth Street N. W. JOHNSTON, WILLIAM WARING, M. D., Professor of the Theory and Practice of Medicine, National Medical College. 603 K Street N. W. XVIII Date of Election. 1883, Mar. Orig. Member. 1882, Oct. » Orig. Member. Orig. Member. 1881, Nov. Orig. Member. 1882, Mar. 1882, Jan. 1882, Oct. 1882, Dec. 1883, Dec. 1883, Apr. 1881, Jan. 1883, Apr. BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON, ai 27. a5. 17. 20, 27. 28. 13. ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. Jones, HENRY ALEXANDER, Inspector of Fuel for the District of Columbia. zoog WV Street N. W. Jouy, Pierre Louis, Attaché of the Corean Embassy. Sedzé, Corea. KELLy, THoMAS. <Adsent from the city. KIDDER, JEROME HEnry, A. M., M. D., Surgeon, U. S. Navy. Chemist, U. S. Fish Commission. Smithsonian Institution and 1816 N Street N. W. Kinc, ALBERT FREEMAN AFRICANUS, M. D., Professor of Obstetrics and Diseases of Women and Children, Medical Department, Columbian University. President of the Med- ical Society of the District of Columbia. 726 Thirteenth Street VN. W. KoEBELE, ALBERT. L£xtomological Division, Department of Agriculture. LeEE, WILLIAM, M. D., Professor of Physiology in the Med- ical Department of Columbian University. azrz Pennsyl- vania Avenue N. W. LEECH, DANIEL, Corresponding Clerk, Smithsonian Institution. 1507 Vermont Avenue N. W. LEHNERT, REv. ERNEST, Pastor of St. John’s Lutheran Church. 325 Four-and-a-half Street. Lucas, FREDERIC AuGusTUs, Osteologist, U. S. National Mu- seum. McARDLE, THOMAS EUGENE, A. M., M. D., Secretary of the Medical Society of the District of Columbia. 707 Twelfth Street VV. W. MCCLAIN, CHARLES SUMNER, Ensign, U. S. Navy, on duty in the U. S. National Museum. Swtithsonian Institution. McCoNNELL, JAMES CULBERTSON, M. D., Army Medical Mu- seum. 425 M Street NV. W. McDoNALD, MARSHALL, Chief of Division of Distribution, U. S. Fish Commission ; Commissioner of Fisheries for the State of Virginia. 17276 Twelfth Street N. W. McELHONE, JAMES FRANCIS, Student in Georgetown Univer- sity. 171318 Vermont Avenue. Date of Election. 1883, Dec. 14. 1881, May 20. 1881, Nov. II. 1883, Nov. 3. 1882, Feb. 17. 1882, Jan. 20. Orig. Member. Orig. Member. 1881, Jan. 28. 1881, June 3. 1882, Feb. 17. 1883, Nov. 30. 2881, Dees 9. 1683, Feb. 2. 1882, Dec. 22. 1883, Jan. 19. LIST OF MEMBERS. XIX ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. McGEE, W. J., Assistant, U. S. Geological Survey. 572 Thir- teenth Street N. W. McMurtTrik£, WILuiaAM, E. M., M. S., Ph. D., Professor of Chemistry in Illinois Industrial University. Champaign, Lilinois. ‘ MANN, BENJAMIN PicKMAN, A. B., Assistant, Entomological Division, U. S. Department of Agriculture; Editor of “Psyche.” Agricultural Department, and 924 Nineteenth Street NV. W. MARCOU, JOHN BELKNAP, Assistant, U. S. Geological Survey. National Museum, and 1319 Eleventh Street N. W. MARSH, CHARLES CARROLTON, Ensign U. S. Navy, on duty ‘in the National Museum. Swmzthsonian Institution. MARTIN, FRANK. 12835 G Street NV. W. Marx, GEORGE, Zoological Draughtsman, U. S. Department of Agriculture. Agricultural Department, and 1626 Four- teenth Street N. W. Mason, OTIs Turton, A. M., Ph. D., Principal of the Colum- bian University Preparatory School. 2305 Q Street NV. W. MERRILL, GEORGE PERKINS, M. S., Acting Curator, Depart- ment of Lithology, U. S. National Museum. ational Museunt, and 1221 M Street N. W. MILLER, BENJAMIN. 17576 Thirty-jirst Street N. W. MINER, RANDOLPH HUNTINGTON, Ensign U. S. Navy, on duty on Steamer “Albatross.” Smithsonian Institution. MURDOCH, JOHN, A. M., Naturalist and Observer, Point Bar- row Expedition, on duty at Smithsonian Institution. Swith- sonian Institution. NELSON, EDWARD W. Colorado Springs, Colorado. NELSON, HENRY Cay, M. D. Navy. Navy Department. Medical Inspector, U. S. NETTO, SENHOR FELIPPE Lopes. Brazilian Minister. Pennsylvania Avenue. I7I0 NIBLACK, ALBERT PARKER. Ensign, United States Navy, on duty inthe National Museum. Smithsonian Institution. xx Date of Election. Orig. Member. 1882, Nov. 24. 1883, Mar. 2. 1882, Dec. 22. 1883, April 13. 1882, Dec. 22. Orig. Member. Orig. Member. 1883, Feb. 16. 1883, Nov. 16. Orig. Member. 1882, Dec. 22. 1881, Feb. II. Orig. Member. Orig. Member. 1881, May 20. 1881, Dec. 9. BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. Norris, BAsiL, M. D., Surgeon and Brevet Colonel, U. S. Army. 12829 G Street NV. W. OurT, A. J.,M. D. <Adsent from the city. PALMER, WILLIAM GRAY, M. D. g29 H Street N. W. PARKER, PETER, JR. fayette Square N. W. Aid, U. S. National Museum. 2 Za- PARSON, REV. WILLIAM EpwIn, A. M., Pastor of the Church of the Reformation. 3709 Mew Jersey Avenue S. EZ. PATTON, HORACE B. , A. B., Student. Leipzig, Germany. PATTON, WILLIAM HampTon, A. B. New York City. PERGANDE, THEODORE, Assistant, Entomological Division, U. S. Department of Agriculture. 3727 D Street N. W. PERSONS, REMUS CHARLES, A. M., M. D., Surgeon, U. S, Navy. U. S. Steamer Wyandotte, Navy Yard, Washington. PHILLIPS, Louis E., Law Student. NV. W. PORTER, JOHN HAMPDEN, M. D. 1428 New York Avenue 2720 M Street N. W. PoTTER, ZIBA H., M. D., Medical Examiner, U. S. Pension Office. Pension Office, and 1609 Nineteenth Street N. W. POWELL, JOHN WESLEY, Ph. D., LL. D., M. N. A. S., Direc- tor, U. S. Geological Survey, and Director, Bureau of Eth- nology, Smithsonian Institution ; President of the Anthro- pological Society of Washington. g10 M Street N. W. National Museum, and PRENTISS, DANIEL WEBSTER, Ph. B., A. M., M. D., Professor of Materia Medica and Therapeutics, Medical Department, Columbian University ; Commissioner of Pharmacy, District of Columbia. s22g Ninth Street N. W. RATHBUN, RICHARD, M. S., Curator, Dep’t of Marine Inver- tebrates, U.S. National Museum. Swthsonian Institution, and 1622 Massachusetts Avenue N. W. RAU, CHARLES, Ph. D., Curator, Dep’t of Antiquities, U. S. National Museum. <Svzithsonian Institution. REYBURN, ROBERT, A. M., M. D., Professor of Physiology and Hygiene, Medical Department, Howard University. 2129 F Street N. W. Date of Election. 3882, Oct: 27. 1882, Mar. 17. Ong. Member. Orig. Member. 1882, April 28. 1882, Mar. 31. 1882, Nov. 24. 1883, May 25. Orig. Member. 1882, Jan. 20. 1882, Mar. II. Orig. Member. 1881, Jan. 14. Orig. Member. Orig. Member. LIST OF MEMBERS. XXI ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. RHEES, WILLIAM JONES., A. M., Chief Clerk, Smithsonian In- stitution. Smithsonian Institution, and “ The Oaks,” Spring Road, near Fourteenth Street, Mt. Pleasant, D. C. RICHEY, STEPHEN OLIN, M. D. 7426 New York Avenue. RIDGWAY, ROBERT, C. M. Z. S., Curator, Dep’t of Birds, U. S. National Museum. Smithsonian Jnstitution, and 1214 Virginia Avenue S. W. RILEY, CHARLES VALENTINE, A. M., Ph. D., Entomologist, U. S. Department of Agriculture; Honorary Curator of Insects, U. S. National Museum. Agricultural Depart- ment, and 1700 Thirteenth Street N. W. RUSSELL, ISRAEL CooK, Assistant Geologist, U. S. Geological Survey. 1424 Corcoran Street. RYDER, JOHN ADAM, Embryologist, U. S. Fish Commission. Smithsonian Institution. SAFFORD, WILLIAM EpwIn, Ensign, U. S. Navy, on duty at _ National Museum. Peabody Museum of Yale College, New Haven, Connecticut. SALMON, DANIEL ELMER, D. V. M., Veterinarian, U. S. De- partment of Agriculture. s227 J Street NV. W. SCHAFFER, EDWARD MARTIN, M. D., Lecturer on the Micro- scope and Microscopical Anatomy, Medical Department, University of Georgetown. z3722 F Street N. W. SCHSONBORN, HENRY. 277 Seventh Street N. W. SCHUERMANN, CARL WILHELM, Property Clerk, U. S. Na- tional Museum. 976 D Street S. W. SCHWARZ, EUGENE AMANDUS, Assistant in the Entomological Division, U. S. Department of Agriculture. ggg Virginia Avenue S. W. SCUDDER, CHARLES WILLIs, Clerk, U. S. Fish Commission. 939 C Street S. W. SCUDDER, NEWTON Pratt, A. M., Clerk, Smithsonian In- stitution. 939 C Street S. W. SEAMAN, WILLIAM HEnry, M. D., B. L., Professor of Chemis- try, in the Medical Department of Howard University. 1424 Eleventh Street N. W. XXII Date of Election. 1882, May 26. Orig. Member. 1881, Nov. II. 1882, Feb. 17. Orig. Member. 1883, Mar. 1883, Feb. 1881, Nov. 1882, Jan. 1881, Nov. 1881, Mar. 1882, Mar. 1883, Dec. 1881, Feb. 1882, Feb. 1882, Nov. 1882, Mar. BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. 16. II. 17. 24. 17. ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. SEATON, CHARLES W., Superintendent of the Tenth Census. . Census Office, and 242 North Capitol Street N. W. SHELDON, CHARLES STILES. <Adsent from the city. SHUFELDT, RoBERT WILSON, M. D., Captain, Medical Corps, U. S. Army, in charge of Section of Comparative Anatomy, Museum and Library, Surgeon General’s Office, War De- partment. a2r25 L Street NV. W. SHUTE, DANIEL Kerroot, A. B., M. D. Washington Asy- lum Hospital. SMILEY, CHARLES WesLeEy, A. M., Chief of Division of Records, and Editor of the Bulletin of the U. S. Fish Com- mission. isk Commission Office, and 1207 Eleventh Street NV. W. SMILLIE, THOMAS WILLIAM, Photographer, U. S. National Museum. WMational Museum. SMITH, THOMAS CrROGGON, M. D. N. W. 1133 Twelfth Street SMITH, WILLIAM ROBERT, Superintendent of U. S. Botanical Garden. Botanical Garden. SPERR, FREDERICK W. Adsent from the city. STEJNEGER, LEONHARD. Smithsonian Institution. STERNBERG, GEORGE MILLER, M. D., Surgeon, U. S. Army. fort Mason, San Francisco, Cal. . | STEVENSON, JAMES, Executive Officer of the U. S. Geological Survey. Vational Museum. STEWART, ALONZO HOPKINS. 204 Fourth Street S. £E. STIMPSON, WILLIAM GorpDoNn, Aid, U. S. National Museum. 1447 Q Street N. W. STREETS, THOMAS HALE, M. D., Passed Assistant Surgeon, U.S. Navy. Bureau of Medicine and Surgery, U. S. Navy, and 2021 N Street N. W. TARR, RALPH STOCKMAN. Massachusetts. 45 Warren Street, Gloucester, TAYLOR, FREDERICK WILLIAM, Chemist, U. S. National Mu- seum. JVational Museum, and rir20 Vermont Avenue lu. W. Date of Election. 1882, Dec. 22. Orig. Member. 1882, Oct. 27. 1883, Jan. 5. 1881, Dec. 9. 1881, Jan. 28. Orig. Member. Orig. Member. 1883, Nov. 30. 1882, Oct. 27. 1881, Dec. 23. Orig. Member. 1881, Mar. 25. Orig. Member. 1883, Nov. 3. LIST OF MEMBERS. XXIII ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. TAYLOR, JAMES HEMPHILL, Lawyer. ¢82 Louisiana Avenue N. W. TAyLor, THOMAS, M. D., Microscopist, U. S. Department of Agriculture. Agricultural Department, and 238 Massa- chusetts Avenue N. E. TAYLOR, WILLIAM Bower, A. M., Editor, Smithsonian Insti- tution. 306 C Street NV. W. THomaS, Cyrus, Ph. D., Ethnologist, Bureau of Ethnology of the Smithsonian Institution. 72246 Eleventh Street N.W. THOMPSON, JOHN Forp, M. D., Professor of Surgery, Med- ical Department, Columbian University. zgor H Street MV. W. Topp, JAMES EDWARD, A. M., Professor of Natural Sciences in Tabor College; Assistant Geologist, U. S. Geological Survey. TZador, Lowa. TONER, JOSEPH MEREDITH, M. D. 675 Loutstana Avenue N. W. TRUE, FREDERICK WILLIAM, M. S., Librarian, and Curator, Dep’t of Mammals, U. S. National Museum. Jational Museum. TUPPER, JAMES BRAINERD TAYLOR, A. M. Jnternal Reve- nue Bureau, Treasury Department, and 510 I Street N. W. TURNER, HENRY W., Assistant Geologist, U. S. Geological Survey. San Francisco, California. TURNER, LucIEN M., Observer, U. S. Signal Service. Un- gava, Labrador. ULKE, Henry. grr Fifteenth Street N. W. UpHam, Epwin Porter, Aid, U. S. National Museum. Smithsonian Institution, and 2010 Thirteenth Street N. W. VAsSEY, GeorGE, M. D., Botanist, U. S. Department of Ag- riculture. Agricultural Department, and 2912 Fourteenth Street VN. W. WALCOTT, CHARLES DOOLITTLE, Paleontologist, U. S. Geo- logical Survey. Smithsonian Institution, and 810 Twelfth Street N. W. XXIV Date of Election. Orig. Member. 1882, Nov. 24. 1882, Dec. 22. Orig. Member. 1883, Dec. 14. 1881, May 20. 1881, Jan. 28. 1883, Feb. 16. Orig. Member. 1881, Dec. 9. 1881, Jan. 28. 1882, Feb. 17. Orig. Member, 1882, Oct. 28. 1881, Feb. 25. 1882, Jan. 6. BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continned. Warp, LESTER FRANK, A. M., LL. B., Geologist, U. S. Geological Survey; Honorary Curator, Dep’t -of Fossil Plants, U. S. National Museum. JVational Museum, and 1464 Rhode Island Avenue N. W. WELD, GEORGE FRANCIS, Student. and 1600 Thirteenth Street. Smithsonian Institution, West, Henry LITCHFIELD, City Editor, ‘‘ Washington Post.” Office of the “ Post,” and rrz E Street N. W. WHITE, CHARLES ABIATHAR, A. M., M. D., Curator Dep’t of Fossil Invertebrates, U. S. National Museum; Palzeon- tologist, U. S. Geological Survey. ational Museum, and 409 Maple Avenue, Le Droit Park. WHITE, CHARLES HENRY, M. D., Surgeon, U. S. Navy. Museum of Hygiene, Navy Department. WHITE, MAURICE PuTNAM, Teacher, Public School, Boston, Massachusetts. 527 Columbus Avenue, Boston. WILLIAMS, ALFRED. Capitol Street N. W. Department of State,and 232 North WILSON, JAMES ORMOND, Superintendent of Public Schools, District of Columbia. 74379 Massachusetts Avenue. WILSON, JOSEPH MCMINN. Department of the Interior, and 1108 Maryland Avenue S. W. WINSLOW, FRANCIS, Lieutenant U. S. Navy, on duty with U. S. Fish Commission. zg46 WV Street NV. W. WoLFLey, WILLIAM IRvIN, A. M., M. D. zgo C Street NV. E. YARNALL, JOHN HepsuRN, MD. 3028 P Street N. W. YARROW, HENRY Crécy, M. D., C. M. Z. S., Acting Assist- ant Surgeon, U.S. Army; Hon. Curator, Dep’t of Reptiles, U. S. National Museum. Surgeon General’s Office, and 814 Seventeenth Street N. W. YARROW, JoHN, Aid, U. S. National Museum. 874 Seven- teenth Street, N. W. YEATES, WILLIAM SMITH, A. M., Aid, U. S. National Mu- seum. JVational Museum, and gor G Street N. W. ZUMBROCK, ANTON, M. D., Electrotyper and Photographer, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. Coast Survey Office. Date of Election. 1884, 1884, | 1884, 1884, 1884, 1884, 1884, 1884, LIST OF MEMBERS. XXV ADDITIONAL LIST OF MEMBERS, Feb. April Mar. Mar. Feb. May ; May Feb. Mar. 8 19 22 22 17 23 22 CoRRECTED TO JULY 1, 1884. CORRESPONDING MEMBERS. FLOWER, WILLIAM Henry, LL. D., F. R. S., Pres. Z. S., F. L. S.; Director of the Natural History Departments of the British Museum. South Kensington, London, S. W. Horn, GEORGE HENRY, M. D.; Pres. American Entomo- logical Society. 874 North Fourth Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. MARSH, OTHNIEL CHARLES, M. A., Pres. N. A. S.; Pro- fessor of Palzeontology in Yale College, and Palzeontologist to the U. S. Geological Survey. Mew Haven, Connecticut. ACTIVE MEMBERS. BATES, HENRY Hopart, Examiner in Chief, U. S. Patent Office. U. S. Patent Office, and “ The Portland.” BECKHAM, CHARLES WICKLIFFE, Aid, Department of Birds, U. S. National Museum. Smithsonian Institution, and 1315 Connecticut Avenue. BENDIRE, CHARLES, Captain Ist Cavalry, U. S. A. ; Honor- ary Curator, Section of Oology, U. S. National Museum. fort Custer, Montana Territory. DILLER, JOSEPH SILAS, S. B., Assistant Geologist, U. S. Geo- logical Survey. 2804 Sixteenth Street N. W. EGGLESTON, NATHANIEL HILLYER, Chief of Bureau of Forestry, U. S. Department of Agriculture. Agricultural Depariment, and 1302 L Street N. W. GEARE, RANDOLPH ILTYD. UW. S. National Museum, and 803 T Street N. W. JOHNSON, WILLARD DRAKE, Topographer, U. S. Geological Survey. Washington, D. C., and Worcester, Massachu- setts. Knapp, E. B. Skaneateles, New York. XXVI BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Date of Election. ; ACTIVE MEMBERS—Continued. 1884, April 5 | MosER, JEFFERSON FRANKLIN, Lieutenant, U. S. N.; Assist- ant Hydrographic Inspector, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. Coast Survey Office, and 7 Second Street S. £. 1884, April 19 | NicHois, Henry E., Lieutenant Commander, U. S. Navy, i commanding U. S. S. Pinta. Sztka, Alaska. 1884, May 3] Sayxxs, Ira, Geologist, U. S. Geological Survey. 577 F Street NV. W. 1884, Feb. 8 | SmirH, THEOBALD, Ph. B., M. D., Assistant, Bureau of Ani- ‘| mal Industry, U.S. Department of Agriculture. <Agricud- tural Department, and g17 New York Avenue N. W. 1884, Mar. 22 | WiLson, Hon. WILLIAM LyNE, Member of Congress from West Virginia. s008 WV Street N. W. 1884, April 19 | WorTMAN, JAcoB L., Osteologist, Army Medical Museum. 628 Penn. Ave. N. W. THE BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. CONSTITUTION. Adopted December 3, 1880. ARTICLE I. NAME. The name of this Society shall be ‘‘ THE BioLocicaL SocIETY Or WASHINGTON.”’ ARTICLE II. OBJECTS. Its objects shall be to encourage the study of the Biological Sci- ences, and to hold meetings at which papers shall be read and dis- cussed. ARTICLE III. MEMBERS. The Society shall consist of active, corresponding and honorary members. Candidates for membership shall be proposed to the Council, in writing, by at least three members, and, upon recom- mendation of the majority of the Council present at its regular meeting, shall be balloted for at the earliest ensuing meeting. A majority vote of the members present when the ballot is taken shall be necessary to election. ARTICLE IV. OFFICERS. The officers shall be a President, four Vice-Presidents, two Sec- retaries, and a Treasurer. There shall be a Council, consisting of the officers of the Society and five members, to be elected by the Society. A quorum of the council shall consist of seven members. XXVII XXVIII BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Its duties shall be to act on nominations for membership, have the direction of the finances, audit the accounts of the Treasurer, and provide a programme for each meeting of the Society. The officers shall be elected by ballot at each annual meeting, and shall serve one year, or until their successors are elected. ARTICLE V. PRESIDENT AND VICE-PRESIDENTS. The President, or, in his absence, one of the Vice Presidents, shall preside at meetings of the Society and Council. The presid- ing officer shall appoint all committees in the Council and in the - Society, unless otherwise ordered. It shall be the duty of the re- tiring President to deliver an address at the second meeting in January. ARTICLE VI. SECRETARIES. ~~ The Secretaries shall take and preserve correct minutes of the proceedings of the Society and Council and a record of the mem- bers, shall conduct its correspondence, give due notice of all meet- ings, and inspect and count all ballots. ARTICLE VII. TREASURER. The Treasurer shall have charge of all money and other property of the Society, and shall make disbursements under the direction lof the Council. He shall collect all fees and assessments, and notify members who may be in arrears. ARTICLE VIII. SECTIONS. Sections for special work in any department of Biology may be formed upon the recommendation of the Council. ARTICLE IX. MEETINGS. Stated meetings shall, unless otherwise ordered, be held on Friday of each alternate week, at eight o’clock P.M. The annual meeting CONSTITUTION. XXIX for the election of officers shall be the first meeting in January. Special and field meetings may be called by the Council. ARTICLE X. As amended February 2, 1883. FEES. The initiation fee shall be one dollar; the annual fee two dollars. Members in arrears for one year shall, after due notification by the Treasurer, be dropped from the rolls, except in the case of those absent from the city for a year or more, who may be retained on the list as non-resident members during their absence. No member in arrears shall be entitled to vote at the annual meeting for the © election of officers. | ARTICLE XI. AMENDMENTS TO THE CONSTITUTION. ; / The constitution of the Society may be amended by a two-thirds vote of the members present at any regular meeting, after at least four weeks’ notice. ARTICLE XII. ORDER OF BUSINESS. The order of business at each regular meeting, unless otherwise provided by the Council, shall be as follows: I. Reading of minutes. II. Reports of Committees. III. Balloting for members. IV. Nominations for membership. V. Miscellaneous business. VI. Reading of papers, discussions and exhibition of specimens. Article XII may be suspended at any time by a two-thirds vote of the members present. PROCEEDINGS. THIRTY-SECOND MEETING, October 13, 1882. The President occupied the chair. Thirty-two members were present. Both secretaries being absent, Dr. Tarleton H. Bean was designated Secretary pro tempore. General William Birney, Chairman of the Committee on the Admission of Women to Membership in the Society, submitted a report in the form of the following resolution : *‘ Resolved, In view of the fact that this Society has not prescribed scientific attainments as a qualification for membership, it is inexpedient at present to de- clare women eligible; but, if it should hereafter prescribe such qualifications, there is no sufficient reason for their exclusion.” On motion of Prof. Riley, the report was adopted and the Com- mittee discharged. Mr. Frederick W. True read a paper ON THE BITE OF THE CoRAL SNAKE,* describing the effects of the attack of one of the specimens in the National Museum upon Mr. A. Z. Shindler, one of the artists in the Museum, and citing the testimony of several correspondents in the southwestern United States. Remarks were made by Professors Ward and Gill. Prof. Theodore Gill read a paper entitled THE RELATIONS OF THE ECHENEIDIDS,f demonstrating the claims of this group of fishes to isolation, not only as a family, but as a suborder, related rather more closely to the Gobioidea and Blennioidea than to the Scombroidea. He characterized the sub- order Discocephai, and the family Echenetdide and sub-family £chz- neidine, and gave a detailed history of the views of ichthyological writers from Artedi to Cope. * 1883. TRUE, FREDERICK W. On the Bite of the North American Coral Snakes (Genus Elaps). <American Naturalist, 1883, pp. 26-31. +1883. GILL, THEODORE. Note on the Relationships of the Echeneidids, <Proceedings U. S. National Museum, V, pp. 561-6, Plate XII, 1883. XXxI XXXII BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Mr. Wm. H. Dall made some remarks on CLUSTER FLIEs,* ex- hibiting specimens of Musca rudis from Geneva, N. Y., where, for thirty years or more, this fly has been regarded as a household pest in the spring and fall, when it gathers in swarms in the corners of apartments in country houses. TuirtTy-THIRD MEETING, October 27, 1882. The President occupied the chair. Thirty-eight members were present. The President announced the presentation to the Society by Dr. John J. Mason of his work entitled MINUTE STRUCTURE OF THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM OF CERTAIN REPTILES AND BATRACHIANS OF AMERICA. Mr. Goode, on behalf of the Council, announced his intention of proposing at the second meeting from date, the following amend- ment to the Constitution : : Section X to be amended so as to read, ‘“‘ Members in arrears for one year shall, after due notification by the Treasurer, be dropped from the rolls, except in the case of those absent from the city for one year or more, who may be re- tained on the list as non-resident members during their absence.’’ + A committee, consisting of Messrs. Goode, Gill, Mason, Ward, True, and Rathbun, was appointed to arrange for courses of lectures, similar to the Saturday lectures of the previous season. Mr. Wm. H. Dall made a few remarks in extension of his paper on the ‘‘ Cluster Fly,’’ presented at the previous meeting, and read a letter from Professor C. V. Riley in relation to its name and geo- graphical distribution.* Dr. W. S. Barnard made a communication upon the subject of ECTOPARASITIC TREMATODES, describing two species believed to be new, for which, however, no names were proposed. Mr. W. P. Conant made some remarks upon Two CasEs OF SNAKE BITE IN MASSACHUSETTS, relating instances in which the bites of unknown species of snakes had been attended by very serious results. * 1883. Dati, W. H. Note on Cluster Flies. < Proceedings U. S. National - Museum, V, pp. 635-7, 1883. Includes a letter from C. V. Riley. + This amendment was adopted at the meeting of February 2, 1883. PROCEEDINGS. XXXII Mr. Frederick W. True read a paper ON THE CINNAMON, BEAr,* exhibiting a specimen recently received by the National Museum from Lycoming county, Pennsylvania. He quoted the opinions of several authorities as to the relationship of this form to the black bear, but did not express a decided personal opinion. He also ex- hibited the skin of a young black bear from Alaska, with a broad white ring around the neck. TuHIRTY-FouRTH MEETING, November to, 1882. The President occupied the chair. Forty-two members were present. Mr. True announced that he had in preparation a paper on the mammals of the District of Columbia, and requested information concerning rare forms and concerning the dates when deer and other mammals became extinct in the District. Professor Chickering read a paper on THE ‘‘BaLpDS’”’ OF THE SOUTHERN MOUNTAINS. Dr. George Vasey made a communication on the PINE TREES OF NortH AMERICA, which was discussed a Mr. Dall, Dr. Schaeffer, and Prof. Gill. Mr. John A. Ryder read a paper on THE RATIONALE OF THE So-CALLED FATTENING PROCESS IN THE OysTER;7 and in his re- marks explained the cause of the green color in certain oysters es- pecially prized by oyster eaters in Europe. Tuirty-FirtH MEETING, November 24, 1882. The President occupied the chair. Forty-four members were present. Professor Lester F. Ward read a letter from Doctor Edward Foreman, suggesting the importance of the appointment of a com- * 1883. TRUE, FREDERICK W. On a Cinnamon Bear from Pennsylvania. <(Proceedings U. S. National Museum, V, pp. 653-6, 1883. 71881. RypeER, JOHN A. An account of Experiments in Oyster Culture and observations relating thereto, etc. < Report of T. B. Ferguson, a Maryland Commissioner of Fisheries, for 1881, Appendix A, pp. 1-64. Also in A Contribu- tion to the Life History of the Oyster. <The Fishery Industries of the United States, pp. 711-750, 1885. 2% a XXXIV BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. mittee to take action looking toward the preparation of a list of the trees and shrubs growing in the streets, parks, cemeteries, and other public grounds of the District of Columbia. In accord- ance with the suggestions in this letter, the following committee was appointed to act in co-operation with the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution in the preparation of such a list: Prof. Lester F. Ward, Dr. George Vasey, Mr. Wm. R. Smith, Dr. F. B. Hough, and Dr. Edward Foreman. Dr. Elliott Coues read a paper on THE PRESENT STATUS OF THE AVIFAUNA OF THE DIsTRICT OF COLUMBIA,* presenting extracts from the new list of the birds of the District, just compiled by himself and Dr. D. W. Prentiss. ‘The total number of species of birds now known to occur in the District is 248, 23 having been added to the list since 1862. ; Prof. C. V. Riley made remarks upon JUMPING SEEDS AND GaLts,f and exhibited specimens of the so-called ‘‘ Mexican jump- ing seeds’’ or ‘‘ devil-beans,’’ the seeds of a Euphorbia-like plant, in the interior of which are the larve of a species of moth, Caro- capsa saltitans, which, by their uneasy motions, cause peculiar twitching movements of the seeds. He also showed a peculiar gall from the under side of the leaves of various oaks of the white oak group, which is moved in a similar manner by the larve of a species of Cynips, Cyzips saltatorius, which lives curled up within it. Dr. Thomas Taylor spoke on the PEAR-TREE BLIGHT, its cause and prevention, illustrating his remarks with specimens. Prof. Lester F. Ward presented a paper on ADDITIONS MADE To THE FLORA COLUMBIANA DURING THE SEASON OF 1882, exhibit- ing specimens of 27 species of plants added to the flora of the Dis- trict of Columbia. 3 * Included in— 1883. Cougs, ELLIOTT, and D. WEBSTER PRENTISS. Avifauna Columbiana ; being a list of birds ascertained to inhabit the District of Columbia, &c. <Bulle- tin U. S. National Museum, No. 26. 8° pp. 133, 4 maps. + 1883. RILEY, CHARLES V. Jumping Seeds and Galls. < Proceedings U. S. National Museum, V, pp. 632-635, with one cut, 1883. £1884. Warp, LEsTER F. List of plants added to the Flora of Washington from April 1, 1882, to April 1, 1884. <Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, II, pp. 84-87, 1882-4. Extras, April 10, 1884. PROCEEDINGS. XXXV The President announced the proposal to publish a second edi- tion of Vol. I of the Proceedings of the Biological Soctety, should a sufficient number of subscriptions for copies of the same be made.* ‘Tuirty-SixTH MEETING, December 8, 1882. The President occupied the chair. Thirty-seven members were present. The President announced that the Lecture Committee had ar- ranged for a course of Saturday lectures to young people, as fol- lows: December 16, 1882: Prof. O. T. Mason. The Circle of the Sciences. ; December 23, 1882: Mr. Witttam H. Dati. Ocean Currents. December 30, 1882: Mr. FREDERICK W. TRUE. Swimming Quadrupeds. January 6, 1883: Prof. J. W. CHICKERING, Jr. The Grasses, Prof. L. F. Ward stated that the committee appointed at the last meeting to preparé a list of the trees and shrubs growing in the streets, parks, cemeteries, and other public grounds of the District of Columbia had held a meeting and apportioned the work. Prof. J. W. Chickering, Jr., being called to the chair, Prof. Gill discussed THE CHARACTERS AND RELATIONS OF THE STROMATEIDZ.} Dr. D. W. Prentiss followed with remarks on CHANGES PRo- DUCED IN THE BrirD FAUNA OF THE DisTRICT OF COLUMBIA BY MODIFICATION OF ITS ‘TOPOGRAPHY.{ * A supplementary edition of 100 copies was eventually printed at the cost of the Society. 7 1884. GILL, THEODORE. Notes on the Stromateide. <Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., 1884, pp. 664-72. t Included in— Cougs and PRENTIss. Avifauna Columbiana, already cited. XXXVI BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. THIRTY-SEVENTH MEETING, December 22, 1882. The President occupied the chair. Thirty-four members were present. Dr. T. H. Bean read a paper ON THE OCCURRENCE OF THE ALE- WIFE IN CERTAIN LAKES OF NEw York.* The alewife (Clupea vernatlis) which is identical with the branch herring of the Potomac, has been observed in immense numbers in Lake Ontario, and Cay- uga and Seneca Lakes, New York—its first appearance having been in 1873. It is supposed to have been accidentally introduced by fish-culturists when planting young shad. In the discussion of this paper Messrs. Smiley, Barnard, True, Ryder, and Goode partici- pated. Mr. Ryder spoke of observations on a supposed hybrid be- tween the shad and the rock-fish. Prof. Riley read a paper on THE LIGNIFIED SERPENT OF BrRa- ZIL,t a curious object lately discussed in scientific journals in France and the United States, and pronounced by M. Olivier, a French savant, to be an actual serpent converted into woody tissue. This he demonstrated to be a woody formation developed in the burrow of the larva of a wood-boring insect, which, by some slight artificial changes, had been made to resemble a serpent still more than in its original condition. : THIRTY-EIGHTH MEETING, January 5, 1883. (Third Annual Meeting. ) The President occupied the chair. Sixty-six members were present. The following board of officers was elected : Prestdent—Prof. C. A. WuitE. * 1884. BEAN, TARLETON H. On the Occurrence of the Branch Alewife in Certain Lakes of New York. <The Fishery Industries of the United States. Part I. pp. 588-593. +1883. RiLey, CHARLES V. The Lignified Serpent of Brazil. <(Washing- ton Evening Star, Jan. 20, 1883; Sctentific American Supplement, Feb. 17, 1883, and various other journals. PROCEEDINGS. XXXVII Vice-Presidents—Prof. THEODORE GILL, Prof. C. V. Ritry, Prof. L. F. Warp, Mr. Wiiuiam H. DALL. Secretartes—Mr, G. Brown Goopeg, Mr. RIcHARD RATHBUN. Treasureyr—Dr. TARLETON H. BEAN. Counct/—Prof. O. T. Mason, Dr. GEORGE Vasey, Dr. D, WeEs- STER PRENTISS, Mr. FREDERICK W. TRUE, Dr. ELLIoTTr Cougs. SATURDAY LECTURES, 1883. The second regular course of Saturday Lectures, under the au- spices of the Biological Society and the Anthropological Society, was begun January 13, 1883, and the following programme was carried out: January 17: Capt. C. E. Durron, U.S. A. On Rivers, January 20” Prof. O.'T. Mason. The Races of Men. January 27: Mr. GEORGE KENNAN. Mountains and Mountain- eers of the Caucasus. february 3: Dr. D. W. PRENTIss. Mesmerism in Animals. February ro: Prof. THEoDoRE GiLt. Mythical Animals, | February 17: Dr. JOHN S. Bittincs, U.S. A. Germs and Epi- demics. February 24: Prof. LESTER F, Warp. The Plant Life of the Globe, past and present. March 3: Mr. Witttam H. Datu. Pearls and Pearl Fisheries. March ro: Major J. W. Powett. Indian Mythology. March 17: Prof. C. V. Ritey. Adaptation and Interdepend- ence between Plants and Insects. March 24: Prof.C. A. Wuite. The Teachings of Paleontology. March 31: Dr. RoBert FLETCHER, U. S. A. Human Propor- tion in Art and Anthropometry. : Tuirty-NINTH MEETING, January 19, 1883. Thirty-one members were present. Professor C. A. White, the newly-elected President, took the chair, and, after a few remarks, introduced the retiring President, XXXVITI BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Professor Theodore Gill, who delivered an address upon THE Priw- CIPLES OF ZOOGEOGRAPHY.* The attendance being small, upon motion of Mr. Goode, it was voted that action upon the pending constitutional amendment be deferred until the next meeting. ForTiETH MEETING, February 2, 1883. The President occupied the chair. Forty-three members were present. Article X of the Constitution was amended to read as follows, the changes made being indicated by italics : .ARTICLE X. FEES. The initiation fee shall be one dollar; the annual fee, ¢zwo dollars. Members in arrears for one year shall, after due notification by the Treasurer, be dropped from the rolls, except in the case of those absent from the city for one year or more, who may be retained on the list as non-resident members during their absence. No member in arrears shall be entitled to vote at the annual meeting for the elec- tion of officers. In the discussion of the address delivered by the retiring Presi- dent, Professor Gill, at the last meeting, Prof. Ward, Mr. Dall, Prof. White, and Mr. Elliott participated, and Prof. Gill spoke at some length in continuation of it. Dr. Elliott Coues read a paper upon ZOOLOGICAL NOMENCLATURE APPLIED TO HISTOLOGY. Forty-First MEETING, February 16, 1883. The President occupied the Chair. Forty members were present. In the discussion of the paper on Zoological Nomenclature Ap- * Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, Vol. II, pp. 1-40, 1882-84. Extras printed, with cover and title page, as follows: The | Principles of Zoogeography, | A Presidential Address | delivered at the | Third Anniversary Meeting of the Bio- logical Society | of Washington, January 19, 1883, | by | Theodore Gill, A. M., M. D., Ph. D., | Member of the National Academy of Sciences, &c., &c. | * * *| Washington, D. C. | Judd & Detweiler, Printers. | 1884. 8vo. 40 pp. PROCEEDINGS. XXXIX plied to Histology, presented by Dr. Coues at the previous meeting, Mr. N. P. Scudder led with a paper on BIOLOGY AND CLASSIFICA- TION, Mr. John A. Ryder read a paper ON THE STRUCTURES OF PROTO- PLASM AND KARYOKYNESIS.* ForTy-SECOND MEETING, March 2, 1883. The President occupied the chair. Forty-three members present. Prof O. T. Mason read a paper on THE HUMAN FAUNA OF THE District OF CoLumsiA, and Dr. M. G. Ellzey spoke on Hysrip STERILITY, being a plea against the hypothesis of evolution. Forty-THirD MEETING, March 16, 1883. The President occupied the chair. Fifty members were present. — Dr. Ellzey’s paper, presented at the last meeting, was discussed by Mr. Henry W. Elliott and others. Mr. Orville A. Derby, Curator of the Geological Department of the National Museum of Brazil, under the title of BroLocicaL NOTES FROM BRAZIL, gave an account of the present condition of biological science in that country. Remarks were made by Messrs. White and Elliott. Lieut. Francis Winslow, U. S. N., read a short paper on THE GIANT CLAMS OF THE PaciFic,f exhibiting specimens. * 1882. RYDER, JOHN A. Observations on the absorption of the yelk, the food, feeding, and development of embryo fishes, comprising some investigations conducted at the Central Hatchery, Armory Building, Washington, D. C., in 1882. <Bulletin U.S. Fish Commission, II, pp. 179-205, 1882. (XII—Specific character of protoplasm, pp. 202-205.) ¢ 1883. WINsLOow, FRANCIS. Catalogue of the Economic Mollusca. <De- scriptive Catalogues of the Collections sent from the United States to the Inter- national Fisheries Exhibition, London, 1883. Bull. U. S. National Museum, No. 27, Part D, pp. 185-270, 1883. XL BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Mr. John A. Ryder showed some microscopical sections of her- maphroditic oysters.* A specimen of a fossil log of the Cretaceous age, showing the borings of a ship-worm, was exhibited by the President, and re- marks upon similar borings in recent times were made by Mr. A. B. Johnson. Mr. George P. Merrill exhibited a nodule and microscopic section of carbonate of iron (Siderite) occurring in coal. : Mr. Hornaday read a paper on THE MENTAL CAPACITY OF THE ELEPHANT,+ which was discussed by Messrs. Ward, Elliott, and Mason. Forty-FourTH MEETING, March 30, 1883. The President occupied the chair. Thirty-eight members were present. Mr. Newton P. Scudder made a communication upon THE LENGTH OF THE HATCHING PERIOD OF THE DOMESTIC FowL. In the experiments which he made, the period varied from 17 to 21 days. Remarks were made upon the paper by Messrs. Hough, Ellzey, Mason, and Schaeffer. Dr. Thomas Taylor read a paper upon A NEw ParasITE IN FowLs OF THE NATURE or TRICHINA,{ and also made some remarks upon SECTION CUTTING AND THE MounTING oF Harp Woops, which were supplemented by Dr. F. B. Hough, who exhibited sections of woods prepared in Japan and Germany. Mr. F. A. Lucas exhibited drawings showing the results of acci- dents upon the bones of wild animals. Mr. Frederick W. True ex- hibited bones of the extinct arctic sea-cow, Rhytina, collected by Dr. * 1882. RypER, JoHN A. The Microscopic Sexual Characteristics of the American, Portuguese, and Common Edible Oyster of Europe Compared. <Bulletin of the U. S. Fish Commission, II, pp. 205-15, 1882; and Annals and Magazine of Natural History, London, Oct., 1883. +1883. Hornapay, WILLIAM T. The Mental Capacity of the Elephant. <Popular Science Monthly, August, 1883, pp. 497-509. $1883. TayLor, THomAs. Internal Parasites in Domestic Fowls. <De- partment of Agriculture, Washington, 1884, 5 pp. ; Proc. Am. Micro. Soc., 1883. PROCEEDINGS. XLI Leonard Stejneger, a member of the Society, and recently received from Bering Island. Prof. Chickering read a paper upon THE PHYSICAL FEATURES OF MOUNT KATAHDIN. Forty-FirtH MEETING, April 13, 1883. The President occupied the chair. Thirty-six members were present. The Committee on Field Meeting reported favorably upon hold- ing such a meeting at Bladensburg, April 28th, and upon inviting ladies to attend. ‘The report was accepted by the Society. Prof. Lester F. Ward presented a communication upon THE Hysrip Oaks OF THE District OF CoLuMBIA. Numerous pressed leaves were exhibited. Mr. B. F. Johnson presented a note upon THE MODE IN WHICH THE GARTER SNAKE CLIMBS UPON A SMOOTH VERTICAL SURFACE, representing it as somewhat similar to that in which a man climbs. The movement is not aspiral one. The note was commented upon by Messrs. Baker, Schaeffer, Gill, Mason, and Taylor. Prof. C. V. Riley made a communication upon THE Bac Worm, THYRIDOPTERYX EPHEMERFORMIS,* which is abundant in the Dis- trict of Columbia and elsewhere. Mr. F. W. True made a few remarks upon A Parasitic WorM | FOUND IN THE EGG OF A COMMON HEN. Dr. Thomas Taylor presented a communication upon PARASITIC MITEs IN THE LUNG-CAVITIES AND TissuES OF DoMEsTIC FowLs.f In the discussion which followed, Messrs. Ward and Riley parti- cipated. Specimens were exhibited with the two latter communi- cations. Forty-SixtH MEETING, April 27, 1883. The President occupied the chair. Thirty members were present. Prof. C. V. Riley exhibited specimens of A Mexican Jump- * Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, vol. II, 1882-84, pp. 80-83. Extras, April 10, 1884. + See citation at foot of page XL. XLII BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. ING SEED, and also made REMARKS UPON BEE-FLyY LARV# AND THEIR SINGULAR HABITS, and upon a BURROWING BUTTERFLY Larva. Mr. H. H. Birney read a paper upon THE AILANTHUS MoTH, Samia CyNnTHIA, which was discussed by Messrs. Riley and Mann, ~ Dr. Frank Baker read a paper upon THE ORIGIN OF DEXTRAL PREFERENCE IN Man. It was discussed by Messrs, King, Ellzey, Ward, Mason, Toner, Mann, Gill, and Riley. FIELD MEETING AT BLADENSBURG, April 28, 1883. A field meeting was held at Bladensburg, Maryland, and was attended by a number of members of the Society. ForTY-SEVENTH MEETING, May 11, 1883. The President occupied the chair. Twenty-two members were present. Prof. Ward made a communication entitled NoTES ON SOME HITHERTO UNDESCRIBED FossIL PLANTS FROM THE LOWER YELLOW- STONE AND COLLECTED By Dr. C. A. WHITE IN 1882.* Mr. True made remarks upon A NEw Picmy SPERM WHALE FROM THE NEw JERSEY Coast,t which he proposed to name Kogia Goodet. Dr. Thomas Taylor offered a communication ON ACTINOMYKOSIS, a new infectious disease in man and the lower animals, and ex- hibited specimens of the fungus Act#zomyces, from the viscera of a diseased dog. The discussion was adjourned to the next meeting. Forty-EIGHTH MEETING, May 25, 1883. Prof. Theodore Gill, Vice-President, occupied the chair. Twenty members were present. Dr. Thomas Taylor continued his remarks upon a recently dis- * This paper will be incorporated with a forthcoming report to the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey. 71883. True, FREDERICK W. A New Sperm Whale (Xogia Goodet). <Science, I, p. 470, 1883. PROCEEDINGS. XLIII covered and very dangerous disease, known as Actinomykosis, which affects domestic animals. Dr. D, E. Salmon read a paper on the same disease. The com- munications called forth an animated discussion, in which Drs. Taylor, Salmon, Schaeffer, and others participated. The Society then adjourned, subject to call by the President in October, Forty-NinTH MEETING, October 19, 1883. The President occupied the chair. Thirty-five members were present. . Prof. Theodore Gill presented a communication on THE IcuTHy- OLOGICAL RESULTS OF THE EXPLORATIONS OF THE U. S, FisH Com- MISSION STEAMER ‘‘ ALBATROSS’’ IN 1883.* He called attention to a number of new fishes, including two representatives of new orders, for which he proposed the names Lyomeri and Gnathenchelyi. Dr. C. A. White made some remarks upon THE CHARACTER AND FUNCTION OF THE EPIGLOTTIS OF THE BULL SNAKE (PITYOPHIS).T Prof. Lester F. Ward exhibited an interesting botanical relic of the District of Columbia, consisting of the original minutes of the Proceedings of the Washington Botanical Society, which became extinct in 1835. Prof. C. V. Riley read a paper on MANNA IN THE UNITED STATES, and exhibited and remarked upon some specimens of a kind of Manna recently received from Chewelah, Washington Territory. This communication was discussed by Messrs. Taylor, Schaeffer, Vasey, Toner, and Ward. FirTIETH MEETING, November 2, 1883. The President occupied the chair. Forty members were present. * The substance of this communication was published in three papers in Forest & Stream, 1883, and in other papers in the American Naturalist and the Proceed- ings of the U. S. National Museum. + 1884. WHITE, CHARLES A. On the Character and Function of the Epi- glottis in the Bull Snake (Pityophis). <American Naturalist, X VIII, pp. 19-21, 1884. XLIV BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Dr. G. M. Sternberg, U.S. A., of San Francisco, read a paper On Micrococct.* Dr. E. M. Schaeffer made some remarks upon Manna, in continu- ance of those made by Prof. Riley at the previous meeting. He also exhibited specimens of a possibly new variety or species of Ceratophyllum. Dr.'T. H. Bean exhibited a curious specimen of a species of flounder, Paralichthys dentatus, and spoke of ARRESTED ASYMMETRY IN FLOUNDERS. Prof. L. F. Ward related the result of his investigations of a sup- posed deposit of fossil timber on the site of the new ‘‘ Casino,’’ in process of erection on Connecticut avenue. Firty-First MEETING, November 16, 1883. The President occupied the chair. Forty-five members were present, . Prof. L. F. Ward read a paper on MEsozoic DicoTyLEDONSs. + Mr. C. D. Walcott presented a communication on FRESH-WATER _ SHELLS FROM THE LOWER CARBONIFEROUS, illustrating his remarks with specimens. Mr, Frederick W. True exhibited a specimen of THE West In- DIAN SEAL, MONACHUS TROPICALIS, recently received by the National Museum, and discussed the history of the specimen and the affinities of the species. Dr. C. A. White narrated an incident of his experience as an explorer in the Upper Missouri Valley, illustrative of THE PrEr- SISTENCE OF THE DomEstic INSTINCT IN THE CaT.§ An animated * STERNBERG, GkoRGE M. _ Bacteria. | By | Dr. Antoine Magnin, | Licen- tiate of Natural Science, * * * |and | George M. Sternberg, M. D., F. R. M. S., | Major and Surgeon, U. S. Army ; Member of the Biological Society of Wash- | ington; late member of the Havana Yellow Fever Commission of the | National Board of Health; | Corresponding Member of the | Epidermological Society of London, etc. | New York: | William Wood & Company, | 56 and 58 Lafayette Place. | 1884. 8vo. pp. XVIII, 9-494. 7 1884. WARD, LesTER F. Mesozoic Dicotyledons. <Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 3d Ser., XX VII, pp. 292-303, 1884; Annals and } beg: Nat. Hist., Lon- don, 5th Ser., XIII, pp. 383-396, 1884. { 1883. WatLcoTt, CHARLES D. Fresh-water Shells from the Paleozoic Rocks of Nevada. <Science, II, p. 809, 1883. #1884. WHITE, CHARLES A, The Permanence of the Domestic Instinct in the Cat. <American Naturalist, XVIII, pp. 213-14, 1884. PROCEEDINGS. XLV discussion of this incident, and of other topics suggested by it, was participated in by Prof. Riley, Mr. N. P. Scudder, Mr, A. B. John- son, Mr. Benjamin Miller, Prof. Ward, Dr. Toner, and others. Firty-SECOND MEETING, November 30, 1883. The President occupied the chair. Fifty members were present. A letter was read from the Secretary of the Philosophical Society of Washington, inviting the Biological Society to attend the meeting of the Philosophical Society, to be held at the National Museum lecture-hall on the 5th proximo, when the President’s annual ad- dress would be the order for the evening. Dr. Thomas Taylor described O1p1um TUCKERI, THE FUNGUS OF THE FoREIGN GRAPE VINE,** which has of late years been so de- structive to European vineyards, giving an account of his discovery of the highest stages of its fruit on the foreign vines now under cultivation in the U. S. Agricultural grounds. Dr. Frank Baker read an interesting paper entitled THE LocicaL METHOD OF TEACHING ANATOMY,f which elicited much discussion, participated in by Messrs. Seaman, Prentiss, Johnson, Gill, Norris, Schaeffer, Scudder, Cope, and Ward. Prof. Theo. Gill exhibited drawings of a very curious deep-sea fish discovered during the past summer in the North Atlantic, at a depth of about two miles, by the U.S. Fish Commission steamer Albatross. It belonged to a new family, which the speaker has de- nominated the Stephanoberycidz. { The Committee on Lectures announced a provisional programme for the course of Saturday Lectures for 1884, under the auspices of the Anthropological and Biological Societies. Four courses of these lectures were given, consisting of seven- teen lectures, a list of which, as finally arranged, is subjoined. * 1884. TAYLOR, THOMAS. On the Fungus of the Foreign Grape Vine. <(American Microscopical Journal, V, p. 5, 1884. 7 1884. BAKER, FRANK. The Rational Method of Teaching Anatomy. <(Medical Record, N. Y., April 19, 1884; also as extra, 16°, pp. 20, with special title. $1884. GILL, THEODORE. Three new families of fishes added to the deep- sea fauna ina year. <American Naturalist, XVII, p. 433, 1884. XLVI BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. January 5: Mr. GRoveE K,. GiLpert. Cliffs and Terraces, January 12: Prof. Oris T. Mason. Child Life among arrer and Uncivilized Peoples. January 79: Prof. Epwarp S. Morse. Social Life among the Japanese. January 26: Major J. W. PoweLtt. Win-tun Mythology. February 2: Prof. F. W. Ciarkxe. Lightning and Lightning- Rods. February 9: Capt. C. E. Dutron, U.S. A. The Hawaiian Islands and People. February 16: Prof. E. D. Core, The Origin of Human Physi- ognomy. February 23: Mr. JOHN Murvocu. Eskimo Life at Point Bar- row. March 1: Prof. Harvey W. Witey. The Sugar Industry of the North. March 8: Prof. Simon NeEwcoms. Psychic Force. March 15: Mr. Joun A. Ryper. Protoplasm in the Light of Recent Investigations. March 22: Dr. FRANK Baker. The New Phrenology. March 29: Capt. C. E. Dutton, U.S. A. Volcanoes, April 5: Prof. T. C. CHAMBERLIN. The Great Ice Invasion of North America. April 12: Dr. W. W. Goppinc. What shall we do with the Ine- briates ? April 19: Prof. J. S. NEwBerry. The Industrial Arts as Factors in Modern History. April 26: Major J. W. PowreLtt. The Cafions of the Colorado. Firty-THIRD MEETING, December 14, 1883. The President occupied the chair. Forty-five members were present. Prof. C. V. Riley presented a paper, read by Dr. Barnard, on the use of NAPHTHALINE AS AN INSECTICIDE,* in discussing which _Dr. Thomas Taylor and Prof. W. S. Barnard participated. .* 1884. RILEY, C. V. The use of Naphthaline as an Insecticide. < Science, IIT, pp. 455-456, 1884. PROCEEDINGS. XLVII Mr. Henry W. Elliott read a paper CONCERNING THE APPETITE OF THE Muskrat,* which was discussed by Dr. Ellzey, Dr. Schaeffer, and others. Dr. R. W. Shufeldt, U.S. A., read a paper on THE PRESENT CONDITION OF THE ANATOMICAL COLLECTIONS OF THE ARMY MEDI- CAL MusEuM. Firty-FouRTH MEETING, December 28, 1883. The President: occupied the chair. Forty-four members were present. | Dr. Thomas Taylor read a paper on NAPHTHALINE AND ITS EFFECTS ON PLANTS, INSECTS, AND OTHER ANIMALS, f exhibiting specimens of plants which had been treated with naphthaline without suffering injury. 7 Dr. W. S. Barnard read a paper on SOME RESULTS BY MASSAGE ET ContRE-Covp.t : Mr. John A. Ryder made a communication on THE STRUCTURE OF THE EGG MEMBRANE IN FISHES. Mr. Romyn Hitchcock exhibited an improved form of microscope stand. FourTH ANNUAL MEETING, January 11, 1884. The fourth annual meeting of the Biological Society took place on Friday evening, January 11. Thirty-five members were present, President White occupying the chair. Prof. Ward gave notice of a proposition to change the days of meeting to the Saturdays alternating with those of the Philosophical Society. * 1884. ExLitiotr, Henry W. The Destruction of Carp by the Muskrat (Fiber zibethicus). Methods of Trapping the Rodent. <Bull. U. S. Fish Commission, IV, pp. 296-7, 1884. +1884. TayLor, THomas. Naphthaline as an Insecticide, etc. 8vo, 6 pp., 1884. t Proc. Biol. Soc., Washington, II, p. 116, 1882-84. XLVIII BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. The Society then proceeded to ballot for the election of officers for the ensuing year, with the following result : President—Dr,. C. A. WHITE. Vice-Presidents—Mr. W. H. Dati, Prof. L. F. Warp, Prof. THEODORE GILL, Prof. C. V. RILEy. Secretartes—Mr. G. Brown Goong, Mr. RicHarD RATHBUN. Treasurer—Dr, TARLETON H. BEAN. Members of Counciti—Prof. O. T. Mason, Dr. GEorGE Vasey, Mr, F. W. True, Dr. D. WEBSTER PRENTiss, Mr. JoHN A. RYDER. Firry-Srxtu MEETING, January 25, 1884. The Fourth Anniversary Meeting of the Society was held Janu- ary 25, on which occasion a large number of guests of the Society, members of the Philosophical and Anthropological Societies, and others, were present, by invitation, in the lecture-room of the National Museum. Dr. White read the presidential address, the topic dis- cussed being CERTAIN PHASES IN THE GEOLOGICAL HISTORY OF NortTH AMERICA, BIOLOGICALLY CONSIDERED,* and was listened to with great pleasure and interest. The Presidents and Vice-Presi- dents of the Philosophical and Anthropological Societies occupied seats on the stage. ‘The speaker was introduced by Dr. J. C. Welling, President of the Philosophical Society. At the close of the address a vote of thanks was moved by Major J. W. Powell, President of the Anthropological Society. Firty-SEVENTH MEETING, February 8, 1884. The President occupied the chair. Thirty-six members were present. * Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, II, pp. sy sake 1882-84. Extras printed, with cover and title page, as follows: Certain Phases | in the | Geological History of the North American | Conti- nent, Biologically Considered. | By | Charles A. White, A. M., M. D., | Paleon- tologist to the U. S. Geological Survey, Honorary Curator of the Depart | ment of Fossil Invertebrates in the U. S. National Museum. | Presidential address, | delivered at the | Fourth Anniversary Meeting of the Biological Society | of Washington, January 25,1884. | * * * | Washington: | Judd & Detweiler, _printers. | 1884. 8vo. 26 pp. PROCEEDINGS. XLIX Mr. William T. Hornaday read a paper on THE GuUACHARO BirD OF TRINIDAD, Steatornis caripensis, in which he said that this strange bird was sometimes found breeding in almost inaccessible caverns opening on the sea, at the northwestern point of the island of Trinidad, in one of which, a large dome-like cave, he had found about two hundred birds. The guacharo was, perhaps, the only frugiverous bird of purely nocturnal habits, and was closely allied to the goat-suckers. The young birds have a thick layer of fat on the abdominal region, which yields a clear, transparent oil of great purity, highly esteemed by the natives for cooking pur- poses. The nest of the guacharo, the speaker said, resembled a . small brown cheese, slightly hollowed on the top, being composed of the undigested remains of fruit firmly adhering together. Mr. G. Brown Goode read a paper on THE AIMS AND LimITa- TIONS OF MODERN FisH-CuLTuRE.* Modern fish-culture he defined to be fish-culture carried on under government patronage upon an extensive scale, under the direction of men trained to scientific research, as distinguished from the old and insignificant method of fish-culture carried on by private enterprise. Its aims were shown to be, (1) to arrive at a complete understanding of the life histories of useful aquatic animals and the conditions under which they live; _ and (2) to apply this knowledge so thoroughly that all fishes shall be brought as completely under control as are now the shad, the salmon, the carp, and the whitefish. The limitations of fish-culture were shown to be the same as those of scientific stock-rearing or agriculture. In the discussion which followed, Prof. L. F. Ward remarked that he had been interested in the paper especially on account of the broad general principles in political economy which had been shown to underlie the subject discussed ; that the lessons which the United States, by means of its participation in the London Fish- eries Exhibition and its successes in the field of fish-culture, had taught to Europe, and especially to Great Britain, were of great importance. Political economists of the Manchester school need to be shown in just such a way as this that the policy of State con- * GoopE, G. Brown. Article “ Pisciculture.” <Encyclopedia Britannica, Vol. XIX, 1885. L BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. trol and management for large enterprises, involving large outlays of money, is the only policy which can be successfully carried out. Mr, C. W. Smiley stated that, in spite of shad-hatching having been prosecuted with increasing vigor annually since 1874, the number brought into the Washington market had decreased from 521,368 in 1881, to 350,292 in 1882, and 261,474 in 1883. But for fish-culture the decrease would have been enormously greater. He affirmed that we are yet ignorant of many essential elements of fish propagation, and only the highest scientific ability can discover them, Dr. T. H. Bean, referring to Mr. Smiley’s statement, said that it was manifestly unfair that fish-culture should be expected to do more than nature could do in keeping up the supply of fish in any body of water; that there were many things for the fish-culturist to do besides the planting of young fish; that the pollution of streams and the artificial obstructions, such as dams, must first be removed, and that in interpreting the results of fish-culture, ques- tions of temperature, freshets, and other natural disturbances of ordinary conditions upon the breeding grounds of fishes, should be taken into account. Dr. T. H. Bean exhibited a specimen of pipe-fish, Siphostoma, sp., which showed an augmented development of fins, the super- numerary fin being post-anal, and much more developed than the ordinary rudimentary anal of the male Szphostoma. In size and general appearance it resembled more nearly a caudal fin, but from its position it must be called post-anal. In the Lophobranchiates he believed that the vertical fins are not developed from an embry- onic fin-fold, as is the case in most fishes. This example was to be considered as an illustration of a reversion to a former condition of fishes of this type, in which they did possess at one stage of their existence an embryonic fin-fold. Mr. Ryder remarked that the specimen of Szphostoma with super- numerary anal fin was. certainly an example of the restoration towards the ancestral form. Its presence might be explained on the supposition that the fin-fold, which is continuous in the embryo, had been exaggerated into development at this particular point, and mesoblastic tissue thrust out in the process of development into the fold itself, thus furnishing the rudiments upon which there was PROCEEDINGS. LI an attempt to again return to the ancient isocercal form of the vertical fins, | ; Mr. C. D. Walcott exhibited a specimen of trilobite, Asaphus platycephalus, in which twenty-six pairs of legs were plainly seen, no mouth parts being visible. These were shown by a drawing illustrating Mr. Walcott’s restoration of the mouth appendages of the trilobite, as published by him in the Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Vol. VIII, No. 10, 1881. The specimen was the same as that described by Prof. Mickleborough, of Cincin- nati.* Mr, Walcott also showed a specimen of metamorphic rock having a granitic structure and containing fossil corals, probably of the Devonian age. : Prof. L. F. Ward moved that the meeting day of the Society be changed to Saturday. After remarks by Dr. Baker, Dr. Coues, and others, the motion was carried by a unanimous vote. Firty-E1GHTH MEETING, February 23, 1884. The esident occupied the chair. Thirty-six members were present. | Dr. Elliott Coues read a paper on THE PRESENT STATE or NorTH AMERICAN ORNITHOLOGY. In discussing the precontemporaneous history of the subject, he spoke of the following epochs :— : (1) The Archaic (prior to 1700); (2) the Pre-Linnzan (1700- 1758); (3) the Post-Linnean (1758-1800); (4) the Wilsonian (1800-1824); (5) the Audubonian (1824-1853); (6) the Bairdian (1853-18—). A number of periods were also defined as follows: (1) the Lawsonian period (1700-1730), named after Lawson, the author of the first American faunal list, that for North Carolina; (2) the Catesbian period (1730-1748), named after Mark Catesby, the first to publish an illustrated work on American birds; (3) the Edwardsian period (1748-1758), named after George Edwards, whose great work on birds was founded largely upon American material ; (4) the Linnean period (1758-1766), the period during which the binomial nomenclature was being developed; (5) the * 1884. Watcotr, CHARLES D, Appendages of the Trilobite. <Science, III (No. 57), pp. 279-81, 1884. LII BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Forsterian period (1766-1785), named for George Reinbold Forster, who was the first to publish a catalogue of the birds of North America, and who also first published a special paper on a collec- tion of American birds sent to Europe; (6) the Pennantian period (1785-1791), marked by the labors of Pennant and Latham; (7) the Bartramian period (1791-1799), named for John Bartram, the first resident of America to publish a work on its birds; (8) the Vieillotian period (1800-1808); (9g) the Wilsonian period (1808- 1824), named after the first great American ornithologist; (10) the Bonapartian period (1824-31), during which the impress of science was laid upon the woodland genius of Wilson; (11) the Richard- sonio-Swansonian period (1831-2); (12) the Nuttallian period (1832-4), marked by the appearance of the first of American orni- thologists ; (13) the Audubonian period (1834-1853), named after the most brilliant of ornithologists, marked by the publication of what Cuvier called the ‘‘ grandest monument ever erected by art to nature;’’ (14) the Cassinian period (1853-58), named for John Cassin, the best general ornithologist America has known; (15) the Bairdian period. The establishment of the American Ornithologists’ Union, he thought, would probably mark the beginning of a new epoch—one in which the existing intricacies of ornithological nomenclature will, it is hoped, be straightened out. The present is simply a period of transition. Dr. Coues laid before the Society the plate proofs of the forth- coming new edition of his Key to North American Birds. Mr. Walcott having received, since the last meeting of the So- ciety, on February 8, a number of additional specimens of the granitic-like rock containing fossil Stromatopora, corals, plates of crinoid stems, etc., from Litchfield, Maine, exhibited them and said that he was incorrect in calling the rock a granite as it was of sedimentary origin, a plastic rock so changed in the specimens ex- amined that it might be called a conglomerate gneiss. Mr. J. S. Diller stated that he had examined thin sections of the rock under the microscope, which showed it to be chiefly crystalline, and composed almost entirely of quartz and feldspar. These minerals occur as irregular angular grains, which, for the most part, have crystallized in their present position in such a manner as to fill up the whole space. ‘There is but little trace, as far as can be PROCEEDINGS. LIIT seen under the microscope, of the sedimentary character of the rock, The irregular angular quartz grains are clouded with liquid inclusions containing dancing bubbles. The feldspar is in large part plagioclase, for, notwithstanding the alteration, the character- istic striz in polarized light are yet distinct. Distinct silvery scales of muscovite occur sparingly, so that the rock has the composition of a gneiss, which, on account of the distinct quartz fragments it contains, may be called conglomerate gneiss. Mr. G. P. Merrill thought it was premature to decide upon the character of the rock, but that, as far as he had examined it, he agreed with Mr, Diller as to its characters. : Prof. Lester F. Ward exhibited specimens of the ‘‘ diamond willow,’’ a form of Sadx cordata occurring in the Upper Missouri region, distinguished by a great exaggeration of the scars left by the early growth of limbs, which form series of large diamond- shaped cavities in the wood. He also exhibited some remarkable canes carved by the people of that region from saplings of this species, Prof. Seaman advanced the theory that the scars were produced by a fungus or an insect. The following papers were read by title: ; Mr. Rospert Ripcway. Descriptions of some new North Amer- ican Birds. Description of a new American Kingfisher. Note on Psaltriparus grinde Belding. Note on the generic name Calodro- mas.* Mr. LEONHARD STEJNEGER. Diagnoses of new species of Birds from Kamtschatka and the Commander Islands.f Dr. T. H. Bean and Mr. H. C. Dresex. Diagnoses .of three new species of Fishes from the Gulf of Mexico.f Firty-NINTH MEETING, March 8, 1884. The President occupied the chair, and forty-five members were present. Dr. J. H. Kidder, U. S. N., exhibited specimens of Bacillus * Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, II, pp. 89-97. Extras printed April 10, 1884 + Ibid., pp. 97-99. Extras printed April 10, 1884. | {Ibid., pp. 99-100. Extras printed April 10, 1884. ‘ LIV BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. tuberculosis Koch, the dactllus of Phthisis, and summarized the present state of knowledge as to the nature of tuberculésis. Dr. S. M. Burnett stated that tuberculosis frequently occurs spontane- ously in the eye. Dr. D. E. Salmon defended the reputation of Toussaint as the discoverer of mcrococcus in tuberculosis, and remarked that Koch’s dacz//us is not generally admitted to be re- lated to the cause of tuberculosis; that it may or may not be. Dr. Salmon exhibited specimens of infectious tuberculosis in cattle—the omentum as well as the liver, which was much enlarged, and various glands being thickly covered with large tubercles. These animals were short-horn cattle, of well-known pedigree, in which for thirty years no disease had existed. The disease was, therefore, not hereditary. As soon as one steer had become in- fected the others in the herd were taken down with the same dis- ease. No traces of Bacillus tuberculosis had been discovered. Mr. C. W. Smiley read a paper on WHat FisH-CULTURE Has FIRST to ACCOMPLISH,* in which he stated that fish-culture cannot be expected to perform the impossible task of filling the waters. of a continent to overflowing with an inexhaustible supply of fish, but that it will have to put forth the utmost effort to prevent the entire annihilation of the fish supply by the uncontrollable activity of the fishermen. Dr. Bean, Mr. Earll, and Mr. Goode participated in the discus- sion of this paper. Dr. Tarleton H. Bean remarked that, in his opinion, there was no general impression that fish-culture was going to immediately fill the rivers with fish ; that fish-culture never had made such a claim. It did, however, profess to be able to produce fish econom- ically and in greater abundance than could be produced by the natural process; that, furthermore, fish-culture was simply one of a series of means to an end—the object aimed at being the restora- tion of the fisheries; that fish-culture was one of the means for the accomplishment of thatend, In his opinion it was quite as necessary to protect fish as to produce them, for if streams are filled with ob- structions and impurities, no amount of fish-culture could restore the fishery in them. The obstructions must be overcome and the * 1884. SMILEY, CHARLES W. What Fish Culture has first to Accomplish. < Bulletin U. S. Fish Commission, IV, pp. 65-68, 1884. PROCEEDINGS. LV impurities removed, and then the success of fish-culture would be beyond a doubt, as had already been proved by the results accom- plished with the California salmon, and the shad on the Pacific coast. Mr. Earll thought that many enthusiastic fish-culturists had claimed more for the science than could be hoped in the limited time during which it had been carried on, but, on the other hand, he thought that the author of the paper under consideration had gone to the other extreme. Such broad and far-reaching conclu- sions as had been stated in the paper should be based upon the fullest and most reliable information, extending over a number of years. The statistics on which these conclusions were based were, in his opinion, not of this character. The receipts of fish at the Washington market were not reliable as indicating the catch in the Potomac river, and much lessso for the entire Chesapeake basin, which certainly must be taken as a whole when the question of the increase or decrease of the shad is to be considered. The fisheries of this river system had undergone radical changes within the last few years. At one time the fisheries were confined chiefly to the Potomac and Susquehanna, and Washington received a large part of the catch, while now, owing to an enormous development of the fishery interests in the lower Chesapeake, which must necessarily interfere with the catch in those rivers, Norfolk had become an im- portant fishery center, and was receiving immense numbers of shad and other species annually for distribution through the South and West. The introduction of new methods of refrigeration had also enabled the fishermen to send their catch direct to the larger mar- kets without the aid of the Washington dealers. He did not know the source of Mr. Smiley’s statistics of the Sacramento river catch, and was not disposed to question their accuracy, but a recent interview with Mr. A. Booth, the greatest salmon canner of the Pacific coast, had given him quite a different impression. Mr. Booth had assured him that the catch in the Sac- ramento had been almost miraculously increased, owing to the work of the U. S. Fish Commission, within the last few years. When the Fish Commission began work on that river the catch was almost wholly utilized fresh in the San Francisco and Sacramento markets, and a cannery, built by Mr. Booth at that time, had to be closed after one year for want of asupply. In 1882, fifteen large canneries LVI BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. were successfully operated on the same river, and about 30,000 pounds beyond what they were able to utilize were thrown away in a single day. Mr. Earll thought that the time was hardly ripe, and, if it were, the statistics were not available for making such broad generaliza- tions regarding the success or failure of fish-culture. It was grati- fying to know that practical business men like Mr. Booth, who had every opportunity of observation, and had large interests at stake, should already be more than satisfied with the results that had come under their observation, and he thought that it might be confidently expected that within the next few years the catch would be very noticeably increased, though, of course, a limit would ultimately be reached, depending upon the enemies of the species and the food which it could find in its natural surroundings. Col. Marshall McDonald read a paper on THE INFLUENCE oF TEMPERATURE UPON THE MOVEMENTS OF FISH IN RIVERS,* in which the fluctuations of the catch of shad in the Potomac and Susque- hanna rivers for 1881, ’82, and ’83 were explained by reference to the varying temperature of the waters of ocean, bay, and river at the time of their anadromous movements. This paper was illustrated by diagrams. Owing to the lateness of the hour, the Society then adjourned, without discussion. The following paper was read by title: Mr. G. BRown GoobE and Dr. T. H. Bean. A new genus and species of Pediculate Fishes (Hateutella lappa). SIXTIETH MEETING, March 22, 1884. Prof. C. V. Riley, Vice-President, aie tg the chair. Fifty members were present. Col. Marshall McDonald exhibited a chart showing the natural and restricted river distribution of the shad. * 1884. MCDONALD, MARSHALL. Natural Causes Influencing the Move- ments of Fish in Rivers. <(Trans. Amer. Fish-Cultural Association, 13th Meet- ing, 1884, pp. 164-170. + Proc. Biol. Soc., Washington, II, p. 88, 1882-84. PROCEEDINGS. LVII Dr. R. W. Shufeldt, U.S. A., in a paper entitled REMARKS ON THE PATELLA,* described the position of this bone, which he considered to be a true sesamoid, in various forms of mammals and birds. Mr. Romyn Hitchcock exhibited a series of specimens of Orbito- lites, and made some remarks upon the results of the work of Dr. William B. Carpenter, as finally set forth in Vol. VII of the report of H. M. S. ‘‘Challenger.’’f Prof. C. V. Riley presented some PERSONAL REMINISCENCES OF THE LATE Dr. GEORGE ENGELMANN, which were supplemented by remarks from Dr. George Vasey and Prof. Lester F. Ward. Mr. W. H. Dall read a paper ON SOME HyDROCORALLINZ FROM ALASKA AND CALIFORNIA, exhibiting four new species. f Mr. Richard Rathbun exhibited a large mass of coral, Ocudina, sp.» recently obtained from Key West, growing on the end of a crowbar, which, when further studied, would probably yield some clew as to the rate of growth of the species. Dr. M. G. Ellzey spoke on THE PREPOTENCY OF THE MALE PARENT, giving the results of twenty-five years’ experience in breed- ing horses, dogs, and other kinds of live stock, The male parent he believes to be prepotent in the transmission of hereditary traits, except where some extraordinary Circumstance intervened. In the case of hybrids between the horse and the ass, a cross is always marked by prepotency of the ass; and in all crosses of the two species the male is always prepotent. Mr. Dall called attention to the danger of drawing conclusions from observations upon the ex- ternal characters of the products of the union of two species. Dr. Leonhard Stejneger exhibited two finely mounted specimens of the great Kamtschatkan sea eagle, Z’halassoaétus pelagicus ; also a specimen of the bald eagle, Hak@etus leucocephalus, and a speci- men in immature plumage of another species, hypoleucus, supposed to be new, and probably, in the adult state, entirely white under- * 1884. SHUFELDT, ROBERT W. Concerning some of the Forms Assumed by the Patella in Birds. <(Proceedings U. S. National Museum, VII, pp. 324- 31, 1884. 7 1884. HuircHcock, RoMyn. The Causes of Variation. <Amer. Jour. Sci. and Art, XXVIII, p. 49, 1884. { Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, II, pp. 111-115, 1882-84. Extras printed April 28, 1884. LVIII BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. neath. The rivers of Kamtschatka abound greatly in salmon, and eagles are in consequence particularly numerous.* Srxty-First MEETING, April 5, 1884. The President occupied the chair. Forty members were present. The Secretary gave notice of the following amendment to be proposed to the Constitution: that ex-presidents of the ereny shall be ex-officio members of the Council. Dr. Leonhard Stejneger read a paper ON THE SHEDDING OF THE CLAWS IN PTARMIGAN,} exhibiting specimens of Zagopus albus and L. ridgwayi as illustrating his remarks. Some of the specimens had short claws, others long ones, while in others the claws were loose and ready to slip off. ‘The long claws are assumed in summer, and in the winter are supposed to be useful in aiding the birds to walk on the snow—in fact, being similar in action to snow-shoes. He stated that Dr. Coues had observed the same phenomenon in the Lemming, JZyodes. Prof. C, V. Riley remarked that this curious adaptation of structure could doubtless be explained by the Lamarckian idea—that it had probably resulted from a direct need of this animal. Mr. William H. Dall read a paper on THE FIisHERY Exports OF SAN FRANCISCO IN 1883.[ He showed that these consisted of dried shrimps to the value of $82,891, prepared by the Chinese for ex- portation to China and other countries where Chinese congregate, such as Australia and Peru. The shells are used in China as a fertilizer to the value of $26,288. Abalone products were exported to the value of about $26,000, of which about $8,000 is for the dried * 1884. STEJNEGER, LEONHARD. Fra det yderste Césten, II, Andre fjorten Dage i. Kamtschatka. <Naturen, Christiania, VIII, Jan., 1884, pp. 5-10, figure of eagle, p. 7. : | + 1884. STEJNEGER, LEONHARD. On the Shedding of the Claws in the Ptarmigan and Allied Birds. <(American Naturalist, XVIII, Aug., 1884, pp. 774-776. Ibis, London, 5 ser., III, Jan., 1885, pp. 50-52. $1884. Dari, WittiAM H. Notes on Fishing Products exported from San Francisco, Cal., during the year 1883. < Bull. U. S, Fish Commission, IV, pp. 125-8, 1884. PROCEEDINGS. LIX flesh sent to China as food, the shells being sent to England and elsewhere for pearl, Of unspecified shells about $400,000 worth are exported, the total value of invertebrate products being over $570,000. Among other articles specified were canned goods, The value of canned salmon exported was over $2,300,000. The total value of fish products was about $4,000,000. Prof. C. V. Riley made a communication ON THE RUST OF ORANGES. ne The nature of this rust had been carefully studied by the author and also by one of his assistants, Mr. H. G. Hubbard, at Crescent City, Fla. It has always been known and has always given con- cern, It varies from a more or less pronounced stain beneath the cuticle to a rough, deep brown incrustation. When heavily coated, the surface is chapped like that of a russet apple. It may be first noticed when the, fruit is small, or one-third grown (early summer). It rapidly increases in August and September, when the fruit is full grown, and is most noticed when the fruit begins to color, though there is no increase, but rather a decrease, after that time. Rusts are mostly due to fungi, but there is nothing of this kind about the orange rust. The oil cells are depleted and the epithelial cells clogged with brownish resin. The surface is fissured and the rind shrinks, toughens, and loses essential oil. Carefully examined, a rusty orange will be found covered with cast mite skins—thick in summer or fall, less noticeable in winter. The mites themselves will be found on the non-rusted fruit and all over the tree in spring and summer. ‘They are so minute as to be scarcely noticeable singly, but collectively give the green leaf and fruit the appearance of being sprinkled with fine golden dust. Pine pollen is often mis- taken for them, and they, in turn, for the pollen. The attacks of the mite are always followed by rust on the fruit, but on the leaves the mites produce only a dull, tarnished appear- ance, contrasting with the polish of the healthy leaf, and a sure indication of depredation even after the mites have left. The leaves look dry and dusty, with slight loss of color, as from drouth. When the foliage of the tree is bright the oranges are bright. The living mites are not found on rusty oranges; they quit both fruit and leaf, and wander to fresh fields when the oil is depleted or the surface too hardened for their beaks. | LX BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. The mite (Phyzopius oletvorus) is elongate, honey-yellow, 0.14 mm, long, and with two pairs of four-jointed legs, each terminating in a curved spine, with opposing bristles. The eggs are laid singly or in small clusters on the leaves. ‘They are spherical, transparent, with a yellow tinge, and hatch in summer in four days. The cast mite skins adhere, as stated above, to the surface of leaf or fruit. The food of the mite is the essential oil which abounds in the suc- culent parts of citrus plants. It is stationary when feeding, but moves actively, and wanders from one part of the plant to another, especially to new growths. Thousands occur on a single leaf, 75,000 having been computed by Mr. Hubbard in winter time on a leaf averaging fifteen square inches. ‘They are still more nume- rous in summer. Rust rings encircle the fruit much as the ecliptic does the earth. There is a penumbral band between brightest sun and deepest shade, indicating the preference of the mite for such half shade. Frosts kill the mites, but not the eggs. Drouth causes both to dry up. Birds, insects, and especially spiders, are the chief agencies in distributing the mites from place to place. The effect of the mite on the fruit, aside from the rusty appearance, which lowers the market value, is in nowise injurious, as the quality is, if any- thing, improved, and the disposition to rot decreased. The effect on the leaf is to slightly check growth. : The mite is generally distributed in Florida, but not elsewhere. Like most mites affecting growing plants, it is worse on high, dry lands than in low, moist ones. No method of. culture or of manuring—in fact, no method that does not comprehend the true cause, has proved of avail to pre- vent the rust. Wind-breaks and isolation act as preventives, but insecticides are the only remedial agencies ; they must, however, kill mites, eggs, and molting mites. Whale oil soap, one pound to five gallons of water, in early spring before new growth begins, and weaker solutions at frequent intervals, cause the mites to fall to the ground. . Flowers of sulphur is deadly to the active mites, but not to the eggs. Kerosene emulsions, as used against scale-insects, with sulphur added, are the most satisfactory. Dr. E. P. Howland read a paper on Tue Errecr or ANa&s- THETICS ON ANIMALS, explaining the new invention of Paul Bert. PROCEEDINGS. LXI S1xty-SEconD MEETING, April 19, 1884. The President occupied the chair. Forty members were present. Dr. Cyrus Thomas read a paper on THE GROWTH OF TREES AS A MEANS OF DETERMINING THE AGE OF Mounps. The long accepted theory that the age of a tree is indicated by the number of con- centric rings can no longer be considered tenable. ‘The only way of testing this theory is by cutting down trees the age of which is known. This has been done in many instances, which were cited, and the result has been the demonstration of the falsity of the long accepted theory. Mr. John Murdoch made remarks on DREDGING AND MARINE COLLECTING AT PoINT Barrow, detailing his experiences as natu- ralist of the Signal Service Station at that place. Dr. Bean, in a paper on THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE SALMONIDZE IN ALASKA, enumerated the following twenty-one salmonoids as occurring there: Osmerus dentex, Osmerus spirinchus, Mallotus villosus, lypomesus olidus, Hypomesus pretiosus, Thaleichthys pacificus, Thymallus sig- nifer, Stenodus Mackenzit, Coregonus Laurette, Coregonus near Merkii, Coregonus quadrilateralis, Coregonus Kennicottit, Coregonus Nelsonit, Salvelinus malma, Salmo purpuratus, Salmo Gairdnerit, Oncorhynchus chouicha, Oncorhynchus keta, Oncorhynchus nerka, Oncorhynchus kisutch, Oncorhynchus gorbuscha. Osmerus is known to range only from the Bristol Bay region to the extreme northern limit of the Territory. O. dentex is quite similar in appearance to O. eperlanus and O. mordax of the At- lantic. O. spirinchus may be simply the spent condition of dentex. In the region in which they occur the smelts are quite abundant, and are extensively used by the natives for food, both fresh and dried. Mallotus villosus is found in every portion of the Territory, being extensively eaten by the natives, and forming one of the best known foods for the codfish in the Gulf of Alaska. LHypomesus is represented by two species, one of which, ZH. oldidus, is confined to the western shore of Alaska, being most abundant to the northward. 4. pretiosus is known only from the Gulf of Alaska. H. o/idus spawns in fresh-water ponds, while H. pretiosus is a surf spawner. LXII BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Thaleichthys pacificus (the Eulachon) occurs in the Gulf of Alaska at least as far west as Katmai, in Shellikoff Straits, where it is preserved in salt and considered quite a delicacy. The Eulachon literally swarms in the southeastern part of the Territory, and is utilized both in a fresh state and for the manufacture of a fat or oil which the natives use in place of butter, and which has been experimented with as a substitute for cod liver oil. Thymallus is known to occur from the Bristol Bay region to the extreme northern limit of the Territory, abounding in the rapid rivers. It takes the artificial fly quite readily, according to the testimony of Lieut. Schwatka, and is generally considered an ex- cellent food-fish. To the eastward it is known to reach the Mac- kenzie river region. Stenodus might be called the giant white-fish. It reaches 50 pounds in weight, and has been recorded as growing toa length of 5 feet. We have it only from the Yukon river region. It was described, however, from the Mackenzie, and occurs also in the tributaries of that river. It is one of the finest food-fishes of Alaska. The most widely distributed of the species of Coregonus is C. guadrilaterals, which we now have from the Yukon river region southward to Kodiak. C. Laurette is also pretty widely distributed, at least from the Kuskoquim to Point Barrow. The species related to C. Merkit is a small northern form, which is not of much im- portance as a food-fish. C. JVe/sonit is a hump-back species, not important as a food-fish, ranging from the northern limit of the Territory southward to the Yukon, at least, and probably to the Kuskoquim. C. Kennicotti’ ranks next in excellence to Stenodus. It is said to reach 30 pounds in weight, and its range is from the Kuskoquim to the northern limit of Alaska. All the Coregoni are important for food except C. WVelsonii and C. Merkit, sub-species. Salvelinus is abundant throughout the Aleutians and the main- land of Alaska, north to Colville river. In the northern portion of its range it grows to an enormous size, reaching fully 12 pounds in weight. In the sea-run condition it is extensively salted at Ko- diak, and exported as salmon trout. Salmo purpuratus is found in southern Alaska and on the island of Kodiak and Unalashka, It is extremely abundant and attains a weight of 20 pounds. S. Gairdnerit occurs in southern Alaska and PROCEEDINGS. LXIII westward to the Bristol Bay region, It is also known from the islands of Unalashka and Kodiak. It grows to a weight of 30 pounds, and is a very important food-fish. One species of Oxchorhyncus, O. gorbuscha, extends over the whole coast of Alaska northward to Colville river. All the rest extend at least as far as the Yukon river, and one species, O. eta, has been obtained from Hotham Inlet. The Oxchorhynchi are the most important food-fishes of the Territory, and are the most abund- ant. ‘The principal centers of export are Kodiak and Cook’s Inlet. Numerous canneries have sprung up lately in these regions, directing their attention mainly to the red-fish, O. nerka, a salmon whose flesh is beautifully red, but comparatively inferior. The finest of the salmon, O. chouicha, is employed principally for salt- ing, the bellies only being selected for this purpose; the remainder of the fish is made into wha“. Sixty-THIRD MEETING, May 3, 1884. The President occupied the chair. ‘Twenty members were pres- | ent. Prof. Theodore Gill read a paper ON THE SYSTEM OF THE SQUALI. These belong to the Selachians, which constitute a class quite dis- tinct from the fishes and widely separated from the Ganoids. He briefly reviewed the salient structural features of the various repre- sentatives of the order Squali, as well as the history of the classifi- cation of the group, and concluded with the assertion that there appeared to be five principal types of structure manifested in the various forms whose anatomy is more or less satisfactorily known. (1.) The Pternodonta or Selachophichthyoidei are represented by but one known species, lately described by Mr. Garman. Its ana- tomical characteristics are unknown, but will probably be found to be nearly the same as in the succeeding group, Opistharthri. It is distinguished from all other known sharks by the very elongated and almost anguilliform shape as well as by the peculiar teeth, which have long fixed bases and are not reclinable as in most of the other types. It was also predicted that the Pternodonta would probably be found to have the palato-quadrate element articulated LXIV BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. with the posterior portion of the skull behind the orbits, and the vertebral column non-segmented or notochordal. (2.) The Opistharthri are sharks with the palato-quadrate appa- ratus articulated with the post-orbital processes of the skull, and a persistent notochord, inferior mouth, and the branchial apertures in increased numbers. The Notidanide or Hexanchide are the - only forms. (3.) The Proarthri are sharks with the palato-quadrate apparatus articulated with the anterior orbital region of the skull, the verte- bral column segmented, the mouth sub-terminal, and the forehead declivous. The Heterodontidz, represented by the well-known ‘¢ Port Jackson Shark,’’ form the only existing family. (4.) The Anatthri are sharks with the palato-quadrate apparatus not articulated directly with the skull, the vertebral column vari- able but more or less segmented, and the mouth inferior. To this group belong all living sharks, excepting those now specifically eliminated. (5.) The Rhinz are sharks with the palato-quadrate apparatus also not directly articulated with the skull, the vertebral column segmented; the mouth terminal (both jaws being advanced well forwards),.and the pectorals developing enlarged anterior basal lobes which are separated by notch-like spaces from the branchial regions, To this belongs the family Squatinide, including the so- called angel-sharks. ) The speaker was inclined to consider several of these more than sub-ordinal, and rather as of ordinal, value, but until they had been better studied he would reserve opinion on this question. He would now only add that the first and second groups might be com- bined in one order, the third isolated in another, and the fourth and fifth segregated in a third. There was also one type represented by the extinct Cladodontide, whose position is doubtful. For these he had formed the group Lipospondyli, but it is not evident whether it belongs with the true Squali or whether it may not be related to the Holocephali, the character of the branchial arches being dubious. Mr. N. P. Scudder read a paper on CERTAIN ANATOMICAL DE- | TAILS IN THE Muskrat, and exhibited specimens of the skeletons of muskrats, showing the number of the lumbar vertebree to be six and not three as stated by Professor Flower. He also showed that ‘PROCEEDINGS. LXV the malar bone formed part of the continuity of the zygomatic arch, correcting the statement of Dr. Coues in his ‘‘ Monograph of American Rodentia,’’ page 253, with regard to the jugal of the muskrat, which is there described as ‘‘a mere splint, not forming by itself any part of the continuity of the arch, for the squamosal and maxillary spurs are absolutely in contact. This is a strong point of Fiber.’’ Mr. Scudder remarked that muskrats were able to live four to six minutes under water, owing probably to the enlarge- ment of the abdominal aorta. He believed muskrats to be omniv- orous, and said that the same individual could be taken repeatedly in the same trap. ; Dr. R. W. Shufeldt made a communication UPON THE PRESENCE oF Rips ATTACHED TO THE OCCIPITAL BONE OF THE BLACK Bass, MICROPTERUS SALMOIDES.* He remarked, in the course of his de- scription, that he had recently made quite a number of dissections of this fish, and in every instance had found a pair of ribs upon the occipital hone, just above and internal to the foramen of the vagus nerve. They are without epipleural appendages, but other- wise like the abdominal ribs. If this fact be new to science, it is a very interesting discovery of great morphological significance, and introduced an important factor in the theory of the segmentation. of the skull. It had not been noticed in any of the prominent works upon comparative anatomy generally used as text-books, nor in a recent and very thorough article by Dr. Sagemehl upon the cranial osteology of Amita calva (Morph. Jahrb., Vol. 9, pt. 2, 1883). Dr. Shufeldt had also discovered these ribs, thoroughly developed, in the tunny, Orcynus thynnus, and thought that they would doubtless be found 1 in others of the Scombride and Centrar- chide. S1xTy-FourTH MEETING, May 17, 1884. Prof. C. V. Riley, Vice-President, occupied the chair. Thirty- five members were present. Dr. J. M. Flint, in a paper on CHINESE MEDICINES, after giving * 1884. SHUFELDT, R. W. Osteology of the Large-mouthed Black Bass (Micropterus salmoides). <Science, III, p. 532, 1884. 5 * : LXVI BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. a brief account of the history of medicine among the Chinese, ac- cording to their own authors, discussed their theories in regard to the nature and causes of disease and the action of remedies. Their ignorance of anatomy and the consequent effects upon their theory and practice was shown. ‘The materia medica of the Chinese was then considered in detail, its peculiarities, as well as its resem- blances to our own, present and past, as illustrated by the collections of Chinese drugs now in the possession of the U. S. National Mu- seum, A paper by Mr. Wiley Britton on the BurraLo Gnat or TEn- NESSEE was read, in which the author stated that its habitat, in his opinion, was confined to the Mississippi Valley, below the mouth of the Ohio river. It generally makes its appearance about the first of April, and remains from two to four weeks ; it destroys an- nually considerable numbers of live-stock, particularly mules and horses, which, however, could be protected by thorough greasing. The bite of this gnat is poisonous, causing a swelling somewhat like a bee sting. Prof. C. V. Riley stated that this gnat is a species of Szmulium. Dr. Bean read a paper entitled THE WHITE FisHes or NORTH America.* The speaker said there were twelve species indigenous to North America, besides the ‘‘ Inconnu,’’ which is not properly a white-fish, though related to it. He introduced into the list Core- gonus lavaretus, the German ‘‘ Marzena.’’ He made a few general remarks concerning the wide distribution, great abundance, and im- portance of the white fishes as food, and stated the range of each species, its maximum size and weight, and its variations through age and conditions of habitat. A brief key to the species, intended to facilitate their speedy identification, and based upon natural characters only, was included in the paper. Dr. Thomas Taylor exhibited a new micrometer of his own in- vention for measuring accurately and instantly to the 1-2000 inch the thickness of any object. In a second communication he stated that Pseudo Bacteria were produced by the heating of blood at a comparatively low temperature, and proposed to make experiments for the purpose of deciding whether a continuous fever of four or * * 1884. BEAN, TARLETON H. The White Fishes of North America. <Trans. Amer. Fish Cultural Association, 13th meeting, 1884, pp. 32-39. - PROCEEDINGS. LXVII five days with the blood-at-104° F. would produce the same results as blood artificially heated to 110° F. Itf-so, it would account for mistakes that have been made by persons inexperienced in exam- ining the blood of féver patients, who reported the presence of Bacteria, or broken blood corpuscles, as shown by Beal and others. Dr. Taylor also explained a method of obtaining upon a screen an apparent image of a microscopic object, by placing the micro- scope horizontally and at right angles to the screen. While looking through the microscope with one eye, the other is directed toward the screen, upon which an image becomes apparent, its magnifica- tion depending upon the distance of the observer from the screen. S1ixTy-FirTH MEETING, May 31, 1884. The President occupied the chair. Thirty members were pres- ent. Prof. L. F. Ward, Chairman of the Committee on Cultivated © Plants growing in the District of Columbia, submitted a report of progress. Mr. James E. Benedict made REMARKS ON THE RECENT CRUISE OF THE STEAMER ‘‘ALBATROSS’’ IN THE GULF OF MEXICO AND THE CARIBBEAN SEA, describing the events of the voyage, and exhibit- ing some of the most remarkable objects collected. Ensign E. E. Hayden, U. S. N., presented, through Prof. Ward, a paper on A NEw METHOD oF FIGURING FossiIL LEAVES AND OTHER OBJECTS BY THE AID OF PHOTOGRAPHY,* remarking that a saving of time and increase of accuracy was thereby attained. The method consisted in drawing with India ink upon a silver print photograph the outline of the object to be figured, the defects of the photo- graph being supplied by the draughtsman through comparison with the specimen. -The photograph is then dismissed, and a photo- engraving is made from the black lines of the sketch which remains. In the discussion which followed, it was shown that this process was novel in its successful application by the author to engrave fossil leaves. Mr. J. A. Ryder read a paper on THE DEVELOPMENT OF VIVIPA- LXVIII BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. Rous Minnows.* The species under discussion was the form known as Gambusia patruelis, B. & G. The points which were especially alluded to were the following: The fact that the young fish devel- oped within the body of the female parent and within the follicles in which the eggs themselves were developed. It was also pointed out that these follicles, which were covered with a rich net-work of fine capillary vessels, assumed the office of a respiratory apparatus, by which the gases were interchanged between the embryo and the parent fish; and, further, that this follicle also acted as an egg membrane, being actually perforated by a round opening, which the speaker termed the ‘‘ follicular pore,’’ and which was analogous to the micropyle of the ordinary fish egg. The arrangement of the follicles of the ovary within the body of the female was described at some length, and the peculiar differences between the two sexes in the arrangement of the viscera were pointed out. The fibrous bands, which act as supports, or stays, to the basal portion of the anal fin of the male, which is modified as an intromittent organ, were also described. ‘The great difference in the sizes of the sexes was also referred to, the female weighing over six times as much as the male. The speaker concluded by expressing his earnest desire to investigate the other known forms of viviparous fishes, such as the Embiotocoids of the West coast, the viviparous Blenny, and other bony fishes which have this habit, and which, in his opinion, would throw considerable light upon some of the peculiar physio- logical processes involved in the viviparous methods of develop- ment. Mr. Romyn Hitchcock exhibited a collection of Foraminifera belonging to the genus Zagena, and made a few Temarks explain- ing the relation between this genus and the Nodosarine group; these briefly being that Zagena may be taken as the type of the group, passing through JVodosaria and ending in C7istellaria as the most complete manifestation of its method of growth. * 1882. RyDER, JOHN A. Structure and ovarian incubation of Gamdusia patruelis, a top-minnow. <American Naturalist, Feb., 1882, pp. 109-118. ADDRESSES AND COMMUNICATIONS. THE PRINCIPLES OF ZOOGEOGRAPHY.* By THEODORE GILL. Zoogeography, or the science of the geographical distribution of animals, may be said to have originated with the illustrious French naturalist of the last century, who inaugurated the era of philo- sophical zoology in about the same degree as Linnzus did that of systematic zoology, and who is also well known as the antagonist and rival of the great Swede. Many of the facts that are the bases of its propositions had indeed been known before the time of Buffon, but the relations of those facts to each other, and to the general doctrine of science, had either been entirely overlooked or were vaguely appreciated. It is Buffon who is to be credited with having first promulgated precise generalizations respecting the geographical distribution of animals. Buffon, in this respect, not only advanced much beyond his predecessors, but leaped at once to a position which some of the the more pretentious naturalists of our own times have failed to | attain. In brief, he recognized (1) that the inhabitants of the tropical and southern portions of the old and new worlds were entirely different from each other; (2) that those of the northern portions of the two were, to a considerable extent, identical; and *Annual presidential address delivered at the Third Anniversary Meeting of the Society, January 19, 1883, in the lecture room of the U. S. National Museum. In the present address, previous contributions by the author to Zoogeography— the article “ Zoological Geography ”’ in Johnson’s New Universal Cyclopedia, and a review of Wallace’s “ Geographical Distribution of Animals,” published in “ The Nation’ for July 12 and 19, 1877, and republished in “ Field and Forest,” (vol. iii, pp. 69-74, 78-80, 98-101,) have been borrowed from. 2 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. (3) that the confluence of the two was most apparent towards the | proximate portions of America and Asia. The truth that animals in fact had, for the most part, originated in the regions of the earth where they are now found, became incontrovertible; and geologi- cal research demonstrated that they were preceded by forms which were the ancestors of those now living on the soil. Numerous zoologists from time to time took up the problem of the distribution of animals as a special study. But it is not incumbent on us at present to enter into a discussion of the steps in our knowledge of the geographical distribution of animals. It will now be sufficient to glance at two of the latest and rival propositions for the partition of the globe into those primary zoogeographical divisions, which, in furtherance of an analogy seized upon by the late Professor Agassiz, in his designation of a well known portion of North America as the ‘‘ Zoological island of New England,’’ may be figuratively called Zoological Continents. The great divisions of this rank have been termed by many American naturalists ‘‘ realms,’’ and by English writers ‘‘ regions.’’ Mr. Alfred Russel Wallace, in his thoughtful work on ‘‘ The Geo- graphical Distribution of Animals,’’* published in 1876, has recog- nized six primary zoogeographical divisions of the globe, which he has named regions, and, accepting views current in England, has designated and constituted as follows: fi Palzearctic region, with four sub-regions : 1. North Europe. 2. Mediterranean, or South Europe. 3. Siberia. 4. Manchuria, or Japan. II. Ethiopian region, with four sub-regions ; - East Africa. West Africa. South Africa. Madagascar. Lo . 5 ie gan * Vol. i, pp. 81, 82. PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS. 3 III. Oriental region, with four sub-regions: 1. Hindostan, or Central India. 2. Ceylon. 3. Indo-China, or Himalayas. 4. Indo-Malaya. IV. Australian region, with four sub-regions: 1. Austro-Malaya. 2. Australia. | 3. Polynesia. 4. New Zealand. V. Neotropical region, with four sub-regions: 1. Chili, or South Temp. America. 2. Brazil. 3. Mexico, or Tropical North America. 4. Antilles. VI. Nearctic region, with four sub-regions: 1. California. 2. Rocky Mountains. 3. Alleghanies, or East United States. 4. Canada. A corresponding member of this Society, and one of the most learned and thorough of American naturalists, Mr. J. A. Allen, in an elaborate memoir on ‘‘ The Geographical Distribution of the Mammalia, considered in relation to the principal ontological re- gions of the earth, and the laws that govern the distribution of animal life,’’* published in 1878, has proposed a very different sub- division. He recognized three categories of general areas—viz: (1) ‘‘ primary divisions or ‘realms,’’’ (2) ‘‘secondary divisions or ‘regions,’’’ and (3) ‘‘ divisions of third rank or ‘ provinces.’ ’’ The several categories have been denominated as follows: I. An Arctic, or North Circumpolar realm. * Bulletin U. S. Geological Survey, vol. iv, p. 376. BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. IJ. A North Temperate realm, with two regions, viz: 1. American, with four provinces : a. Boreal. bd. Eastern. ¢. Middle. ad. Western. 2. Europzo-Asiatic, with four provinces: a. European. é. Siberian. ¢. Mediterranean. @. Manchurian. III. An American Tropical realm, with three regions, viz.: 1. Antillean. 2. Central American. 3. Brazilian. IV. An Indo-African realm, with two regions, viz: 1. African, with three provinces: a. Eastern. &. Western. ¢. Southern. 2. Indian, with two provinces: a. Continental. 6. Insular. V. A South American Temperate realm, with two provinces, viz: a. Andean. 6. Pampean. VI. An Australian realm, with three regions, viz: 1. Australian, with two provinces: a. Australian. d. Papuan. 2. Polynesian. 3. New Zealand. VII. A Lemurian realm (undivided). VIII. An Antarctic or South Circumpolar realm. PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS, 5 On a comparison of the respective schemes of Messrs...Wallace and Allen, it is obvious that they must have been influenced by quite different considerations. Not one of the primary regions of the two authors is accepted with the same limits by both, and some- times they differ radically. Mr. Allen recognizes as a peculiar realm (the ‘‘Arctic realm’’) a division which is considered neutral territory belonging to the Palearctic and Nearctic regions by Mr. Wallace ; he degrades the Indian and African realms to subdivi- sions of a common Indo-African realm, but subtracts from the former the Malagasy region to raise it to the rank of an indepen- dent realm—the Lemurian—co-equal with the Indo-African. He further adds, a South American temperate realm and an Antarctic realm. ‘The examination and analysis of the evidence which has led to such different results will be instructive and lead up to some interesting deductions. We may aptly commence this examination by a glance at the several ‘‘ realms’’ concerning which there is an approximate agreement. But the’ premises upon which Messrs. Wallace and Allen have worked should be first stated. The conception of Mr. Wallace as to the character of the primary zoogeographical regions or zoological continents is, that ‘‘it is a positive, and by no means an unimportant, advantage to have our named regions approximately equal in size, and with easily defined, and therefore easily remembered, boundaries,’’ providing that ‘‘ we do not violate any clear affinities or produce any glaring irregu- larities.’’ It is further claimed that ‘‘all elaborate definitions of interpenetrating frontiers, as well as regions extending over three- fourths of the land surface of the globe, and including places which are the antipodes of each other, would be most inconvenient, even if there were not such difference of opinion about them.’’ * Again, Mr. Wallace says: ‘‘On two main points every system yet proposed, or that probably can be proposed, is open to objec- tion ; they are,—1stly, that the several regions are not of equal rank ;—2ndly, that they are not equally applicable to all classes of * Wallace, Geog. Dist. Anim., vol. i, pp. 63, 64. 6 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. animals. As to the first objection, it will be found impossible to form any three or more regions each of which differs from the rest in an equal degree or in the same manner. One will surpass all others in the possession of peculiar families; another will have many characteristic genera; while a third will be mainly distinguished by negative characters. There will also be found many intermediate districts, which possess some of the characteristics of two well” marked regions, with a few special features of their own, or perhaps with none ; and it will be a difficult question to decide in all cases which region should possess the doubtful territory, or whether it should be formed into a primary region itself.’’ * As to the question ‘‘ Which class of animals is of most importance in determining Zoological Regions,’’ Mr. Wallace thinks that we should ‘‘ construct our typical or standard Zoological Regions in the first place, from a consideration of the distribution of mammalia, only bringing to our aid the distribution of other groups to determine doubtful points. Regions so established will be most closely in ac- cordance with those long-enduring features of physical geography, on which the distribution of all forms of life fundamentally depends ; and all discrepancies in the distribution of other classes of animals must be capable of being explained, either by their exceptional means of dispersion or by special conditions affecting their perpetuation and increase in each locality.’’ ‘‘If these considerations are well founded,’’ he continues, ‘‘ the objections of those who study in- sects or molluscs,—for example, that our regions are not true for their departments of nature,—cannot be maintained. For they will find, that a careful consideration of the exceptional means of dispersal and conditions of existence of each group, will explain most of the divergences from the normal distribution of higher animals.’’+ Mr. Allen recalls that he had in 1871 ‘‘ claimed, in accordance with the views of Humboldt, Wagner, Dana, Agassiz, DeCandolle, and others, that life is distributed in circumpolar zones which con- * Wallace, Geog. Dist. Anim., vol. i. p. 53. 7 Wallace, op. cit., vol. i, p. 57. PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS. 7 form with the climatic;zones, though not always with the parallels of the geographer.’’ Mr. Allen contends * that— ‘In fact, so generally is temperature recognized by the leading writers on the distribution of marine life that it seems superfluous to reiterate or emphasize this principle. That the zones of life should be perhaps a little less obvious over the land areas—in con- sequence of the diversity of contour resulting from differences of elevation, and the interruptions and exceptional conditions due to mountain chains and high plateaus—than over the oceanic expanses, is naturally to be expected. That there is, however, a similar cor- respondence between climatic belts and the zones of life seems to me abundantly evident. As has been already shown, the broader or primary zones are, first, an Arctic or North Circumpolar Zone, em- bracing the arctic, subarctic, and colder temperate latitudes of the northern hemisphere, throughout the whole of which area there is a marked homogeneity of mammalian life, as well as of animal and vegetable life in general ; secondly, that below this there is a broad belt of life, which, in its general /aczes, is distinctive of the tem- perate and warm-temperate latitudes, and that these two zones of life are far more closely related zz¢er se than with the life of the in- tertropical regions, with which regions they may be collectively con- trasted, and together receive the appropriate name of ‘ Arcfogea ;’ thirdly, it has been shown, so far as the northern hemisphere is concerned, that the life of the tropical and temperate regions of the same continent is more widely different than is the life of corre- sponding portions of the temperate and colder parts of the (so-called) Old World and the New; fourthly, that the life of Tropical America has very little in common with that of the tropical por- tions of Asia and Africa; fifthly, that the life of the South Tem- perate Zone presents a facies distinct from that of the tropics, and has still less in common with that of the North Temperate Zone ; sixthly, that Australasia is so highly differentiated as to form a dis- tinct primary region, having little in common with other lands, even with those of contiguous regions, or those having a similar geographical position ; seventhly, that Madagascar and its contig- uous islands, while to some extent African in affinity, form also a highly specialized region ; lastly, that the antarctic and cold south- * Allen, op. cit., pp. 373-375- i 8 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. temperate oceanic regions are recognizable as a primary region, characterized by a peculiar general facées of life, that more strongly recalls that of the corresponding portions of the northern hemis- phere than of any other portion of the earth. It has been further shown that the Australian Realm is divisible into temperate and tropical portions, and also that the land surface is separable into zones of even still narrower limits, corresponding in a general way with those recognized by Dana for marine life. ‘¢ The almost total absence of identical genera, or even of families, excepting such as are essentially cosmopolitan, in the American and Old World tropics, as well as the distinctness of the Lemurian Realm, and the almost total isolation of the Australian Realm, evi- dently require for their explanation other causes than merely the existing climates. The geological history of these land-areas and their faunze must be of course considered in order to understand their present relationships. As the northern hemisphere at present most clearly shows, nearly continuous land surface and similarity of climatic conditions implies identity of fauna, while isolation, especi- ally when joined with diverse climatic conditions, implies diversity of life, and a differentiation proportionate to the degree of isolation, and the length of time such isolation has existed ; in other words, that the present want of affinity between the life of the Lemurian and Australian Realms and that of the rest of the world is due rather to their long geographical isolation than to present climatic conditions, and that we here find, for reasons perhaps not wholly apparent, the remnants of a somewhat primitive or early fauna that was formerly shared more largely by other areas than at present— that these regions became isolated before the development of many of the higher and now prevalent types of the larger and more diversi- fied land-areas, and that here differentiation has proceeded less rapidly and along fewer and narrower lines than elsewhere ; further- more, that the present highly diversified fauna of the chief tropical areas, in comparison with the fauna of the north-circumpolar lands, is due in part to the southward migration, near the close of the Tertiary period, of forms adapted to a high temperature, and in part to the high rate of differentiation favored by tropical condi- tions of climate. Hence, given: 1. Arctic and cold-temperate conditions of climate, and we have a fauna only slightly or moder- ately diversified ; 2. A moderate increase of temperature, giving warm-temperate conditions of climate, and we have the addition of PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS. 9 many new types of life; 3. A high increase of temperature, giving tropical conditions of climate, and we have a rapid multiplication of new forms and a maximum of differentiation. Again, given: 1. A long-continued continuity of land surface, and we have an essen- tial identity of fauna; 2. A divergence and partial isolation of land- areas, and we find a moderate but decided differentiation of faunz ; 3. A total isolation of land-areas, and we have a thorough and rad- ical differentiation of faunz, proportioned to the length of time the isolation has continued. Hence, the present diversity of life is cor- related with two fundamental conditions: 1. Continuity or isola- tion, past as well as present, of land surface ; and, 2. Climatic con- ditions, as determined mainly by temperature.”’ Without further comment, we will proceed to the consideration (1) of the several regions concerning which there is proximate agreement, and (2) next to those in dispute. THE NORTH AMERICAN TEMPERATE REALM OR NEARCTIC REGION. It is with its widest limits that this territory has been admitted by Mr. Wallace, while by Mr. Allen it is deprived of the Arctic region, which has been associated with the isothermal portion of the Eurasia to constitute together an Arctic realm. This will be the subject of consideration hereafter. Issue has also been joined as to the southern limits of the realm and as to the pertinence or non- pertinence to it of the Sonoran and Lower Californian « regions ”’ of Cope, but this is a question of detail which need not detain us at the present time. THE EUROPO-ASIATIC OR PALAZARCTIC REALM. The only serious point at issue between Messrs. Wallace and Allen affecting this realm is whether the Arctic portion is, or is not, an integer, Mr. Wallace including it and Mr. Allen excluding and uniting it with the American Arctic, and considering the two as the components of a ‘‘ realm,’’ as will be hereafter seen. It will be now in order to inquire into the tenability of the other realms whose adoption has been urged by Mr. Allen. These are 10 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. the Arctic, the Indo-African,.-the Lemurian, the South American Temperate, and the Antarctic. THE ARCTIC REALM. Mr. Allen gives the following reasons for retention of this realm; ‘‘ Whether or not an Arctic Region should he recognized as a division of the first rank is a question not easy to satisfactorily an- swer. Naturalists who have made the distribution of animal life in the boreal regions a subject of special study very generally agree in the recognition of a hyperboreal or circumpolar fauna, extending in some cases far southward over the Temperate Zone. The Arctic portion of this hyperborean region has been frequently set off as a secondary division, or sub-region, and generally recognized as pos- sessing many features not shared by the contiguous region to the southward. For the present I prefer to still retain it as a division of the first rank. It is characterized mainly by the paucity of its life, as compared with every region except the Antarctic, and by what it has not rather than by the possession of peculiar species or groups. It wholly lacks both Amphibian and Reptilian life, is almost exclusively the summer home of many birds, and forms the habitat of the Esquimaux, the Arctic Fox, the Polar Bear, the Musk Ox, the Polar Hare, the Lemmings, the Walruses, the Narwhal, and the White Whale, which are confined within it. It has no Chiropteranor Insectivora, two or three species of Shrews, however, barely reaching its southern border. Itshares with the cold-temp- erate belt the presence of the Moose and the Reindeer, several Pin- nipeds, a number of boreal species of Géres, several fur-bearing Carnivora, and a-considerable number of birds. Its southern bound- ary may be considered as coinciding very nearly with the northern limit of arboreal vegetation, and hence approximately with the iso- therm of 32° F. Its more characteristic terrestrial forms range throughout its extent, none being restricted to either the North American or Europxo-Asiatic continent. Hence it is indivisible into regions of the second and third grades (regionsand provinces, ) and may be considered as embracing a single hyperborean assem- blage of life.’’ It cannot be overlooked that the reasons thus urged are very un- satisfactory, and result in part from the confusion of inland and marine faunze under the same category. ‘The seals, walruses, and PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS. 11 cetaceans are not terrestrial mammals, but marine, and their distri- bution is governed by the same laws which affect marine animals generally. The very few peculiar species, except the musk ox, are but little modified relations of forms common to the adjoining realms, and the absence of most forms is evidently dependent on the cold climate, and furnishes no more reason for assigning a pri- mary rank to the territory so characterized than it would to the mountain peaks and deserts so frequently isolated in the midst of the adjoining regions, and which are equally distinguished by the paucity of their animal life. The fact that it cannot be distinctly relegated to either the North American or Eurasian realms, but is neutral territory, is scarcely sufficient to warrant its entire isolation from both. The next disputed question involves the union or distinction of the Indian and African territories. The question is thus discussed by Mr. Allen. INDO-AFRICAN REALM. According to Mr. Allen, ‘‘ The Indo-African Realm consists mainly of Intertropical Africa and Intertropical Asia, to which it seems proper to add Extratropical South Africa. The small por- tion of Africa south of the Southern Tropic lies wholly within the warm-temperate zone. Its small extent and broad connection with Tropical Africa render its separation as a distinct realm (as I at one time rather hastily considered it) almost inadmissible, since it is especially open to theinfluence of the great intertropical African fauna, as is shown by the extension of many tropical forms down to within a few degrees of its southern extremity. The area really possessing a temperate climate is restricted to its extreme southern border, where alone appear the few generic and family types that do not have a very general range over the tropical portions of the continent. This area is many times smaller than the temperate portion of South America, but, though so small, has quite a num- ber of peculiar genera, which impart to it quite distinctive features. It yet seems better to regard it as an appendage of the great Indo- African Realm rather than as a distinct primaryregion. Madagas- car, with the Mascarene Islands, on the other hand, while perhaps possessing a closer affinity with Africa than with any other conti- 12 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. nental region, has yet a fauna made up so largely of peculiar types that it seems more in accordance with the facts of distribution to regard it as a separate primary region. ‘*The Indo-African Realm, as thus restricted, forms a highly natural division. Although its two principal areas are quite widely separated, being in fact geographically almost wholly disassociated, they possess a wonderful degree of similarity. Of the fifty com- monly recognized families of mammalia occurring within its limits, three-fifths are distributed throughout almost its whole extent. Of the remainder, one-half are confined to Africa, and one is African and American, leaving only nine in India that are unrepresented in Africa; three only of these latter are, however, peculiar to the In- dian Region; all extend beyond it to the northward, five of them even occurring over the greater part of the northern hemisphere. Thus the African region is the more specialized division, only a small portion of the tropical element in the Indian Region, through which it is differentiated from the great Europzeo-Asiatic Temper- ate Region, being unrepresented in the African, while the African has three times as many peculiar families as the Indian.”’ -Iam quite unable to appreciate the force of this exposition as an argument in favor of the union of the two regions; it appears to me that it is, indeed, one that tells for the contrary side. Let it be re- called that the ten families* peculiar to the African region are very distinct, and that almost all of the eighteen families ‘‘ common to both regions ’’ can be added to the twelve ‘‘ of wide extralimital range,’’ if we take into consideration their distribution in even newer Tertiary or sometimes Quaternary times. Further, the genera even were, for the most part, of wide distribution formerly, and there is strong reason to believe that the thirty forms ‘‘ common to both regions ’’ were invaders of Africa in the later Tertiary, and that among those now ‘‘ peculiar to the African region’’ we have the remnants of older faunz. If we revert to the fishes we find some striking facts. These can be resolved under two categories. On ~ the one hand a number of forms are peculiar to Africa, or shared in common with South America; on the other are certain genera * There are really more. PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS. 13 shared in common with Asia, or very closely related to. Asiatic forms, and well fitted for extension of their range by tenacity of life or adaptation for limited erial respiration. The evidence here again leads to the conclusion that the peculiar types are derived from very ancient tenants of the territory, while those common to Asia are of recent introduction. We must of course take cognizance of these contrary indications in our appreciation of the relations of the respective regions, and not allow ourselves to be unduly influ- enced by the predominance of the recent invaders. Africa is a de- cidedly distinct region so far as its aboriginal population is con- cerned. Further, its relations, as indicated by its primitive and more characteristic types, are with South America rather than with India, as I shall hereafter show. THE LEMURIAN OR MALAGASY REALM. Whether the Malagasy region or Lemurian realm of Allen is in- dependent or an appanage of the African, is the question natur-’ ally next in order. “i According to Mr. Allen, ‘‘As was long since claimed by Dr. Sclater,* Madagascar is faunally so distinct from every other onto- logical division of the globe as to be entitled to the rank of a pri- mary zoogeographical region. With it, as is generally admitted, should be associated the Mascarene Islands. The very few mam- mals indigenous to these islands are decidedly Madagascarine in their affinities, as are the birds and other land animals. While the Lemurian fauna shows decided African affinities, it is second only to the Australian in its degree of specialization. It departs most strikingly from all other regions in what it lacks, through the ab- sence of all Carnivores save one peculiar family (Cyftoproctide), represented by a single species, and four peculiar genera of the family Viverride ; of all Ruminants and Proboscidians ; all Pachy- derms, except a single African genus of Swd@,;.and all Rodents, except a few species of Muride. The Insectivores are almost wholly represented by one or two species of Crocidura, and a family, em- bracing several genera, not found elsewhere, save a single genus in oe Quart. Journ. Sci., vol. i, April, 1864, pp. 213-219 (Allen). 14 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. the West Indies. Four families of Bats occur, but are represented, with one exception, by a single species each. They belong to groups of semi-cosmopolitan range, and owing also to the excep- tional means of dispersal possessed by the Criroptera, have little weight in determining the affinities of the fauna. The Quadru- manes are represented only by the Prosimia, of which three-fourths of all the species occur here, while about four-fifths of the remain- der are African. The remains of an extinct species of Aippopota- mus have been found, a type existing at present only in Africa. Although the Indian genus Viverricuda has recently been established as occurring in Madagascar, the few types that connect the Lemu- rian mammalian fauna with the faunz of other parts of the world are preponderatingly African.’’ There is much that could be said on both sides of this question, thus ably discussed. When, however, we recall the fact, lately urged, that most of the types that now characterize Africa are com- paratively recent immigrants into that continent; that the nearest existing allies of the peculiar mammalian types of Madagascar are to be found among the older types of Africa, and that the few fresh- water fishes of Madagascar are of a decided African type, the diver- gences of the two are materially lessened ; there is no dispute that the relations of the Malagasy fauna are most intimate with Africa, and as the question of the distinction of the former from the latter is at least doubtful, and must remain so until its fauna is better known and has been more thoroughly analyzed, we may, provision- ally, at least, consider the one as an appanage of the other, having not much less perceptible relations to the main portion than does the Antillean to the South American. THE SOUTH AMERICAN TEMPERATE REALM. In Mr. Allen’s words, ‘‘ What is here termed the South American Temperate Realm embraces all that portion of the South American continent and adjacent islands not included in the American Tropi- cal Realm as already defined. It coincides very nearly with Mr. Wallace’s ‘South Temperate American or Chilian Sub-region.’* * Geog. Dist. Animals, vol. ii, p. 36, and map of the Neotropical Region. PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS.. 15 Its northern limit on’ the Atlantic coast is near the thirtieth par- allel. On leaving the Atlantic coast, the northern boundary passes obliquely northwestward, rising in the region of the Chaco Desert, to, or possibly a little beyond, the Tropic of Capricorn. Again, descending to about the twenty-fifth parallel, it turns abruptly northward and eastward, along the eastern border of the Andean chain, nearly to the fifth degree of south latitude, near which point it strikes the Pacific coast. It thus embraces a large part of the great Andean plateau, with the neighboring coast region to the westward, nearly all the La Plata plains, and the region thence southward to Tierra del Fuego, which belongs also to this region. ‘As contrasted with the Tropical Realm to the northward, it is characterized, in respect to mammals, by the absence of all Quad- rumana and the paucity of Edentates and Marsupials, there being neither Sloths nor Anteaters, while only two or three species of Opos- sums barely extend over its borders; the absence of all genera of Leaf-nosed bats, and of not less than a dozen important genera of Rodents, the Coatis, the Kinkajou, the Tapirs, and many other genera characteristic of the American tropics.* As noted by Mr. Wallace, it is further characterized by the possession of the entire family of the Chinchillide, the genera Auchenia, Habrocomus, Spalacopus, Actodon, Ctenomys, Dolichotis, Myopotamus, Chlama- dophorus, to which may be added the marine genera Ofaria, Arc- tocephalus, Morunga, Lobodon, and Stenorhynchus, very few of which range beyond the northern border of this region. The Spectacled — Bear is also confined to it, and here are also most largely developed the Murine genera Calomys, Acodon, and Reithrodon.”’ Mr. Allen might have derived additional cogent evidence for the independence of this realm from the fresh-water fishes, which, in fact, show more relationship to those of New Zealand and Tas- mania than to the tropical American types. Indeed, this relation- ship is such that an English ichthyologist of some note, Dr. Giin- * «Among the genera of the Brazilian region here unrepresented are, aside from the Quadrumana, Cercoleptes, Nasua, Tapirus, Bradypus, Chelopus, Myrmeco- phaga, Tamandua, Cyclothurus, Phyllostoma, Glossophaga, Arctibeus, Dysopes, _(and other genera of Chiroptera,) Hydrocherus, Cercomys, Dactylomys, Loncheres, Echimys, Calogenys, Dasyprocta, Chetomys, Cercolabes, Lepus, Sciurus, Ha- brothrix, Oxymycterus, Holochilus, etc., == 27+.” 16 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. ther, has considered the several countries as constituents of a single ‘‘region,’’ called the Antarctic region, whose subdivisions were designated as the Tasmanian, New Zealand, and Patagonian ‘“sub- 9? regions,’’ and which were, in his opinion, ‘‘ almost identical.’’ On the whole I am now inclined to follow Mr. Allen in differentiat- ing this realm from the South American, somewhat contrary to my former views, although I do so with some hesitation. THE ANTARCTIC OR SOUTH CIRCUMPOLAR REALM. Mr. Allen has enunciated the following views respecting an Ant- arctic Realm: ‘The Antarctic Realm is geographically almost wholly oceanic, and its fauna hence consists almost exclusively of marine or pelagic species. It necessarily embraces not only the Antarctic Zone, but a large part of the cold south-temperate, since very few of its char- acteristic species are wholly restricted to the Antarctic waters. It will hence include not only the few small groups of Antarctic Islands, but also Tierra del Fuego and the Falkland Islands, and perhaps also the extreme southern shores of South America, while some of its characteristic forms also extend to New Zealand, and even Australia and the Cape of Good Hope. The only mammals that can be considered as strictly characteristic of this region are Pinnipeds and Cetaceans, of which several genera of each are almost _wholly restricted to it. A ‘‘South Frigid,’’ ‘ Antarctic,’’ or ‘¢South Circumpolar ’’ *‘ Zone,’’ ‘‘Region,’’ or ‘ Realm,’’: has. been recognized by various writers for the marine invertebrates, and, by von Pelzeln for birds, with limitations much as here as- signed. While the number of species peculiar to it is small, it is large relatively to the whole number represented, especially in the colder latitudes. There is, of course, a broad belt along its north- ern border of a transitional character, where Antarctic types over- lap the range of groups characteristic of south-temperate lati- tudes.’’* 2? As it is admitted that no terrestrial or fresh-water animals have been found in the Antarctic regions, it is not obvious why such a realm should have been proposed in connection with the distri- *Allen op. cit., p. 372. PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS. 17 bution of terrestrial vertebrates, and it will be premature to even consider it till such animals have been found. Such are the ‘‘realms’’ or ‘‘regions’’ recognized by Messrs. Wallace and Allen. But there still remain large extents of land and water which have not been recognized as independent realms by either Messrs. Wal- lace or Allen, but which have been referred to a heterogeneous Australian one, as a kind of refuge of the destitute. These we shall consider as a sequel to the determination of the ‘‘ realms,’’ which our inquiries and criticisms have naturally now led us to. In fine, we see reason for admitting nine primary divisions of the earth’s inland surface, characterized by major associations of animals. Beginning with home, and proceeding to the successively more differentiated realms, these are (1) the Anglogzean or North American ; (2,) the Eurygeean or Eurasian; (3,) the Indogzan ; (4,) the Afrogeean ; (5,) the Dendrogzean or Tropical-American ; (6,) the Amphigzean or Temperate South American; (7,) the Aus- trogean or Australian; (8,) the Ornithogeean, or New Zealand ; and (9,) the Nesogzean or Polynesian. I.—THE ANGLOGHAN OR ARCTAMERICAN REALM.* I. The North American or Nearctic Realm embraces North Amer- ica from its northern boundaries, where it approaches, on opposite sides, the Eurasiatic realm, southward into Northern Mexico, pro- jecting into that country to a considerable distance along the exten- sion of the Rocky Mountains, and ceasing somewhere near the southwestern boundary of the United States on the lowlands. It has representatives of 26 families and about 250 species of mammals, exclusive of the marine types; about 60 families and not far ‘from 800 species of birds (Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway); 25 families, and about 250 species of reptiles; 14 families and about 100 species of amphibians; 17 families and about 600 species of * Some synonyms of the realm names adopted are given at the commencement of each paragraph. 18 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. fresh-water fishes, and 1 family and 6 or 7 species of Marsipobran- chiates. Of these, several are wholly or almost peculiar to the re- gion. These are, of mammals, the Antilocapride, Zapodide, Gceomyidz, and Haploodontidz; of birds, the Chamzeidze (of very doubtful value) ; of reptiles, the Lichanuridz; of amphibians, (ac- cording to Cope,) the Scaphiopodidz, Plethodontide, Amblysto- midz, -Amphiumide, and Sirenidz; and of fishes, the Centrar- chide, Elassomide, Aphredoderidz, Amblyopsidz, Percopside, Hyodontide, and Amiidz. Of the others, those characteristic of the northern portions of the region are shared in common with Europe and Northern Asia, while such as are especially represented in the southern portions are held in common with South America. On the whole, however, the predominant type of the region—and only more decidedly so to the northward—is akin to that of the Eastern hemisphere, and the South American aspect given to the region is apparently due rather to the (geologically) recent intru- sion of South American types than to its being the natal abode of such forms. Of the other classes of animals, those most noteworthy are the gastropods and conchifers ; the former is extremely rich in species of the family of Ceriphasiidze, which includes Melanioids of peculiar genera; the latter is even to a still greater degree exuberant in species representing also numerous sections, or sub-genera, peculiar to the region. In fact, over 400 species of gastropods, most of which belong to the Ceriphasiide, and about 600 species of con- chifers, the greater portion of which are members of the family of Unionide, have been attributed to the region, but these numbers are undoubtedly greatly exaggerated. It may be added, in con- clusion, that several of the families and genera now peculiar to the realm were, in early geological epochs, represented elsewhere, the Lepidosteide, for instance, having formerly had members in Eu- rope. Several of the peculiar genera are also of great antiquity, characteristic sections or genera of Viviparide, Melaniide, and PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS. 19 Unionide having existed as early as the Cretaceous and even the Jurassic period. II.—THE EURYG#AN OR EURASIATIC REALM. The European or Palearctic Realm is the largest of all, and embraces the entire northern portion of the Old World. Its south- ern limits nearly coincide with the tropic of Cancer in the lowlands, and its isotherm projected therefrom in the more rugged countries. In Africa it extends into the Desert of Sahara, and in Asia it is limited by the Himalaya Mountains and their spurs. It possesses members of 31 families of terrestrial mammals, 55 of birds (accord- ing to Wallace), 25 of reptiles, 9 of amphibians (according to Giin- ther), and 16 of fresh-water fishes. None of these families, how- ever, are Continuous over the entire area and at the same time pe- culiar to it. It is true that several families are restricted within its limits, such as the Trogonophide and Ophiomoride among reptiles, and the Comephoridz among fishes, but these are very limited in their distribution; the family Comephoride, e. g., is represented by a single species, confined to a single lake (Baikal) of Siberia. The realm is characterized, therefore, rather by what it has not than by what it has among families, and is based mainly on the structural modifications of minor value (generic or specific) of its constituents. III.—THE INDOGHAN REALM. The Indian or Oriental Realm is of less extent than either of the two preceding ones, but is nevertheless richer than either in the number of species. It extends from the Himalayan range on the north to the Indian Ocean on the south, and toward the S. E. is limited by the narrow but deep strait which intervenes between Celebes Island and its dependencies on the one hand, and Borneo on the other, and also between the island of Lombok on the cne hand and Bali on the other; it thus includes the penin- sulas of Hither and Farther India, and the Indo-Malayan Archi- 20 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. pelago and Philippine Islands. In it are found 33 families of ter- restrial mammals, 71 families of birds (according to Wallace), 25 families of reptiles, 9 of amphibians, and 15 of fresh-water fishes. Of these, 12 are peculiar, viz: among mammals, the Tarsiide, Galeopithecide, and Tupaiide; among birds, the Liotrichide, Phyllornithid, and Eurylemidz ; among reptiles, the Xenopeltide, Uropeltidz, and Acrochordide ; and among fishes, the Lucioceph- alidze, Ophiocephalidz, and Mastacembelidz. As in the case of other regions, there is considerable diversity of opinion as to its relations to others, and as to its several subdivisions. IV.—THE AFROGHAN REALM. The African or Ethiopian Realm, as the name indicates, in- cludes the greater part of the African continent, but not all, it be- ing limited on the N. by the Desert of Sahara, although on all other sides bounded by the ocean; but it also comprises the island of Madagascar and the Mascarenes, as well as, according to some recent authors, the peninsula of Arabia. It is distinguished es- pecially in that it possesses the highest types, after man, of the order Primates, and which are in all respects the most anthropoid. This region is also further distinguished by the restriction to it of as - many as ten isolated families of mammals, viz: Daubentoniide, Cryptoproctide, Protelide, Camelopardide, Hippopotamide, Loph- iomyide, Centetidz, Potamogalide, Chrysochloride, and Orycter- opide. Among birds, there are six so-called families peculiar to it—Paictide, Musophagide, Coliide, Leptosomidz, Irrisoride, and Serpentaride. The most marked, however, are the fishes, of which there are fourteen families; of these, five are peculiar, viz: Pantodontidz, Kneriide, Mormyride, Gymnarchide, and Polyp- teride, and three are shared with South America alone—Cichlide, Characinide, and Lepidosirenide. . This realm, like all the others, has been subdivided by Wallace into four regions, or, as he desig- nates them, ‘‘subregions,’’ viz: (@) the East African, (4) the West African, (¢) the South African, and (¢) the Malagassy. PRESIDENT’S ADDRKESS. : oe V.—-THE DENDROGZAN REALM. The South American or Neotropical Realm extends from the N., near the northern boundaries of Mexico in the lowlands, and lower down in the highlands, to the temperate regions of South America, and its dependencies, for with it are also generally associated the West Indian Islands. It has 30 families of mammals, 73 of birds, 35 of reptiles, 16 of amphibians, and 17 of fresh-water fishes. An unusual proportion of these are peculiar to the region, or nearly so. Among the mammals are the Cebidze, Mididz, Desmodide, Dino- myidze, Caviide, Hydrochceride, Bradypodide, Dasypodide, Tatusiide, and Myrmecophagide. Several of the families which are shared in common with North America are also almost as characteristic, the North American species being rather intruders therein from the region under question than true autochthones. Such are the Procyonide, Bassaridide, Saccomyide, Cercolabide, Phyllostomidz, and Didelphididz. Other families are peculiar in their distribution: for example, of the Tapiridze, two well defined genera and several species are found in South America, and the only other representative is distant as far as the Indo-Malayan Archi- pelago. These are anomalies, however, that become readily explica- ble when it is recalled that, in previous geological epochs, both of the said families were extensively distributed over the northern hemisphere, and consequently the widely-separated living forms are evidently simply surviving representatives of formerly widespread types. Of birds, according to the views of Wallace and many or- nithologists, 22 families are restricted to the region, and 7 others are common and peculiar to it and the North American region. The peculiar families of birds, according to Wallace, are the Czere- bidee, or sugar-birds ; Phytotomide, or plant-cutters ; Pipridee, or manakins ; Cotingide, or chatterers ; Formicariide, or ant-thrushes ; Dendrocolaptidz, or tree-creepers ; Pteroptochidz ; Rhamphastide, or toucans; Bucconide, or puff-birds; Galbulidz, or jacamars ; Todidz, or todies; Momotidze, or motmots; Steatornithide, the guacharo or oil-bird; Cracide, or curassows; Tinamide, or tina- 22 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. mous; Opisthocomidz, the hoazin; Thinocoride; Cariamide ; Aramide ; Psophiide, or trumpeters ; Eurypygide, or sun-bitterns ; and Palamedeidz, or horned screamers. The Trochilidz, or hum- ming-birds, are especially noteworthy on account of their great numbers. Six families of reptiles have also been claimed as pecu- liar to the realm, and among the lizards the family of Iguanide is remarkably developed. Four families of amphibians and four of fishes are also considered as restricted to the realm. The relation between the fishes of South America and Africa is another feature of special significance: there are three families shared between the two, and found nowhere else, and genera of the respective families are not distantly related, although none are actually common to the two realms. VI.—THE AMPHIGZAN REALM. The Temperate South American Realm may retain provisionally the limits assigned to it by Mr. Allen, and as these have already been specified when considering Mr. Allen’s views, it is unnecessary to repeat them here. Within its limits occur representatives of several peculiar groups; there are 18 families of terrestrial mammals, two of which (the Chinchillidee and Chlamyphoride) are almost con- fined to it, and two (Ursidze and Camelidz) are shared with the northern realms without occurring in the contiguous realm; 42 so- called families, of birds, three of which (the Chionidide, Thino- coride, and Rheidz) scarcely or not at all encroach northwards; 15 families of reptiles; 11 families of amphibians; 5 families of fishes, two of which are shared with New Zealand and Tasmania, and scarcely extend into Tropical America; and one family of Myzonts, also shared with New Zealand and Tasmania. VII.—THE AUSTROGAEAN REALM. The Australian Realm is of all the most distinctly defined by its fauna. As it will be here limited, it comprises Australia and the immediately outlying islands, and the Austro-Malayan Archi- PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS. 93 pelago. It is limited/northward by Wallace’s line or strait, which separates Lombok from Bali and Celebes from Borneo, including Papua or New Guinea and the Solomon Islands to the eastward, and southward embraces Tasmania or Van Diemen’s Land. It is especially distinguished by its numerous marsupial mammals, and by the almost complete restriction of the class to representatives of that order, the rodents and the bats; the Monotremes are also characteristic of the realm, and entirely confined to it. The class of birds likewise has a number of very characteristic types: chief of these are Megapodidze and Casuaridz, but there are several others—e. g., the Paradiseide, Meliphagide, Menuridz, and At- richide—that are almost equally peculiar. The reptiles and am- phibians are perhaps less noteworthy, although they present some interesting features of detail. The fresh-water fishes are, however, especially remarkable ; while many of what may be called marine families are represented by fluviatile species, there are several that are peculiar to it or only found elsewhere in South America. Among the former is the family Ceratodontide, which in former geological epochs was extensively represented in other parts of the world, but is now peculiar to Australia. Among the latter are the families Percophidide, Haplochitonide, Galaxiide, Osteoglos- side, and Symbranchide. The articulates and mollusks also afford a large number of characteristic forms. The primary subdivisions of the realm are two. VIIIl.—THE ORNITHOGAN REALM. The New Zealand sub-region of Mr. Wallace cannot be satisfac- torily referred to the Australian or any other realm, and, although _ its peculiar characters are not very salient, it should apparently be isolated. as a peculiar realm. The name Ornithogzea, proposed nearly ten years ago, may be retained for it. In prehistoric times, it was the abode of a number of gigantic struthiiform birds, which have been referred to one or two peculiar families—the Dinornithidze and Palapterygidze—and a related family—the Apterygidee—is still 24 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. represented by four species. There are also many other birds rep- resenting genera peculiar to New Zealand. Here also live the only survivors (Sphenodon or Hatterta). of an order of reptiles (Rhyn- chocephalia) which, in ancient times, had a wide distribution. The fresh-water fishes are few, but noteworthy. One genus (Ga/axias) is common to the temperate portions of Australia and South Amer- ica, another (Profotroctes) to New Zealand and South Australia, a third (Veochanna) of the family of Galaxiidz is peculiar, and also peculiar is a genus (/retropfinna) distantly related apparently to the Argentines (smelts, etc.) of the northern realms. The Gastro- pod mollusks, and other invertebrates exhibit a peculiar associa- tion of types, which, at the same time, re-enforces the distinctness of the realm and gives rise to special problems of zoogeography. IX.—THE NESOGHAN REALM. The restricted Polynesian realm is distinguished by negative rather than positive characters, and is to some extent a “‘ refuge of the destitute.’’ It includes all the islands of the tropical portions of the Pacific Ocean combined under the general name Polynesia. It is distinguished from all others by the total—or almost total— absence of indigenous types of mammals. The other common .characters are very few; the avian types, on the whole, recall mostly the Australian forms. There are, according to Wallace, ‘‘not more than about 50 genera and about 150 species of land- birds.’’ It is possible that these islands are the remains of one or more continental areas, and that at least most of them have been submerged and lost their mammals, and on emergence, or rather upheaval, have been peopled from other territories. The analysis of this group would detain us too long, and this realm may, for the present, be considered as a provisional one, to be hereafter studied and properly limited. All the primary zoogeographical divisions recognized by Messrs. Wallace and Allen have now been considered, but the relations of the several realms to one another may be glanced at with profit. As PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS. 25 will be remembered, there are fundamental differences involved in this respect between the views of Messrs. Wallace and Allen. Mr. ?? Wallace’s sequence of his ‘‘ regions ’’ implies a reminiscence of an ancient idea, which was expressed in the translation of the terms ‘*Qld World’”’ and ‘* New World”’ into respectively ‘‘ Paleeogeea’’ and ‘‘ Neogea’’ The realms of Mr. Allen traverse such primary groups, and are rather subordinated to climatic considerations. Still other groupings have been proposed, as, for example, by Professor Huxley, who has segregated the Eurasiatic, Indian, and African realms into an ‘‘Arcteoga,’’ and the South American, or Austro- Columbian, Australasian, and New Zealand ones into a ‘‘ Notogza.”’ And the present author has proposed to contrast the North Ameri- can, Eurasiatic, and Indian realms under the denomination Cen- ogea, with an Logea, comprising the African, South American, Australian, and New Zealand realms. Let us look at some of the facts which may determine our opinion in the case. On the one hand; those forms of animal life which are capable ot easy extension over extensive bodies of land or water, such as the birds, which represent the highest types, physiologically speaking, of life, are distributed in a manner to a large extent co-ordinate with the present arrangement of land and water. The birds seem to have especially become modified and adapted to the present topo- graphical features of our earth at a (geologically speaking) recent epoch. On the other hand, those animals of a more lethargic character, or which are prevented by physical environments from extending their range, are grouped entirely otherwise. This is especially the case with the fresh-water animals of various kinds, and notably with the fresh-water fishes. If the inhabitants of the fresh waters of the globe are taken into consideration, the several realms we have defined may be combined in quite a curious manner, which entirely contradicts the relations which the present combinations of land and water would suggest. It will then be seen that the inhabitants of the northern portions of the several continents of North America, Europe, and Asia belong, 26 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. in a great degree, to the same types; and although the realms thus associated are characterized by a number of forms peculiar severally to each of them, they form a natural whole in contradistinction to the others. Very closely connected with this division is the East Indian, and this forms with them an integral portion of a great super-realm or hemisphere. In striking contrast with the association of forms characteristic of the several divisions alluded to are the fresh-water types of Aus- tralia. Most closely related to Australia in this respect is South America, and in the fresh waters of that continent are to be found several types which are common to the two continents. The only remaining continent—A frica—although presenting some forms that are common to it and India, on the whole furnishes us with an as- sociation of fresh-water forms which recalls the South American realm more than it does any other. Several families of fishes and a number of types of other animals are common to the two and are found nowhere else. — Combining these facts into a systematic whole, it has been pro- posed to segregate the several realms in the manner hinted at, and to combine under the name Zogea (1) the ‘Australian, (2) South American, and (3) African realms ; and under the name Cenogea (4) the North American, (5) the European, and (6) the East Indian realms. og@a gives to us a number of forms which remind us of the ancient inhabitants of the northern hemisphere, and hence the name, while Cexogea has lost most of the forms that were character- istic of the past, and presents the newest aspect of the earth-faunas in contradistinction with the other. | An explanation of these relations may be found in one or other of two hypotheses. (1) The like forms may have originated where they are now found, and have been ever confined within proxi- mately their present limits; or (2) they may be the survivors of anciently widely-distributed races. Neither hypothesis of itself is a sufficient explanation of all the associations in question, but each is applicable to different cases. % PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS. 27 At this point, I will ask your attention for some problems whose pertinency to our discussion will be evident, anda_n answer to which will determine our action in questions yet to be considered. THE EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE ON DISTRIBUTION. Our experimental knowledge of the influence of temperature on animal life in isolated cases prepares us to find it a largely control- ling factor in the geographical distribution of the various minor types, and the thermo-physiology of many super-generic types is in strict consonance with their morphology. Many of the forms which have been noticed as characteristic of specific realms or com- mon to certain zones are limited in their range by thermometric conditions. Asarule, temperature exerts a paramount influence on the distribution of animal life. Nevertheless, the familiar adage that there is no rule without an exception holds good for all the laws of zoogeography. For instance, the tiger, which is as- sociated, in the minds of most persons, with the jungles of torrid India, flourishes likewise in the frigid Amurland; the humming birds, so characteristic of tropical America, are represented by wanderers in the icy regions of both the north and south, and the cyprinoid fishes live and multiply, with not greatly unequal facility, in the waters of the torrid and frigid zones. Nevertheless, the rule in general is that temperature is a most important factor in distri- bution, and probably to its influence, in connection with the former distribution of animal types and the bounds of older continents, are due some of the differences which are now so salient, as, for in- stance, between the North American and Eurasiatic realms. In former times, families now confined to America were also rep- resented in Europe; such are the Snapping turtles or Chelydridz and the Lepidosteidz. Perhaps their present absence from the Eu- ropean fauna is due to their former limitation southward, and the cold of the Quaternary period, which extended over the whole of their European domain and exterminated the species, while in America, although the individuals over a large extent of territory 28 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. succumbed, the types continued to survive in the south, and the deserted lands were repeopled when a gentler climate again pre- vailed. It is well known that the equatorial inhabitants of the old and new worlds are quite dissimilar from one another, and it may be thought that such dissimilarity is antagonistic to the law that tem- perature is a primary factor in distribution. The facts in the case, however, seem at once to justify the law and to necessitate the in- vocation of another. Undoubtedly there are no hindrances offered by the climates of the several equatorial regions to the life of any of the tropical types of life in all of the tropical regions. Their limitation, therefore, must be looked for in other causes; the con- ditions imposed by climate on the north and south, where the con- tinents converge, have forbidden their extension, and the distinct- iveness of the types characteristic of the several regions is a result of the laws of evolution acting during the long ages of dissolution of the respective regions. WHAT TYPE IS MOST FITTED TO EXPRESS FAUNAS ? As will, be remembered, Mr. Wallace has especially insisted on the super-eminent availability of the mammals for the determina- tion of faunal regions, and in this respect is cordially endorsed by Mr. Allen. I fail, however, to appreciate the entire force or per- tinence of their reasons, although to some extent pertinent. The mammals are certainly the best and the only factors to determine the mammalian faunas, but for general faunas all animals are to be considered. The survey of the chronological and geographical history of the various classes of the animal kingdom reveals marked discrepancies between the several types in both of these cases, and we are led to postulate several propositions as tentative hypotheses for proof or disproof. All other things being equal, (1) the longer a type has been in existence, the more widely should it have been disseminated ; (2) the later a type has supervened, the more re- stricted should ‘it be, and the closer its accommodation to existing PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS. 29 conditions ; (3) the stricter the environments of a type are, the less are its means of dispersal ; and (4) the greater the facilities of a type are for extension of its range, the wider should be its range. Now, these propositions are such that they might at first appear to be shallow truisms, but the emphatic proviso that a// other things should be equal is especially necessary to keep us from error in ap- plying the several propositions to the actual faunas. A brief glance at the past history of some classes will render the necessity evident. For example, on the one hand, even in the Paleozoic period, among others, representatives of the classes of Lamellibranchiates, Gastropods, Arachnids, and Insects lived, which are inseparable from families still in existence, while, on the other hand, extremely few, if any, families of mammals or birds have a history which ex- tends back as such into the Eocene Tertiary ; between the two cate- gories expressed by such types the fishes form an intervening term. Presumably, we should, therefore, be justified in expecting a wide distribution of the first series of types, and, inversely, from their geographical distribution, we should expect a long life history for them. Our provisions in both cases would be justified by the facts. And further, a study of the distribution of those types shows that their ranges, in higher groups, are very imperfectly co-ordinate with the present distribution of land. The fresh-water fishes had become more differentiated than the invertebrate types, in Mesozoic and Tertiary times, and are, there- fore, better exponents of the later past relations of continental areas than they are. Their presence, as well as their absence, are very significant, and the bearings of such distribution have been partly indicated in connection with the proposition to recognize the Eogean and Cenogzean worlds. ‘Their study will avail much hereafter in the reconstruction of the continents of the older epochs, and the solution of the derivations of their faunas. Suffice it now to express the opinion that the fishes are among the best indicators of the ancient continental areas, and that the relations of the sev- eral southern continents as to their ichthyic faunas can be best under- f 30 BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. stood by the assumption that at some remote epoch or epochs, (but not probably at any one time,) there was a distribution of land which eventually permitted an emigration and immigration of types from one and into another. ‘The absence or slight intrusion of such forms into the northern continent suggests the doubt as to a perfect continuity of the land or fresh-water systems. There are, however, doubtless other explanations available. Thus far our attention has been confined to the inland—terres- trial and aquatic—animals, and these alone have been relegated to definite realms or regions by Messrs. Wallace and Allen. The marine faunas of the globe have been practically ignored by both of these students, their attention having been chiefly devoted to the inland regions. The marine realms, however, are entirely inde- pendent of the fluvio-terrestrial, and their characteristic associations of animals are determined by other factors. The groupings which ~ I shall now adopt were first outlined by me in 1875,* but certain of the fundamental facts were long ago appreciated. The importance of attention to the temperature of the sea, and especially to that during the coldest month of the year in the two hemispheres, in relation to zoogeography, was, perhaps, most fully appreciated at first by the illustrious and versatile Dana, who, just about thirty years ago, published, for the time, an excellent ‘‘Tsocrymal Chart to Illustrate the Geographical Distribution of Marine Animals’’ and an accompanying memoit,f in which zoo- geographical principles were discussed with eminent learning and wisdom. ‘The chart is still one of the most useful in existence for the student of zoogeography, but later ones answering the purpose, and embodying more recent observations, have been published by _ *% THEODORE GILL. On the Geographical Distribution of Fishes. <Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., (4,)-vol. 15, p. 251-2553 April, 1875.| See also John- son’s New Universal Cyclopzedia, vol. 2 and 4, and The Nation, vol. 24, pp. 27=29, 42, 43; July 12 and 19, 1877. ; + JAMes D. Dana On an Isothermal Oceanic Chart, illustrating the geo- graphical distribution of marine animals. <Am. Journ. Sc. and Arts, (2,) vol. 16, pp. 153-167, 314-327; Sept. and Nov., 1853. PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS. 31 the British admiralty, and in the Encyclopedia Britannica*. Nevertheless, charts based upon the latest observations of the num- erous explorations that have been made within the’ past decade and especially adapted for the zoologist are great desiderata, and it is hoped that our own Coast Survey and Hydrographic Office, or the United States Fish Commission, may supply the want. Prof. Dana } recognized nine ‘‘ regions’’ or categories of tem- perature, segregated under three ‘‘ zones,’’ and all these, except the equatorial, were duplicated in the respective hemispheres, thus: I.—TORRID OR CORAL-REEF ZONE. Regions. Isocrymal limits. 1. Supertorrid, [Eq. ] 80° F. to 80° F. 2. Torrid, [Eq. ] 30” “to 94" 3. Subtorrid, [N., ‘S.F 7 40:68" II.—TEMPERATE ZONE. 1. Warm Temperate, [N., S.] 6S” tO 62" a.